Service Manual

Agilent 7890 Series Gas

Chromatograph

Agilent Technologies

Notices
Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2013

Warranty

No part of this manual may be reproduced

in any form or by any means (including
electronic storage and retrieval or
translation into a foreign language)
without prior agreement and written
consent from Agilent Technologies, Inc. as
governed by United States and
international copyright laws.

The material contained in this document is

provided "as is," and is subject to being
changed, without notice, in future editions.
Further, to the maximum extent permitted
by applicable law, Agilent disclaims all
warranties, either express or implied, with
regard to this manual and any information
contained herein, including but not limited
to the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular
purpose. Agilent shall not be liable for
errors or for incidental or consequential
damages in connection with the
furnishing, use, or performance of this
document or of any information contained
herein. Should Agilent and the user have a
separate written agreement with warranty
terms covering the material in this
document that conflict with these terms,
the warranty terms in the separate
agreement shall control.

Manual Part Number

G3430-90006

Edition
Ninth edition, August 2013
Eighth edition, May 2013
Seventh edition, November 2011
Printed in USA
Agilent Technologies, Inc.
2850 Centerville Road
Wilmington, DE 19808-1610 USA

Safety Notices

A warning calls attention to a condition

or possible situation that could cause
injury to the user.

A caution calls attention to a condition or

possible situation that could damage or
destroy the product or the user's work.

Contents
1

Before Servicing the Instrument

Safety

20

Hand tools

20

Specialized tools for GC support

24

Electronic tools for GC support

26

Pneumatic tools for GC support

For Checking Inlet Pressure

28
30

Inlets
Inlet overview

34

Split/Splitless Inlet 35
Replacing the split/splitless inlet 35
Replacing the split/splitless inlet top weldment assembly 38
Replacing the split/splitless inlet split vent line 39
Replacing the split/splitless inlet split vent filter canister and valve
assembly 40
Reinstalling the split/splitless inlet 42
Multimode Inlet 43
Replacing the multimode inlet 44
Replacing the multimode inlet top weldment assembly 46
Replacing the multimode inlet split vent line 47
Replacing the multimode inlet split vent filter canister and valve
assembly 48
Replacing a Multimode CO2 cryo valve 50
Replacing the Multimode N2 cryo valve 52
Removing the MMI cryo/PC board bracket 54
Replacing the MMI heater/cryo PC board 56
Cool On-Column Inlet 58
Replacing the COC inlet 58
Replacing the COC heater/sensor assembly
Replacing an inlet cryo cooling tube 62
Purged Packed Inlet 65
Replacing the Purged Packed inlet 65
Replacing the Purged Packed inlet heater

60

70

Programmed Temperature Vaporization Inlet (PTV)

Replacing the PTV inlet 74
Replacing the PTV inlet cryo jacket 77

Service Manual

73

Replacing the PTV CO2 or LN2 inlet cryo assembly

Replacing a PTV CO2 cryo valve 80
Replacing the PTV N2 cryo valve 81
Removing the PTV cryo/PC board bracket 83
Replacing the PTV heater/cryo PC board 85

79

Volatiles Interface 87
Replacing or cleaning the volatiles interface 87
Replacing the volatiles interface heater/sensor assembly
Calibrating the interface 92

90

Solvent Vapor Exit Accessory 93

Replacing the SVE valve/fitting assembly 94
Replacing the SVE bleed restrictor column 96
Replacing the SVE tri-column assembly 97
Replacing the SVE pre-column assembly 98

Detectors
Detector overview

100

About the detector signal boards

100

Accessing detector signal boards

103

Replacing detector signal boards

104

Detector signal board, bad checksum error

107

Flame Ionization Detector (FID) 113

Selecting an FID jet 113
Replacing the FID interconnect assembly or spring
To replace the interconnect spring only 117
To replace the interconnect (and spring) 117
Replacing the heater 118
Replacing the FID signal board 122
Replacing the FID electrometer 123
Replacing the FID glow plug (ignitor) 125
Replacing the entire FID 127
Ultrasonic cleaning the FID 130

115

Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) 132

Selecting an NPD jet 132
Removing the NPD electrometer
134
Removing the NPD electrometer 134
Replacing the entire NPD 136
Replacing an NPD signal board 138
Replacing the NPD heater 140
Replacing the NPD electrometer
142

Service Manual

Cleaning the NPD jet and collector

Cleaning the NPD 146

144

Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) 148

Replacing the TCD detector cell 148
Replacing the TCD switching valve 150
Micro-cell Electron Capture Detector (uECD) 152
Replacing the uECD heater/sensor assembly 152
Replacing the uECD makeup gas adapter 154
Frequency test 156
Leak test 158
Performing a radioactivity leak test (wipe test) 159
Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) 7890A 160
Preparing for maintenance 160
Disassembling the FPD 161
Rebuilding the FPD optics assembly 171
Reassembling the FPD 178
Replacing the FPD 186
Bake out and run checkout test 188
Replacing the heater/sensor assemblies 189
Replacing the FPD signal board 194

EPC modules
EPC overview

196

Repairing EPC modules

197

Accessing EPC modules

199

Replacing the EPC modules

200

Replacing EPC module proportional valves

203

Inlet modules 205

Inlet modules 206
Proportional valves 207
Detector modules 208
Detector modules 209
Proportional valves 210
Pneumatics Control Module (PCM) 211
Calibrating the PCM interface 212
Changing the PCM pressure channel frit
Correcting PCM leaks 215
Potential PCM leak areas 216
Aux EPCs

Service Manual

213

217

Frits for auxiliary pressure control channels

Procedure for replacing frit 220

218

Updating PID Constants 221

Updating PID constants 222
No positive feedback on reconnect 226
Updating PID constants available for use by Instrument Utilities

Performance Verification
About Chromatographic Checkout

229

To Prepare for Chromatographic Checkout

To Check FID Performance
Typical values 237

230

232

To Check NPD Performance

Typical values 243

238

To Check TCD Performance

Typical values 249

244

To Check uECD Performance

Typical values 255

250

To Check FPD Performance (Sample 5188-5953)

Preparation 256
Phosphorus performance 257
Typical values 261
Sulfur performance 262
Typical values 263

256

To Check FPD Performance (Sample 5188-5245, Japan)

Preparation 264
Phosphorus performance 265
Typical values 269
Sulfur performance 270
Typical values 271

227

264

Configuration
Configuration overview 273
Inlet example 274
Detector example 275
PCM example 276
AUX example 277
Heater assignments 278
GC modules and the communications buss

280

Service Manual

To configure an MSD transfer line

To configure a valve box 286
MSD transfer line heater error
Initial steps 286
If that doesn't work 287
Replacing a GC module

288

Removing a GC module

289

283
286

Changing the GC configuration 290

Agilent data system methods 290
Methods stored in GC 290
Configuration locks

291

Installing new devices

Configuring time

292

294

External Cabling
Connectors on the back of the GC

296

Remote Start/Stop 297

APG Remote Control 297
Electrical specifications 297
Suggested Drive Circuits 298
The Remote Connector 298
Signal Descriptions 299
Timing Diagram 299
Cable pinouts, remote start/stop, general use 300
Cable pinouts, GC to 3395B/3396C Integrator 301
Cable pinouts, GC to 35900C, D, E/MSD/Sampler, 2 meters
Cable pinouts, GC to Headspace Sampler 303
Cable pinouts, APG Remote Y-cable 304
External event

302

305

Automatic sampler for GC 306

Cable pinouts, GC to G2613A Injector 306
Cable pinouts, GC to G4513A and 7650 Injector
Cable pinouts, GC to G2614A Tray 308
Cable pinouts, GC to G4514A Tray 309

307

Analog signal outputs 310

Analog cable: GC to 3395A/B or 3396B/C Integrators and 35900 C/D/E
Analog to Digital Interface instrument 310
Analog cable: general use 311

Service Manual

Analog signal inputs 312

General purpose AIB cable 312
XCD Chemiluminescence detector AIB cable

312

Internal Cabling
Internal cabling overview

314

MSD transfer line heater cable

315

Third detector heated zone cable

316

Communication harness 317

Power connection table 318
Data communication table 319
Motor Harness & AC Control Assembly
320
Keyboard and display connection board (original style only)
AC power inlet assemblies 323
Keyboard and display connection board (original style only)
AC power inlet assemblies
Inlet/Detector harness

326
328

Third detector EPC communication cable

Keyboard/Display harness
Keyboard interconnect board

332

Heated zone extension cable

333

Ignitor cable, FID

334

Ignitor cable, FPD

335

PTV thermocouple cable

330

331

RS-232 cable, ALS controller

336

337

339

Mainframe
Mainframe overview

341

Covers and Fans 342

Removing and replacing the covers 343
Detector top cover 343
The pneumatics top cover 343
Replacing the pneumatics top cover buttons
The electronics top cover 343
The side covers 343

324

325

Auxiliary zone/Valve box harness

NPD power cable

322

343

Service Manual

The rear covers 344

The side cover on the third detector assembly
Replacing the inlet cooling fan 345
Replacing the EPC cooling fan 346
Replacing the oven bezel

348

Replacing the oven door

349

Replacing the oven door button

344

350

Replacing the keypad assembly and display board 351

Replacing the keypad assembly (original style) 351
Replacing only the display board (original style) 354
Replacing the keypad assembly (new style) 356
Replacing only the display board (new style) 357
Replacing the original keypad assembly with the new assembly
Oven temperature control

359

362

Oven temperature troubleshooting

Oven does not heat up 363
Oven not cooling or never cools

363
364

Testing resistance of the heater coil

365

Cryo valve installation/replacement 366

Installing a new cryo valve 366
Replacing an existing cryo valve 368
Replacing the oven sensor

371

Replacing the oven door sensor

372

Replacing the oven shroud, oven fan, and oven fan motor
Replacing the oven flapper assembly
Replacing the flapper or flapper motor

375

381
383

Replacing Components Inside the Electronics Panel 385

Accessing the analog and power board 385
Replacing the ALS board 386
Replacing the fuse on the ALS controller board 389
Troubleshooting 390
Removing the valve bracket 391
Replacing the logic board 392
Check GC configuration 395
Replacing the analog and power board 396
Replacing Components Inside the Lower Rear Metal Cover
Replacing AC board fuse sets 401
Replacing the AC board 402

Service Manual

400

Replacing the oven triac 404

Replacing the power transformer

10

406

Valves
Valves 409
Introduction 410
Valco W-series minivalves 411
Valve bodies 411
Valve rotors 412
Preload assembly (not shown) 412
Valco W-series minivalve 413
Valve bodies 413
Valve rotors 414
General purpose valves 415
Gas sample valves 415
Gas sample loops 415
Adjustable restrictor valves 415
Liquid sample valves 416
Valve Box 417
Installing the valve box 417
Removing the valve box assembly

422

Actuators 423
Installing the actuators 423
Installing the actuator on a heated valve box
426
Installing the actuator on a side mount bracket 429
Valve actuator alignment 430
Valve actuator drivers 431
Solenoid differences 431
Which solenoid valve is installed?
431
Replacing an original solenoid valve 431
Installing a new valve stack assembly 432
Original style 432
Assemble the valve driver block 432
Install the bracket and cabling (original style) 433
Installing the valve driver block 434
New style 436
Replacing a solenoid valve (new style) 436
Installing the valve driver (solenoid) bracket, cabling, and elbow fitting
(new style) 441
Typical Valve Configurations 442
Option numbers 443
Custom Plumbing (diagram required), Option 700 or 730

10

443

Service Manual

Gas Sampling Option, Option 701 or 731 443

Column Isolation, Option 702 or 732 444
Two Stream Selection (Requires Gas Sampling), Option 703 or 733 444
Backflush to Detector, Option 704 or 734 445
Backflush a Precolumn to Vent, Option 705 or 735 445
Column Selection (Unused Column Isolated), Option 706 or 736 446
Sequence Reverse, Option 707 or 737 446
Sequence Reverse with Backflush of Column 1, Option 708 or 738 447
Custom Plumbing (Diagram Required), Option 800 or 830 447
Gas Sampling with Backflush of Precolumn to Vent, Option 801 or
831 448
Gas Sampling with Backflush to Detector, Option 802 or 832 448
Gas Sampling of Alternate Streams, Option 803 or 833 449
Gas Sampling with Sequence Reverse, Option 804 or 834 449
Gas Sampling with Sequence Reverse and Backflush of Column 1, Option
805 or 835 450
Column Selection with Backflush to Vent, Option 806 or 836 450
Liquid Sampling, Options 850, 852, 854, and 856 451
Troubleshooting 452
Chromatographic symptoms 452
Loss of sensitivity or excessive drift 453
Loss of peaks in specific areas of the chromatogram
Extraneous peaks 453
Peak broadening and tailing 454
Baseline shifts 454
Baseline upsets 454
Variation in peak area and retention time 455
Pressure check 455

11

453

Capillary flow technology (CFT) devices

CFT overview

458

Ultimate union 460

Tools and kits 460
Metal ferrules and nuts 461
Assembling nut, ferrule and swaging nut 461
Connecting and disconnecting columns 464
Mounting the union 464

Service Manual

11

12

Electrical
Power options 466
Regular oven 466
Fast oven 467
Converting the power option
Procedure 469

469

Remote start/stop connection

Remote control

470

471

Measuring inlet and detector heater and PRT resistance

Sensor resistance 474
Temperature sensor resistance
Oven heater coil resistance

475

476

Setting the instrument power configuration

Line voltage configuration plug
Ceramic and glass fuses
AC power board schematic
Oven shroud

13

472

477

478

479
480

481

Firmware
Firmware overview

483

To Update GC Firmware 484

Troubleshooting problems 486
Firmware history 487
7890 A.01.10.2 488
7890 A.01.10.1 489
7890 A.01.10 490
7890 A.01.09.2 490
7890 A.01.09.1 491
7890 A.01.09 491
7890 A.01.08 492
7890 A.01.07 492
7890A.01.04 492
7890A.01.03 494
7890A.01.02.581 494
Confirm firmware update

495

Problems and solutions 496

Possible solutions to unusual behaviors

12

496

Service Manual

Clearing battery-backed PF-RAM (7890A only)

Partial clear 497
Total clear 497

14

Set the default method

500

Default method listing

501

497

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Firmware overview for channel partners
Tuning a small heated zone

508

509

Thermal Aux Configuration 510

Heater and cryo connection locations 510
Connections assigned to a thermal zone 511
Auxiliary Type Selection 512
User Configurable Heater 513
Custom heater parameters 513
Programmable temperature zones 514
Cryo control model 515
Configuring the thermal Aux zone (Firmware A.01.07) 516
Configuring the thermal Aux zone (Firmware A.01.08 and A.01.09)

519

Valve Box Configuration 521

Heater connection locations 522
Custom heater parameters 523
Custom Heater Conf. 523
View Custom Heater Conf. 523
The PID and Mass fields 523
The Power field 523
Configuring the Valve Box Zone 524
Inlet configuration 525
Hardware configuration 526
EPC module installation 527
Heater and Cryo installation 528
The Inlet configuration display 529
Gas type 529
Cryo Parameters 529
Cryo type 529
Cryo 529
Use Cryo temperature 529
Cryo timeout 529
Cryo fault 529
Custom heater parameters 530
Configured hardware 531

Service Manual

13

Configuring a custom inlet (Firmware A.01.05) 532

Configuring a custom inlet (Firmware A.01.07) 534
Configuration procedure 537
Configuring a custom inlet (Firmware A.01.08 and A.01.09)

538

Cryo focus valve configuration 540

Operation 540
Assigned connections 540
Cryo trap configuration

541

Detector configuration 543

FID Signal 1 Detector Hardware Connections
AIB Signal 1 Detector Hardware Connections
Aux Detector Hardware Connections 548
EPC module installation 548
Detector Board Installation 549
Heater installation 549
Configuring a custom detector 550

15

Service Mode Diagnostics

Service mode overview
Detector diagnostics

553
554

Signal board diagnostics

Multiplexed ADC
Pneumatics

16

Accessories and options

17

Printed circuit boards

555

556

557

Power diagnostics

558

Summary of PCB Part Numbers

AC power board

568

569

Analog and power board

570

Logic and communications board (7890A)

572

Logic and communications board (7890B)

573

FID signal board

TCD signal board
uECD signal board
FPD signal board

14

544
546

574
575
576
577

Service Manual

NPD signal board

578

FID electrometer board

uECD electrometer board
NPD electrometer board
Analog input board

18

579
580
581

582

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Inlets 584
Split/Splitless Inlet (SSL) 585
Split/Splitless Inlet, Top 586
SSL Split Vent Trap 587
Split Splitless Inlet Body 588
Split Splitless Inlet Warmer 590
Multimode Inlet (MMI) 591
Multimode Inlet Body 594
MMI Top Insert Assembly 596
MMI Split Vent Trap 598
7890A MMI Temperature controller 599
7890B MMI Temperature controller 600
7890A MMI Cryo assemblies 601
7890B MMI Cryo assemblies 602
Purged Packed Inlet (PP) 603
Purged Packed Inlet Upper Body 604
Purged Packed Inlet Lower Parts 606
Cool on-column inlet (COC) 608
Cool on-column inlet body 609
Programmed Temperature Vaporization Inlet (PTV)
PTV Inlet Body 613
PTV Septumless head 615
PTV Split vent 616
PTV Temperature controller 617
PTV CO2 cryo assembly 618
PTV LN2 cryo assembly, 7890A 619
PTV LN2 cryo assembly, 7890B 620
Volatiles Interface (VI) 622
Volatiles Interface (VI) 623
Volatiles Interface Trap 625
Detectors 627
Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
FID detector 629
FID Base Assembly 631

Service Manual

611

628

15

PM kits for the FID 633

Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) 634
FPD inert transfer line parts 636
FPD ignitor and heat shield assembly 638
PMT and bracket assemblies 640
FPD lens assembly 643
FPD Covers 644
FPD+ (High Temperature FPD) 646
FPD+ Assemblies 648
Microcell Electron Capture Detector (uECD) 654
Microcell Electron Capture Detector (uECD) parts
uECD Side Mount (3rd Detector) Parts 657
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) 659
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) parts 660
Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) 662
Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) parts 665

655

EPC Module Parts 669

Lookup table 669
Inlet modules 670
Detector modules 671
PCM modules 672
Aux EPCs 673
Nickel Catalyst Accessory

674

Oven 676
Oven assembly 677
Oven flapper assembly 680
CO2 cryogenic cooling 682
Liquid nitrogen (LN2) cryogenic cooling

684

Valves 685
Valve box assembly 686
Valve driver assembly 688
Valve driver assembly (original style) 689
Valve driver assembly (new style) 691
Valve actuator assembly (1 of 2) 694
Valve actuator assembly (2 of 2) 696
Miscellaneous Valve Parts 698

16

Service Manual

Electronics and Fans 700

Electronics carrier 701
Keyboard Assemblies 705
7890A Keyboard and Display (original style) 705
7890A Keyboard and Display (new style) 707
7890B Keyboard and Display 709
AC circuit board components 711
AC power 713
Power cords 715
Main transformer 716
Analog input board (G1556A accessory) 718
Chassis fans 719
Covers 720
Plastic covers 721
Back covers 723
Auto-injector mounting and parking posts
7890A Side Carrier 726
7890B Side Carrier 727
Mainframe 728

724

Tools 729
Shipping Crates 729
Hand tools 730
Specialized tools for GC support 734
Electronic tools for GC support 736
Pneumatic tools for GC support 738
For Checking Inlet Pressure 740

Service Manual

17

18

Service Manual

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

1 Before Servicing the Instrument

Safety 20
Hand tools 20
Specialized tools for GC support 24
Electronic tools for GC support 26
Pneumatic tools for GC support 28

Agilent Technologies

19

Before Servicing the Instrument

Safety
Before servicing the GC, observe the safety precautions in the
7890 Series GC Safety Manual.

Hand tools
We assume you have a well-equipped toolbox, but some of the
special tools listed here will be helpful.
Table 1

20

7890 Series GC tool bag, 5182-3456

Description

Part no.

Wrench, 1/4-inch to 5/16-inch

8710-0510

Wrench, open-end, 7/16-inch and 9/16-inch

8710-0803

Wrench, open-end, 1/2-inch and 7/16-inch

8710-0806

Wrench, open-end, 7/16-inch and 3/8-inch

8710-0972

Driver, nut, 7-mm

8710-1217

Cutter, tube

8710-1709

Screwdriver, Torx T-20

8710-1615

Screwdriver, Torx T-10

8710-1623

Tool bag

9222-3253

Tool, ferrule, .25.32 mm, 2 x 3 x 3/4-inch

RFT-2500

Tool, ferrule, .53 mm

RFT-5300

Lens, magnifying

G2855-40001

Septum tool, knurled handle

450-1000

7890 Series GC IPB

Before Servicing the Instrument

Drivers
T-20 Torx Driver 5182-3465
T-20 Torx Key (for close-quarters work) 8710-1807
T-10 Torx Driver 5182-3466

7890 Series GC IPB

21

Before Servicing the Instrument

T-10 Torx Key (for close-quarters work) 8710-2140

#1 Pozidriv screwdriver 8710-0899
#2 Pozidriv screwdriver 8710-0900
Flat-blade screwdriver 8730-0008
1/4-inch Nut Driver 8710-1561 (FID Jets)
7-mm Nut Driver 8710-1217
Wrenches
Wrench, 1/4-inch to 5/16-inch 8710-0510
Wrench, open-end, 7/16-inch and 9/16-inch 8710-0803
Wrench, open-end, 1/2-inch and 7/16-inch 8710-0806
Wrench, open-end, 7/16-inch and 3/8-inch 8710-0972
Wrench, adjustable, 12-inch 8710-1712
Wrench, open-end, 3/16-inch x 1/4-inch 8710-2618
Wrench, open-end, 9/16-inch x 5/8-inch 8720-0010
Wrench, 7-mm x 8-mm 1340407010
Wrench, 6-mm x 7-mm 1340407011
Wrench, 8-mm x 10-mm 1340407012
Wrench, 6-mm x 6-mm 8710-2156
Wrench, 5-mm x 5-mm 8710-2157
Cutters/Crimpers/Strippers
Diagonal Cutters
Crimper/Wire Strippers
Tubing Cutters
Restek #20193 http://www.restekcorp.com
Agilent 8710-1709
Agilent precision tubing cutter for 1/16-in. SS tubing
5190-1442
Alternate for Europe:
HICHROM Ltd - Part No: HI-196
Description: Tubing Cutters - Price: 17.00
1 The Markham Centre Station Road Theale, Berkshire
RG7 4PE, UK Telephone: +44 (0) 118 930 3660
mailto: [email protected]

22

7890 Series GC IPB

Before Servicing the Instrument

Pliers
Channel lock pliers
Slip-joint pliers
Needle nose pliers
Agilent needle nose pliers 8710-0004
Agilent Truarc pliers 8710-0018

7890 Series GC IPB

23

Before Servicing the Instrument

Specialized tools for GC support

FID Flow Tool 19301-60660

FID Cleaning Kit 9301-0985, (.010-inch Guitar String)
Injection Port Cleaning Kit 480-0003

24

7890 Series GC IPB

Before Servicing the Instrument

12 Piece File Kit RSF-1200

(Ferrule Removal tool, not shown 440-1000)
Fiberglass Tape 0460-0186
PTFE Tape 0460-0016
White Gloves 8650-0030

NPT Adapter 0100-0118

5/16-inch by #20 Thread Chaser (Die), to clean 1/8-inch
Swagelok threads Other Supplier
On/Off Valve, 1/8-inch Ball Valve 0100-2144
Exacto Knife
Metric (8710-0641) and English Allen Wrench Hex Keys
Pin Vise and small drill bit
Tweezers 8710-0007
Micro Probes (Sharp Object) RMP-5005 Qty 5
Inspection Mirror 707-0027
1.25-inch socket and ratchet for removing FID brass
retaining nut
Column cutter wafer, 4/pk 5181-8836
6890 inlet wrench 19251-00100
7890 inlet wrench (for SSL and MMI) G3452-20512

7890 Series GC IPB

25

Before Servicing the Instrument

Electronic tools for GC support

Digital Multimeter (Agilent U1231A True RMS shown)

Power Outlet Test Tool (Radio Shack/Sears/Electrical
Supply)
Static Strap 9300-0969 (small) or 9300-0970 (large), 5 ft
cord/clip 9300-0980
Wrist strap, disposable, 4-LG 1-W 9300-1408
Various jumpers and clip leads electronic supply
ESD mat 9300-1484
Useful Cables not shown:
Crossover LAN Cable 5183-4649
9 Pin RS-232 Null Modem Cable G1530-60600
USB/RS-232 adapter cable 8121-1013
Sensor pin extractor 8710-1542

26

7890 Series GC IPB

Before Servicing the Instrument

7890 Series GC IPB

27

Before Servicing the Instrument

Pneumatic tools for GC support

28

7890 Series GC IPB

Before Servicing the Instrument

Electronic Leak Detector

G3388B (or G3388A)
5182-9646, 120 VAC
5182-9648, 220 VAC (Agilent)
Rotameter, Porter Model 65
Tube 1: 10-70 cc/min He, Tube 2: 85850 cc/min Air
http://www.porterinstrument.com/indust_21.php
Electronic Flow Meter
Preferred flow meter: Precision gas flow meter, flow range
5500 mL/min 5067-0223

ADM 1000 220-1170

ADM 2000 220-1171-U (Mass Flow Version)
Electronic "Mass" Flow Meter Flow Tracker
Model 1000 Flow Only 5183-4779
Model 2000 with Leak Detector 5183-4780
Universal Power Adapter 5183-4781
White Silicone Tubing:
4 meters 701-0016
7 cm 220-1179
PTFE tubing, 1/8-inch, 1 m long G1290-80050
7890 Series GC IPB

29

Before Servicing the Instrument

For Checking Inlet Pressure

Quality Analog Pressure Gauge (0-100 or 0-60 PSIG) adapted
with a Headspace Probe (301-013-HSP) need NPT adapter
0100-0118 and TCD Ferrules Set 5180-4103, 5182-9673,
5182-3477
Digital Pressure Gauge (0-100 PSIG) Omega Model
HHP-201 Adapted with 1/8-inch NPT adapter 0100-0111, SS
Capillary 5021-1831, Reducing Ferrule 0100-1342 and 530
uM Column Ferrule 5080-8773

NPD Flow adapter - G1534-60640

G1530-20610 - FID/NPD Jet Plug

"No-Hole" Column Ferrules 5181-7458

30

7890 Series GC IPB

Before Servicing the Instrument

FID Flow adapter - 19301-60660

5060-9055 uECD/TCD Detector Plug

Plastic 1/8-inch Swagelok Cap P/N 0100-2414 Qty 3

Replacement Septum Purge Fitting for EPC Module P/N
G2630-61720 (Not included in kit)

7890 Series GC IPB

31

Before Servicing the Instrument

Blanking plug, finger tight, 5020-8294. (Can be used with any

ferrule to duplicate using a no-hole ferrule.)

32

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

2 Inlets
Split/Splitless Inlet 35
Multimode Inlet 43
Cool On-Column Inlet 58
Purged Packed Inlet 65
Programmed Temperature Vaporization Inlet (PTV) 73
Volatiles Interface 87
Solvent Vapor Exit Accessory 93

Agilent Technologies

33

Inlets

Inlet overview
Inlets are a means of introducing a sample into the carrier gas
stream and then into the analyzing column. The term "Inlets"
includes:
Injection ports, for use with a syringe
Sampling valves, both liquid and gas, for high sample size
reproducibility
Vapor inlets, in which the sample is vaporized in an external
sampler, then swept into the GC. Headspace and thermal
desorbers are examples.
Solid samplers
and other devices.

34

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Split/Splitless Inlet
This is the general-purpose inlet for use with capillary columns.
It vaporizes the sample in a heated liner, then delivers all
(splitless mode) or a specified fraction (split mode) of the vapor
to the column.

Replacing the split/splitless inlet

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
3 Inside the oven, remove interferences as needed: column(s),

the inlet insulating cup, and so forth.

4 Remove the split/splitless top weldment assembly. See

Replacing the split/splitless inlet top weldment assembly.

5 At the top of the GC, remove screws from the injection port

top cover and remove the cover to expose the inlet assembly.

7890 Series GC IPB

35

Inlets

6 Disconnect the split vent line.

7 Disconnect the sensor/heater cable and work it back through

any interfering wiring, tubing, and/or GC frame members.

8 Remove 3 screws to release the inlet body assembly with its

insulation and cup and lift the assembly from the GC.

36

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

9 Replacing the inlet assembly is the reverse of these steps. Pay

attention to rotational orientations of the inlet body, the

preformed insulation and its cup, and positions of the split
vent connection and the heater/sensor cable as you fit the
assembly into the GC.

7890 Series GC IPB

37

Inlets

Replacing the split/splitless inlet top weldment assembly

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Rotate the locking tab to release the top weldment assembly

from the split/splitless inlet.

4 Disconnect tubing connector blocks at the EPC module

locations (T-10 screwdriver). Take care to make sure sealing

O-rings are not dislodged or damaged.
5 Guide the top weldment assembly carefully through any

interfering wiring and/or tubing to remove it from the GC.

6 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

38

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Replacing the split/splitless inlet split vent line

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top EPC module cover and the left side panel on

the GC.

4 Remove the inlet cover.

5 Disconnect the split vent line from the inlet and from the

trap canister. At the trap end, use two wrenches against each
other to prevent the trap body from rotating.

CAUTION

When removing/attaching the split vent line at its trap canister,

always use one wrench to support the canister fitting and one to
tighten the nut. Failure to do this could break the seal within the
canister.
6 Remove the split vent line for cleaning or replacement.
7 Replacement is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

39

Inlets

Replacing the split/splitless inlet split vent filter canister and valve
assembly
1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top EPC module cover.

4 Disconnect the cable to the split valve from the inlet EPC

module. See Replacing the split/splitless inlet split vent

line.

40

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

5 Disconnect the split vent line. See Replacing the EPC

modules.
6 Loosen the screw securing the canister retainer enough to

rotate it aside. Loosen 2 screws to release the split valve

assembly.
7 The canister and split valve are removed as a unit. Note that

the split valve is now easily accessible for replacement if

needed.
8 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

41

Inlets

Reinstalling the split/splitless inlet

1 Make sure the heater/sensor assembly is installed and the

inlet insulation sleeve is in place.

2 Install a column nut and blank ferrule on the bottom of the

inlet to prevent insulation contamination, and place the inlet

into the inlet carrier.

NOTE

Make sure the insulation is properly seated around the inlet and that the
heater/sensor wiring harness insulation sleeve is tucked under the top
inlet plate.
3 Retighten the three screws (Torx T-20) to secure the top inlet

weldment plate to the inlet carrier.

4 Reconnect the split vent flow line.
5 Reinstall the top insert assembly (with septum and carrier

lines attached). Line up the tab on the bottom of the top

insert assembly with the hole on the insert weldment
assembly so that the locking tab is on the left. Push down to
connect. Slide the locking tab to the back.
6 Route the septum purge and carrier gas lines along the oven

side of the inlet carrier and into the chassis slots leading to
the EPC module.
7 Seat the heater/sensor leads into the channel on the inlet

carrier.
8 Reconnect the heater/sensor assembly into the provided

connector (front or back) on the left side of the GC.

9 Reinstall the insulated thermal cup and insulation in the GC

oven.
10 Reinstall the inlet cover.

42

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Multimode Inlet
The multimode inlet (MMI) is a programmable temperature
vaporization inlet based off of the standard split-spitless inlet. It
has six modes of operation: split, splitless, pulsed split, pulsed
splitless, solvent vent, and direct. The inlet has the same
internal configuration and dimensions of the split/splitless
inlet, and uses the same liners, consumables, ferrules, O-rings,
and septa as the split/splitless inlet.
The differences include:
Cooling jacket for CO2, LN2, and air cooling
Free-spinning nut for column connection
No gold seal
Like the PTV, the MMI requires a thermocouple PCB and
additional harness connections.
7890A and 7890A+: Due to space limitations (you can only have
one thermocouple PCB in the GC), only one MMI or PTV is
allowed per GC.
7890B: Two MMIs can be installed.

7890 Series GC IPB

43

Inlets

Replacing the multimode inlet

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
3 Inside the oven, remove interferences as needed: column(s),

the inlet insulating cup, and so forth.

4 Remove the multimode top weldment assembly. See

Replacing the multimode inlet split vent line.

5 At the top of the GC, remove screws from the injection port

top cover and remove the cover to expose the inlet assembly.

44

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

6 Disconnect the split vent line.

7 Disconnect the sensor/heater cable and work it back through

any interfering wiring, tubing, and/or GC frame members.

8 Disconnect the plug labeled PCB from the wiring harness.
9 Disconnect the cryo line (use two wrenches against each

other to prevent rotation).

10 Remove 3 screws to release the inlet body assembly with its

insulation and cup and lift the assembly from the GC.
11 Replacing the inlet assembly is the reverse of these steps. Pay

attention to rotational orientations of the inlet body, the

preformed insulation and its cup, and positions of the split
vent connection and the heater/sensor cable as you fit the
assembly into the GC.

7890 Series GC IPB

45

Inlets

Replacing the multimode inlet top weldment assembly

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Rotate the locking tab to release the top weldment assembly

from the multimode inlet.

4 Disconnect tubing connector blocks at the EPC module

locations (T-10 screwdriver). Take care to make sure sealing

O-rings are not dislodged or damaged.
5 Guide the top weldment assembly carefully through any

interfering wiring and/or tubing to remove it from the GC.

6 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

46

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Replacing the multimode inlet split vent line

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top EPC module cover and the left side panel on

the GC.

4 Remove the inlet cover.

5 Disconnect the split vent line from the inlet and from the

trap canister. At the trap end, use two wrenches against each
other to prevent the trap body from rotating.

CAUTION

When removing/attaching the split vent line at its trap canister,

always use one wrench to support the canister fitting and one to
tighten the nut. Failure to do this could break the seal within the
canister.
6 Remove the split vent line for cleaning or replacement.
7 Replacement is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

47

Inlets

Replacing the multimode inlet split vent filter canister and valve
assembly
1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top EPC module cover.

4 Disconnect the cable to the split valve from the inlet EPC

module. See Replacing the multimode inlet split vent line.

5 Disconnect the split vent line. See Replacing the EPC

modules.

48

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

6 Loosen the screw securing the canister retainer enough to

rotate it aside. Loosen 2 screws to release the split valve

assembly.
7 The canister and split valve are removed as a unit. Note that

the split valve is now easily accessible for replacement if

needed.
8 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

49

Inlets

Replacing a Multimode CO2 cryo valve

WA R N I N G

High pressure or extremely cold gas. Before replacing the cryo

valve, turn off the cryo line at the source, and depressurize the
cryo line to the GC.
If changing the GC configuration, see Changing the GC
configuration for important information regarding GC
methods. Then proceed with the steps below.
1 Cool down the oven and all heated zones.
2 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
3 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

50

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

4 Remove the valve via its two mounting screws accessible

under the removed bracket assembly. See Removing the

MMI cryo/PC board bracket for details.
5 When reinstalling, make sure the valve is oriented correctly

on the bracket with its cryo feed input connection towards

the rear of the GC and that its cable is reconnected to the
nearby PC board.

7890 Series GC IPB

51

Inlets

Replacing the Multimode N2 cryo valve

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the inlet cover and GC left side panel.
4 Remove the N2 cryo feed tube between the cryo valve and the

multimode inlet.
5 Remove two screws from the multimode N2 cryo feed cover

plate. Remove the cover plate.

6 Disconnect the multimode N2 cryo valve cable. If you intend

to replace this cable with a new one, use the existing cable as

52

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

a model while you install the new cable, then remove the old
cable.
7 Remove the valve bracket and cryo valve by removing three

screws.

8 Replace the N2 cryo valve assembly by reversing these steps.

9 Reinstall the N2 cryo tube between the valve and the inlet.

7890 Series GC IPB

53

Inlets

Removing the MMI cryo/PC board bracket

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top EPC module cover.

4 Disconnect cables to the multimode heater/cryo PC board.

See Replacing the MMI heater/cryo PC board.

5 If a multimode CO2 valve is present, disconnect its cryo feed

lines (CO2 in / CO2 out).

6 Remove two screws securing the bracket to the GC.

54

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

7 Lift the bracket assembly out of the GC working it around

any interfering wiring and/or tubing.

NOTE

The multimode CO2 cryo valve, if present, is also mounted on this bracket.

8 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

55

Inlets

Replacing the MMI heater/cryo PC board

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top EPC module cover.

56

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

4 To remove the heater/cryo PC board, first remove its three

cables: from left-to-right, respectively, the LN2 (liquid

nitrogen) cryo valve cable (if present), the thermocouple
cable, and the heater/sensor cable.
5 Next, remove two T-20 screws securing the board onto its

bracket.
6 Lift the board straight up and out of the GC.
7 Installing the new board is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

57

Inlets

Cool On-Column Inlet

Cool On-Column (COC) inlets allow the injection syringe to
deposit the liquid sample directly into the capillary column.
This is accomplished by the use of an insert which aligns the
syringe with the capillary column and the syringe needle.

Replacing the COC inlet

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 From inside the oven, remove the column from the inlet

fitting.
4 From the top of the GC, remove the inlet carrier cover (or the

tray/tray bracket, if installed) and the left side cover.

5 Unclip the heater/sensor leads from the connector to the left

of the inlet carrier.

6 Disconnect the inlet plumbing and remove from the chassis

slot leading to the EPC flow module.

7 Disconnect the inlet plumbing pneumatics blocks from the

EPC flow module (Torx T-10).

8 Use a Torx T-20 screwdriver to loosen the three captive

screws that attach the inlet weldment to the top of the inlet
carrier.
9 Slide the inlet up out of the inlet carrier. If necessary, you

can also slide the insulation sleeve off the bottom of the inlet.
10 Reinstallation is the reverse of these steps. Use new O-rings

when reconnecting the pneumatic tubing to the EPC flow

module.
58

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

7890 Series GC IPB

59

Inlets

Replacing the COC heater/sensor assembly

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 If necessary, remove the septum nut, cooling tower and/or

needle guide to provide access to the two screws in the top of

the cooling fin.

NOTE

If desired, you can remove the entire inlet for better access.

4 Remove the screws securing the cooling fin to the inlet

weldment and remove the fin.

5 Lift the heater/sensor leads out of the weldment channel and

lift the assembly out of the inlet.

6 Install the new heater/sensor assembly and reassemble the

inlet. You may need to use tweezers to seat the cable back in
the channel and fully seat the heater/sensor in the weldment.

60

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

7890 Series GC IPB

61

Inlets

Replacing an inlet cryo cooling tube

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

NOTE

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

Unless otherwise noted, the installation process is the same for both
LCO2 and LN2 oven cryo valves, and for front or back inlet locations.

Preparation of the inlet

1 Remove the septum retaining nut carefully: there is a small

septum and very small coil spring held in place by the nut.

NOTE

These parts, especially the coil spring, are easily lost. For their safety, it is
recommended that the spring, septum, and septum retainer nut be kept
together in a safe place for later reassembly.
2 Next, remove the heat sink by removing its two screws.
3 If the inlet is secured into the inlet chassis, release its three

mounting screws and pull it straight upwards enough to

expose the full length of the inlet body.
4 If, as you raise the inlet body, there is a large insulation pad

either on the inlet body or in the inlet's mounting hole, it

must be carefully removed to preserve its integrity.
5 Carefully inspect both the inlet mounting flange and the

existing end of the inlet cryo cooling tube to be replaced:

Note the large, round hole in the flange - this is the pass
through for the nozzle end of the inlet cryo cooling tube.
62

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Also note the smaller, square hole with a raised metal tab
adjacent to the round hole - this is a location and
alignment guide. The double right-angle bent portion of
the inlet cryo cooling tube must be routed over the square
hole and against the tab when installation is complete.
6 Remove the old tube from the inlet and entirely from the GC.

Use two wrenches against each other at the T-fitting to avoid

twisting tube.
7 Install the new inlet cryo cooling tube into the opening in the

mounting flange, as noted in step 5.

8 Carefully work the insulation pad onto both the inlet body

and inlet cryo cooling nozzle such that you end with both the
inlet cryo cooling tube and the tube on the inlet body in the
slit provided in the insulation pad (if two precut slits are
present, use one for each tube). Work the pad upwards until
it contacts the inlet mounting flange.

NOTE

In the next step, maintain control over the inlet cryo cooling tube as you
insert and secure the inlet: the tube must not be allowed to slip deeper
into the inlet cavity than as described in the inspection detail item in
steps 3-8: basically, the tube's double right-angle bend must remain in its
described position at all times.
9 Lower the inlet into its prepared location with its three

screws aligned with the holes in the inlet chassis and its
heater/sensor cable sitting in the trough in the inlet chassis.
While doing so, mark where to bend the inlet cryo cooling
tube into its channel across the inlet chassis.
10 Remove the inlet and bend the cryo tube at the marked

location to pass between the inlet chassis and the GC frame.

11 Reinsert the inlet while guiding the inlet cryo cooling tube

through the channel between the inlet chassis and the GC

frame. Again, maintain control over the inlet cryo cooling
tube inside the inlet, as noted above.
12 Start each mounting screw one at a time to insure the inlet is

aligned and screws are properly threaded. Then tighten each

screw in turn evenly until snug and the inlet secured.
13 From the left side of the GC, locate the inlet's heater/sensor

cable and its corresponding connector plug. Tuck the

heater/sensor cable underneath the routing tabs at the side
of the GC and connect it to the heater connector.

7890 Series GC IPB

63

Inlets

14 In the following order, replace the heat sink, coil spring,

septum, and septum retaining nut on the inlet. Route the

inlet cryo cooling tube to the tee attached to the cryo valve.
15 Tighten the swage fitting where the inlet cryo cooling tube

connects to the T-fitting at the oven cryo valve. Use two

wrenches against each other to avoid twisting tubing.
This completes replacement of a inlet cryo cooling tube for a
cool on-column capillary inlet.

64

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Purged Packed Inlet

The purged packed column inlet controls column flow by means
of a forward pressure/flow, electronic proportional control
valve. A forward pressure regulator controls flow out the
septum purge vent. The inlet can be used for packed or capillary
columns. Based on the column you have configured, the inlet
can be operated in either a mass flow controlled mode or a
pressure controlled mode.

Replacing the Purged Packed inlet

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.

WA R N I N G

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
4 Remove the insulating cup and insulation from inside the

oven.
5 Disconnect the column from the inlet and cap the column to

minimize contamination.
6 Remove the inlet cover.

7890 Series GC IPB

65

Inlets

7 Note and record plumbing and wiring layouts and

connectivity.
8 Remove the assembly stepwise. You will need Torx T-10 and

T-20 drivers.
9 Disconnect the heater/sensor cable.
10 Disconnect the 1/16-inch tubing pair from the EPC module.
11 Remove the three top screws retaining the inlet to the GC.
12 Gently lift the assembly up and out.
13 Insert replacement inlet.
14 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.
15 Use new O-rings during EPC reconnection.
16 Refer to the figures and photos in this section for guidance.

66

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

If the EPC module is disconnected, the inlet can be removed and

replaced.

7890 Series GC IPB

67

Inlets

This housing is designed to accommodate a variety of Agilent

inlets.
Note fibrous insulation within housing. See earlier warning.

68

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

7890 Series GC IPB

69

Inlets

Replacing the Purged Packed inlet heater

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
Heater replacement requires removal of the inlet. Refer to
Replacing the Purged Packed inlet for removal instructions.

70

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

With the inlet removed:

1 Remove the tubing nut and column adapter.
2 Remove the bottom nut holding the thermal block.
3 Slide the thermal block off the inlet weldment.
4 Carefully remove the heater and sensor from the thermal

(heater) block.
7890 Series GC IPB

71

Inlets

5 Replace heater/sensor cable assembly with a new unit.

6 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

72

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Programmed Temperature Vaporization Inlet (PTV)

In addition to the PTV consumables (inlet adapters, columns,
PTFE ferrules, and septa), the replacement parts in the PTV
inlet assembly are:
The PTV inlet
PTV weldment and front trap assemblies
The filter
The head assembly (septum or septumless)
The cryo shroud on the inlet body (CO2 or liquid nitrogen)
The PTV thermocouple board
The O-rings and restrictors in the gas fitting assembly.

7890 Series GC IPB

73

Inlets

Replacing the PTV inlet

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
The PTV inlet system is removed and replaced as a single unit
consisting of the inlet and split vent trap assemblies connected
via its split vent line.

WA R N I N G

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
1 Remove the top EPC module cover.
2 Remove the inlet cover and GC left side panel.
3 At the inlet, if present, disconnect the cryo line (use two

wrenches against each other to prevent rotation).

74

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

CAUTION

When removing/attaching the cryo line use two wrenches: one

wrench to support one fitting and the other to loosen/tighten the
nut. Failure to do this could damage the fitting/tubing.
4 At the inlet, also disconnect the carrier gas line. If equipped

with septum purge, disconnect the purge line from the inlet.
5 At the PTV EPC module, disconnect the split vent valve cable

from the lower right corner of the PC board underneath the

module exposed by lifting the module.
6 Disconnect inlet thermocouple and heater/sensor cables at

the PTV heater/cryo PC board and work them back through

other wiring and tubing to the inlet. Disconnect any
additional cables at the inlet. Note that, if fitted, the PTV LN2
cryo feed tube from the LN2 cryo valve to the inlet may need
to be entirely removed from the GC to provide room for cable
connectors.
7 Release the inlet assembly by removing three screws and

lifting the entire assembly from the GC.

7890 Series GC IPB

75

Inlets

8 In reassembly, pay attention to the following:

Maintain correct orientations of insulation and the inlet

body.
Ensure that the inlet's insulation aligns properly with the
tube for the cryo attachment, if present.
9 Reconnect PTV inlet cables.
10 As necessary, reconnect the split vent line, cryo line, carrier

gas line, and septum purge (if present). Use new O-rings as
needed.

76

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Replacing the PTV inlet cryo jacket

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
3 Remove the PTV inlet assembly. See Replacing the PTV

inlet.

7890 Series GC IPB

77

Inlets

4 Remove three screws from the underside of the inlet body

assembly securing the cryo jacket to the inlet body.

NOTE

The CO2 cryo jacket (marked "CO2" on its inlet fitting) is different from
the LN2 jacket (marked "N2" on its inlet fitting).

5 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

NOTE

78

The inlet body with its heater and sensor are not individually replaceable
parts.

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Replacing the PTV CO2 or LN2 inlet cryo assembly

1 Once the PTV with cooling assembly is removed, the cryo

assembly on the inlet can be replaced.

2 Remove the PTV inlet as described under Replacing the PTV

inlet.
3 Remove the three screws on the cryo assembly from the PTV

inlet, and remove the cryo assembly.

4 Install the new cryo assembly over the inlet body. Be sure to

align the assembly so that the fitting is closest to the wires.

5 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.
6 Check for leaks.

7890 Series GC IPB

79

Inlets

Replacing a PTV CO2 cryo valve

If changing the GC configuration, see Changing the GC
configuration for important information regarding GC
methods. Then proceed with the steps below.
1 Cool down the oven and all heated zones.
2 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
3 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.
Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear
an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

4 Remove the valve via its two mounting screws accessible

under the removed bracket assembly. See Removing the PTV

cryo/PC board bracket for details.
5 In reinstallation, make sure the valve is oriented correctly on

the bracket with its cryo feed input connection towards the
rear of the GC and that its cable is reconnected to the nearby
PC board.
80

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Replacing the PTV N2 cryo valve

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the inlet cover and GC left side panel.

7890 Series GC IPB

81

Inlets

4 Remove the N2 cryo feed tube between the cryo valve and the

PTV inlet.
5 Remove two screws from the PTV N2 cryo feed cover plate.

Remove the cover plate.

6 Disconnect the PTV N2 cryo valve cable. If you intend to

replace this cable with a new one, use the existing cable as a
model while you install the new cable, then remove the old
cable.
7 Remove the valve bracket and cryo valve by three screws.
8 Replace the N2 cryo valve assembly by reversing these steps.
9 Reinstall the N2 cryo tube between the valve and the inlet.

82

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Removing the PTV cryo/PC board bracket

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top EPC module cover.

4 Disconnect cables to the PTV heater/cryo PC board. See

Replacing the PTV heater/cryo PC board.

5 If a PTV CO2 valve is present, disconnect its cryo feed lines

(CO2 in / CO2 out).

6 Remove two screws securing the bracket to the GC.
7 Lift the bracket assembly out of the GC working it around

any interfering wiring and/or tubing.

7890 Series GC IPB

83

Inlets

NOTE

The PTV CO2 cryo valve, if present, is also mounted on this bracket.

8 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

84

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Replacing the PTV heater/cryo PC board

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top EPC module cover.

7890 Series GC IPB

85

Inlets

4 To remove the heater/cryo PC board, first remove its three

cables: from left-to-right, respectively, the LN2 (liquid

nitrogen) cryo valve cable (if present), the thermocouple
cable, and the heater/sensor cable.
5 Next, remove two T-20 screws securing the board onto its

bracket.
6 Lift the board straight up and out of the GC.
7 Installing the new board is the reverse of these steps.

86

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Volatiles Interface
The Volatiles Interface (VI) uses a controlled stream of gas to
transfer a vaporized sample from an external sampler
(headspace, purge and trap, thermal desorber, etc.) to a
capillary column.

Replacing or cleaning the volatiles interface

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Disconnect the transfer line. Loosen the nut with a 1/4-inch

wrench and remove the line. Remove the clamping plate from
the interface by loosening the captive screw with a T-20 Torx
screwdriver. Put the plate in a safe place.
4 Lift the interface out of the heater block.
5 If a column is installed, remove it.
6 Remove the split and pressure sensing lines by loosening the

hex nuts with the wrench.

7 Clean or replace the interface. If cleaning the interface,

sonicate it twice and then rinse.

8 Reinstall the split line and pressure sensing lines and finger

tighten the hex nuts. Tighten the hex nuts an additional 1/4
turn with the wrench.
9 Reinstall the column in the interface.
10 Place the interface in the heater block. Replace the clamping

plate and tighten the screw until snug. Do not overtighten.

11 Reinstall the transfer line. Finger tighten the nut and then

tighten an additional 1/4 turn with the wrench.

NOTE

7890 Series GC IPB

If the transfer line is from a TMR-8900 Purge and Trap, install the transfer
line support nut assembly up and inside the metal sleeve of the heated
line assembly to prevent damage to the fused silica line.

87

Inlets

12 After the column is installed at both the interface and the

detector, establish a flow of carrier gas through the interface

and maintain it for 10 to 15 minutes. Check for leaks. Heat
the interface to operating temperatures and retighten the
fittings, if necessary.

88

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

7890 Series GC IPB

89

Inlets

Replacing the volatiles interface heater/sensor assembly

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Disconnect the transfer line. Loosen the nut with a 1/4-inch

wrench and remove the line.

4 Remove the heater/sensor wire connector from the GC

connection.
5 Remove the three screws in the top plate of the volatiles

assembly which mount it in the GC using a T-20 Torx

screwdriver. Loosen each screw a little at a time.
6 Remove the top plate and the top insulation from the GC.
7 Remove the heater/sensor assembly and replace.
8 Reinstall the top insulation and the top plate. Align the

volatiles interface with the mounting holes.

9 Reinstall the three Torx screws. Tighten each screw once

with the T-20 Torx screwdriver until the interface is properly

aligned. Tighten each screw again until snug.
10 Reinstall the heater/sensor wire connector in the GC. Route

the wire as shown.

11 Reinstall the transfer line using a 1/4-inch wrench and check

for leaks.

90

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Figure 1

7890 Series GC IPB

Cable routing

91

Inlets

Calibrating the interface

The interface's flow module contains a pressure sensor that
must be zeroed after it is installed on your GC. This calibration
procedure ensures an accurate interface pressure display.
Do not connect the carrier gas to the flow module until you have
zeroed the interface's pressure sensor.
1 Plug in the GC and turn it on, if you haven't already done so.
2 Wait 15 minutes. This allows the GC to reach thermal

equilibrium.
3 Zero the interface's pressure sensor:
a Press [Options], scroll to Calibration and press [Enter].
b Scroll to the module to be zeroed and press [Enter].
c Scroll to a zero line and press [Info]. The GC will remind

you of the conditions necessary for zeroing that specific

sensor.
Flow sensors. Verify that the gas is connected and flowing
(turned on).
Pressure sensors. Disconnect the gas supply line at the back of
the GC. Turning it off is not adequate; the valve may leak.
d Press [On/Yes] to zero or [Clear] to cancel.
4 Turn off the GC.
5 Plumb the carrier gas to the flow module. If you need help

with this step, see the GC site preparation and installation

manuals.
6 Turn on the GC.
7 Configure the column and carrier gas.

92

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Solvent Vapor Exit Accessory

This accessory vents the carrier gas and solvent vapor to waste
for a controlled time after injection. This greatly reduces the
size of the solvent peak.

7890 Series GC IPB

93

Inlets

Replacing the SVE valve/fitting assembly

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is plugged in. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by unplugging the power cord before removing the side
panels.

Prevent electrostatic voltages from damaging the GC by using an

ESD wriststrap.
1 Turn off the GC and unplug the power cord. Allow time for

all heated zones to cool and then turn off supply gases at
their sources.
2 Remove the top cover, the pneumatics cover, the electronics

carrier cover, and the right side cover.

3 Remove the bleed restrictor column and the solvent vent

waste line from the valve fitting assembly.

4 Inside the oven, disconnect the transfer line from the

stainless union on the 1/16-inch stainless steel tubing.

Carefully remove the tubing from the oven through the
cutout in the top of the oven.
5 Disconnect the valve driver cable from the valve jumper cable

or valve driver assembly, as applicable.

6 Remove the mounting screw in the valve/fitting assembly and

remove the assembly from the GC.

7 Install the new valve/fitting assembly and mount it to the GC

oven with the screw. Cover the open end of the union to
avoid contamination and route the 1/16-inch stainless steel
tubing and union into the oven. Repack the insulation
around the cabling. Connect the valve driver cable to the
valve jumper cable or valve driver assembly, as applicable.
8 Use a new graphite/Vespel ferrule to reconnect the transfer

line to the union.

9 Examine the bleed restrictor column. If the column is

damaged, replace it with a new 0.5 m length of 0.050 mm

column, installing a new fitting and ferrule. Be sure to trim 5
to 10 mm off the end of the new column after installing the
new fitting and ferrule.
10 Reattach the solvent waste vent line.

94

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

WA R N I N G

Because a significant amount of solvent is vented through the

SVE valve assembly, it is important that the bleed restrictor and
the solvent vent are connected to an appropriate laboratory
ventilation system.
11 Check for leaks.

7890 Series GC IPB

95

Inlets

Replacing the SVE bleed restrictor column

1 Turn off the GC and unplug the power cord. Allow time for

all heated zones to cool and then turn off supply gases at
their sources.
2 Remove the top cover and the right side cover. If necessary,

also remove the pneumatics cover and the electronics carrier

cover.
3 Using a wrench, remove the old bleed restrictor column.
4 Cut a 0.5 m section off of the new 50 m bleed column for use

as the restrictor.
5 Attach a male fitting and ferrule to the restrictor column,

then trim 5 to 10 mm from that end of the column.

6 Connect the 0.5 m x 50 m bleed restrictor to the SVE valve.
7 Make a loop (or loops) in the excess column protruding from

the valve and move it to an unobstructive position.

Coil it in a loose coil (approximately 6 inch diameter).
Secure the coil with heat resistant tape or equivalent.

96

7890 Series GC IPB

Inlets

Replacing the SVE tri-column assembly

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Disconnect the Tri-column assembly from the COC inlet,

detector and (SS) union and remove the column assembly

from the GC oven.
4 Install the new SVE Tri-column assembly onto a column

hanger and hang the assembly inside the GC oven. Position

the column assembly so that the end of the retention gap
(530 m) is located under the COC inlet and the end of the
analytical column (250 m) is under the detector.
5 Connect the retention gap to the COC inlet using a graphite

ferrule and a column nut.

6 If using a MSD, connect the analytical column (HP-5MS) to

the MSD using a column nut (part no. 05988-20066) and a

graphite/Vespel ferrule (part no. 5062-3508). If using any
other type of detector, connect the analytical column
(HP-5MS) to the GC detector using a column nut (part no.
5181-8830) and a graphite/Vespel ferrule (part no.
5062-9527).
7 Remove the stainless ferrules from the union. Use a

graphite/Vespel ferrule to connect the 0.5 m 320 m

transfer line from the quartz Y-splitter of the Tri-column
assembly to the unused end of the stainless union located
inside the GC oven.
8 Check all of the connections for leaks using an electronic

leak detector.

7890 Series GC IPB

97

Inlets

Replacing the SVE pre-column assembly

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Disconnect the Tri-column assembly from the COC inlet, the

detector and the stainless steel union and remove the

column assembly from the GC oven.
4 Using a column cutter, cut the transfer column and the

analytical columns as close to the quartz Y-splitter as

possible. Be sure to cut the columns straight.
5 Using the column cutter, trim the ends of the tri-column

assembly ensuring that the cuts are straight. Then use a lint
free wipe and methanol to clean any dirt and finger prints
from approximately three to four centimeters from each of
the five column ends.
6 Being careful not to touch the ends of the columns, insert

them into the quartz splitter as far as possible, making sure

that the column ends are making contact with the inside
walls of the splitter. Sufficient pressure should be applied to
give a good seal. Too much pressure, on the other hand, can
damage the polyimide layer or even the column and result in
leakage. Test to see that the column has been installed
correctly by trying to pull the column out of the splitter using
medium force. If the column comes out easily, trim the end
and insert again.

NOTE

A concentric circle inside the splitter should result if the column is

installed correctly.

7 After connecting the column ends into the quartz splitter,

reconnect the tri-column assembly inside the GC oven and

increase the column head pressure incrementally to the
desired pressure. An incremental increase is better than
immediately applying the total column head pressure to
avoid a "shock" that can loosen the connection.

98

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

3 Detectors

Detector overview 100

About the detector signal boards 100
Accessing detector signal boards 103
Replacing detector signal boards 104
Detector signal board, bad checksum error 107
Flame Ionization Detector (FID) 113
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) 132
Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) 148
Micro-cell Electron Capture Detector (uECD) 152
Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) 7890A 160

Agilent Technologies

99

Detectors

Detector overview
A detector monitors the gas stream exiting from the analyzing
column. Its electrical output changes when the composition of
the gas does. This section deals with the most widely used
detectors.

About the detector signal boards

The GC can control up to 4 detector signal boards and
simultaneously process their digital signals. Except for a TCD,
all detector boards are mounted in the electronics carrier on the
right-hand side of the GC. A TCD signal board can be mounted
in the optional 3rd detector carrier.
Sometimes other problems seem like a signal board failure.
Replace a signal board only after ruling out other possible
causes as follows:
1 Verify the signal board is receiving 24 VDC power, the green

LED is ON, and the board appears configured in the GC

display.
2 Check diagnostics for faults caused by components

connected to the signal board, such as, ignitors,

electrometers, filaments, and PMTs.
3 Replace the signal board only after eliminating the possible

causes listed in steps 1 and 2.

Repairs should be verified by the following:
Typical detector signal baseline output and noise.
There are 6 types of detector signal boards. Their part numbers
and possible locations are listed in the table below.

100

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

7890 Series GC IPB

101

Detectors

Table 2

Table 3

Detector signal boards

Description

Part number

Slot

AIB

G3456-60010

Aux DET1

uECD

G3433-61020

F-DET or B-DET

FID

G3431-60020

F-DET or B-DET

FPD

G3435-60010

F-DET or B-DET or Aux

DET2

NPD

G3434-60020

F-DET or B-DET

TCD

G3432-60010

F-DET or B-DET or Aux

DET1

Detector signal electrical connectors

Description

P1

AIB

Communication buss

uECD

Communication buss

Electrometer

FID

Communication buss

Ignitor

Electrometer

FPD

Communication buss

Ignitor

Signal input

NPD

Communication buss

Bead current

Electrometer

TCD

Communication buss

102

P2

P3

Switching valve

P4

Other

J1 Signal input

P5

P7
S11 High voltage
source for PMT

J4 Filaments

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Accessing detector signal boards

The front and back detector signal boards are located under the
right-hand side panel.
1 Loosen the T-20 captured screws until they do not engage the

electronics carrier.
2 Slide the panel toward the back of the GC and lift off. Place

the tip of the driver in one of the top ventilation slots and
push back.
The 3rd detector signal board is located in the 3rd detector
carrier on the left side of the GC.
1 Remove the 2 T-20 screws from the side panel.
2 Lift the panel (both side and top) off of the carrier.
3 Remove the screw from the detector signal board cover.

Remove the cover.

7890 Series GC IPB

103

Detectors

Replacing detector signal boards

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the right-hand side panel for the electronics carrier.

104

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

4 Disconnect the electrical cables to the board.

5 Turn the thumb screw counter-clockwise and lift the screw

to disengage it from the sheet metal.

6 Slide the board down and lift it out.

7890 Series GC IPB

105

Detectors

7 When replacing the signal board, short boards, such as the

FID and uECD, slide into 3 slots. Long boards, such as NPD
and FPD, slide into 4 slots.
8 Push in on the thumbscrew to engage the threads. Turn the

screw clockwise until it is tight.

CAUTION

The grounding point for the signal board is the thumbscrew. If this
screw is not secured, the detector signal will be noisy and may
cause damage to the board.
9 Connect the electrical cables to the board.
10 Turn ON the GC and reconfigure the detector signal board.

See Replacing a GC module for details.

106

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Detector signal board, bad checksum error

It is very possible that you will get error messages at power on.
The messages can be a fault or exception. They are often due to
a checksum error with the detector signal boards. Use the
following instructions to add a serial number and
manufacturing date to the signal board eeprom.
Detector signal boards are programmed and labelled with a
unique ID number along with a manufacturing date. The
following is an example of an FPD signal board. The serial
number is STI190698769.

In some rare occasions, the board ID number or manufacturing

date is not programmed into the board's EEPROM. In these
cases, the GC will post an exception or a "bad checksum error."
In this state, the detector is not usable.
Before you start, you can confirm the problem by trying to view
the information. Navigate to Service Mode > Diagnostics >
Front Detector > Signal board. At the bottom of the table, you
will see the manufacturing date and ID number.
You can perform the following procedure to insert the ID
number and/or date into the EEPROM of the board. You will
need:
PC with a telnet program, such as, HyperTerminal.
LAN cable or cross-over cable.
LAN connection to the GC and IP address for this GC.
The ID number of the board.
Procedure
1 Power off the GC, remove the detector signal board, and

record the serial number.

2 Reinstall the detector signal board and power ON the GC.

7890 Series GC IPB

107

Detectors

3 If necessary, configure the GC and the PC for a LAN

connection.
4 Unlock the keyboard.
5 Launch HyperTerminal or other telnet program.
6 Name the connection and click OK.

7 Select TCP/IP (Winsock) for the connection.

8 Enter the IP address of the instrument and a Port number of

9101.

9 Under the Connection properties select ASCII Setup. Check

the items shown below.

108

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

10 The GC will automatically reply with this prompt. Enter go

and press Enter.

7890 Series GC IPB

109

Detectors

11 Type go and press Enter.

12 For an ID number, enter the following string and press enter.

The memory location is 1.

dvcLES<space>< 9 or 8 or 7or 6
><space>1<space>(string)<serial number>
9 for FRONT DET
8 for BACK DET
7 for AUX DET2
6 for AUX DET1 or 3rd detector
13 For a manufacturing date, enter the following string and

press enter. The memory location is 7.

dvcLES<space><9 or 8 or 7 or
6><space>7<space>(int)1134699051
If the process is successful, the GC will respond with a 0.

110

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

14 After writing the information to the eeprom, confirm the ID

number and date by entering these strings and pressing

enter.
dvcRES<space>< 9 or 8 or 6 ><space>1<space>(string) and
dvcRES<space><9 or 8 or 7 or 6><space>7<space>(int)

The next steps reconfigure the detector signal board.

15 Press [Config] [Front Det] or [Back Det].

16 Press [Mode/Type] and press [Enter].

17 The GC displays a message prompting to power cycle. Do not

power cycle.
18 Press [Mode/Type] again and press [Enter].

19 Power cycle the GC. Your detector is reconfigured.

7890 Series GC IPB

111

Detectors

If you do not perform steps 14 through 18, the GC will display

the following messages at power ON.

and

112

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Flame Ionization Detector (FID)

The FID is the most widely used of the GC detectors. It responds
to almost all organic compounds (there are a few exceptions),
has good sensitivity and a wide linear range, and is easy to use.

Selecting an FID jet

Open the oven door and locate the column connection fitting at
the base of the detector. It will look like either a capillary
optimized fitting or an adaptable fitting.

If you have an application that tends to clog the jet, select a

jet with a wider tip id.
When using packed columns in high column-bleed
applications, the jet tends to clog with silicon dioxide.
In simulated distillation applications, the high-boiling
hydrocarbons tend to clog the jet.

7890 Series GC IPB

113

Detectors

For capillary optimized fittings, select a jet from the table below,
Jets for capillary optimized fittings.
Table 4

Jets for capillary optimized fittings

Figure 2 ID

Jet type

Part number

Jet tip id

Length

Capillary

G1531-80560

0.29 mm (0.011 inch)

48 mm

High-temperature
(use with simulated distillation)

G1531-80620

0.47 mm (0.018 inch)

48 mm

Figure 2

Capillary optimized jets

For adaptable fittings, select a jet from the table below, Jets for
capillary adaptable fittings.
Table 5

Jets for capillary adaptable fittings

Capillary
adaptable jets ID

Jet type

Part number

Jet tip id

Capillary

19244-80560

0.29 mm (0.011 inch) 61.5 mm

Capillary, high- temperature

(use with simulated distillation)

19244-80620

0.47 mm (0.018 inch) 61.5 mm

Packed

18710-20119

0.46 mm (0.018 inch) 63.6 mm

Packed, wide-bore
(use with high-bleed applications)

18789-80070

0.76 mm (0.030 inch) 63.6 mm

Figure 3
114

Length

Capillary adaptable jets

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Replacing the FID interconnect assembly or spring

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Gather the following:

New FID collector assembly. (See PM kits for the FID.)

T-20 Torx screwdriver
1/4-inch nut driver
Tweezers
Lint-free gloves
4 Shut off the detector and the detector gases and let the

detector cool.

CAUTION

7890 Series GC IPB

To avoid contaminating the FID, wear clean, lint-free gloves when

handling the collector assembly.

115

Detectors

5 Disconnect the ignitor cable assembly.

6 Remove the three screws holding the collector assembly to

the mounting pallet.

CAUTION

116

The next step exposes the interconnect spring. Be careful not to

touch or disfigure the spring while working on the FID. Any dirt or
bending will reduce the sensitivity of your detector.

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

7 Lift and remove the assembly from the pallet.

To replace the interconnect spring only

1 Pull the spring off the end of the interconnect. Push a new

spring on.
2 Reassemble the detector.

To replace the interconnect (and spring)

1 Remove the screws at each end of the electrometer body. DO

NOT loosen the screw in the center of the electrometer cover.

2 The interconnect is held by a small spring clip. Remove the

screw holding this clip.

3 Disconnect the ribbon cable that connects the electrometer

to the signal board. Remove the electrometer.

4 There is a hex section where the interconnect enters the

electrometer. Use a wrench to losen and remove the

interconnect.
5 Insert a new interconnect and tighten it firmly (do not

overtighten!).
6 Reassemble the detector.

7890 Series GC IPB

117

Detectors

Replacing the heater

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.

WA R N I N G

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
4 Disconnect the column from the bottom of the detector.
5 Remove the right side electronics panel.
6 Access the FID module by unscrewing the single T-20 screw

holding the GC cover over the detector(s).

7 Raise it out of the way or remove it temporarily.

118

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

8 Disconnect the heater/sensor cable from the heater/sensor

connector.

9 Disconnect the ignitor cable from the FID signal board to the

ignitor castle.
10 Disconnect the electrometer cable from the FID signal board.

7890 Series GC IPB

119

Detectors

11 Unscrew the three captive T-10 screws retaining the FID flow

blocks to the EPC module.

12 Remove the four T-20 screws retaining the FID assembly to

the GC.

13 Lift the entire FID assembly up and off.

14 Lay the assembly down on a clean flat surface.
15 Examine the underside of the detector assembly.

120

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

16 Remove the insulated cover over the heater block.

17 Loosen the heater/sensor cable sufficiently to allow for the

lifting and removal of the heater from the heater block.

18 Carefully remove the defective heater/sensor cable and

replace it with a new heater/sensor cable.

19 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

121

Detectors

Replacing the FID signal board

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.

WA R N I N G

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
4 Remove the right side electronics panel from the GC.
5 Lift up the GC detector cover to access the FID.
6 Disconnect all electrical connections between the FID and

the signal board.

7 Rotate the FID board thumbscrew counterclockwise, lift the

board up and then downward to remove it from the GC.

8 Replace the defective board with a new FID board.
9 Restore the FID electrical connections.
10 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.
11 Reconfigure the GC using the front panel keypad, supplying

the requested information.

122

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Replacing the FID electrometer

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.

WA R N I N G

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
4 Remove the right side electronics cover.
5 Disconnect the electrometer ribbon cable from the FID signal

board.
6 Remove the Torx T-20 screw and clamp over the interconnect

tube.
7 Remove the two Torx T-20 screws from each end of the

electrometer.
8 Lift the electrometer up and away.

7890 Series GC IPB

123

Detectors

9 Replace the defective electrometer with a new one, making

sure that there is firm contact between the interconnect

spring and the collector.
10 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.
11 After reassembly, turn the GC power on and reconfigure the

modified detector using the front panel keypad, supplying

the requested information.

124

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Replacing the FID glow plug (ignitor)

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
3 Remove the right side electronics panel and identify the FID

signal board.
4 Disconnect the ignitor cable from the FID signal board.

7890 Series GC IPB

125

Detectors

5 Lift up or remove the GC detector cover to access the FID.

6 Unclip the ignitor cable from the cable extension to the FID

board.
7 From the top, unscrew the defective ignitor cable from the

ignitor castle.
8 Replace the defective cable with a new ignitor cable.
9 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

126

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Replacing the entire FID

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.

WA R N I N G

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
4 Disconnect the column from the bottom of the detector.
5 Remove the right side electronics panel.
6 Access the FID module by unscrewing the single T-20 screw

holding the GC cover over the detector(s).

7 Raise the cover out of the way or remove it temporarily.
8 Disconnect the heater/sensor cable to the FID.
9 Disconnect the ignitor cable from the FID signal board.
10 Disconnect the electrometer cable from the FID signal board.

7890 Series GC IPB

127

Detectors

11 Unscrew the three captive T-10 screws retaining the tubing

connection blocks to the EPC module.

128

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

12 Remove the four T-20 screws retaining the FID assembly to

the mounting pallet.

13 Lift the entire FID assembly up and off.

14 At this point the entire unit can be replaced with a new or

repaired unit.
15 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.
16 After completing the reassembly turn the power on and

reconfigure the GC from the front panel keypad.

7890 Series GC IPB

129

Detectors

Ultrasonic cleaning the FID

The collector requires occasional cleaning to remove deposits
(usually white silica from column bleed, or black, carbonaceous
soot). Deposits reduce sensitivity and cause chromatographic
noise and spikes. The cleaning procedure presented here
suggests you use an ultrasonic bath to clean the collector and
other parts of the detector. However, if your collector is not too
dirty, it may be sufficient to scrub it with a nylon brush and
then use a burst of compressed air or nitrogen to blow stray
particles away.

WA R N I N G

This procedure summarizes the general steps for cleaning the

parts. You need to follow the standard safety practices of your
laboratory for handling chemicals. For example, wear the
appropriate safety eye glasses, lab coat, and gloves.

CAUTION

Scratches on the FID jet affects its performance. If you choose to

clean the jet, be sure not to scratch or bend the jet.

CAUTION

The FID castle is coated with a layer of PTFE. Ultrasonic cleaning of

this part for more than 5 to 10 seconds will damage this coating.

It is often more convenient to replace dirty jets with new ones

than to clean them, especially jets that have been badly
contaminated.
1 Gather the following:

Small ultrasonic cleaning bath

Aqueous detergent
GC-grade methanol in a PTFE wash bottle. Wash bottles
made of other materials usually contain plasticizer
contaminants
Dry, filtered, compressed air or nitrogen
Clean cloth
2 If you are cleaning the jet, run the cleaning wire through the

tip of the jet. Run it back and forth a few times until it moves
smoothly. Be careful not to scratch the jet.

130

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

3 Place the parts in your glassware, cover them with the

aqueous detergent, and place them in the ultrasonic bath.

4 If you are cleaning the castle, sonicate for only 5 to 10

seconds. Push the wire brush through the collector.

For other parts, sonicate for 1 to 5 minutes.
5 Remove the parts from the bath.
6 Push the wire brush through the collector.

7 Rinse the parts in tap water or distilled water.

8 Rinse all surfaces of the parts in methanol; inside and

outside surfaces. To insure good rinsing use either a PTFE

wash bottle or a beaker.
9 From this point on, handle the parts only with forceps (or

tweezers). Remove the jet from the bath and rinse it

thoroughly with hot tap water and then with a small amount
of methanol.
10 Blow the jet dry with a burst of compressed air or nitrogen

and then place the jet on a clean cloth to air dry.

7890 Series GC IPB

131

Detectors

Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD)

The NPD is a variation on the FID, in that the sample is burned
and the resulting ions are collected. However, the hydrogen/air
ratio is set to suppress carbon ionization and an alkali salt
enhances nitrogen and phosphorus ionization.

Selecting an NPD jet

Open the oven door and locate the column connection fitting at
the base of the detector. It will look like either a capillary
optimized fitting or an adaptable fitting.

If you have an application that tends to clog the jet, select a

jet with a wider tip id.
When using packed columns in high column-bleed
applications, the jet tends to clog with silicon dioxide.
For capillary optimized fittings, select one of the following from
the table below, Jets for capillary optimized fittings.
Table 6

Jets for capillary optimized fittings

Capillary optimized NPD jets ID

Jet type

Part number

Jet tip id

Length

Capillary with extended

jet (recommended)

G1534-80580

0.29 mm (0.011
inch)

51.5 mm

Capillary

G1531-80560

0.29 mm (0.011
inch)

43 mm

High-temperature

G1531-80620

0.47 mm (0.018
inch)

43 mm

132

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Figure 4

Capillary optimized NPD jets

For adaptable fittings, select one of the following from the table
below, Jets for adaptable fittings.
Table 7

Jets for adaptable fittings

Adaptable NPD jets ID

Jet type

Part number

Jet tip id

Length

Capillary with extended jet

(recommended)

G1534-80590

0.29 mm (0.11
inch)

70.5 mm

Capillary

19244-80560

0.29 mm (0.011
inch)

61.5 mm

Capillary, high- temperature

19244-80620

0.47 mm (0.018
inch)

61.5 mm

Packed

18710-20119

0.46 mm (0.018
inch)

63.6 mm

Figure 5

Adaptable NPD jets

7890 Series GC IPB

133

Detectors

Removing the NPD electrometer

Removing the NPD electrometer
1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

NOTE

NOTE

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC power

cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock hazard by
disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear an ESD

strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this procedure.

3 Remove both the electronics top cover and the right side

cover.
4 Lift up the hinged detector tower cover and remove the Torx

T-20 screw and the clamp on the electrical interconnect.

134

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

5 Loosen the three Torx T-10 screws on the lid weldment and

remove the lid.

6 Remove one Torx T-20 screw from each end of the

electrometer. (You do not need to remove the screw on the

top of the electrometer that holds the cover on.)
7 Unlock and detach the electrometer's ribbon cable from the

detector's interface board and lift the electrometer from the

detector pallet.
8 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

135

Detectors

Replacing the entire NPD

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
3 Remove the right side electronics panel.
4 Disconnect the column from the bottom of the detector.
5 To access the NPD module unscrew the single T-20 screw

holding the GC cover over the detector(s).

6 Raise it out of the way or remove it temporarily.
7 Disconnect the power/sensor cable to the NPD.
8 Disconnect the electrometer cable from the NPD signal

board.
9 Remove the three T-10 screws fastening the NPD pneumatic

tubing assembly to the EPC module.

10 Remove the four T-20 screws retaining the NPD pallet.
11 Lift the entire NPD unit up and off.
12 At this point the entire unit can be replaced.
13 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

136

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

14 Restore power and reconfigure the GC using the keypad,

supplying the requested information.

15 Note that the replacement of some NPD components does not

require the complete removal of this detector.

7890 Series GC IPB

137

Detectors

Replacing an NPD signal board

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.

Wear lint-free gloves to minimize source contamination when

servicing the bead assembly.
4 Disconnect three electrical connections (to electrometer, to

heater, and the 4-wire communication buss).

5 Turn thumb screw counterclockwise, lift screw to disengage,

slide board down, and then lift out. (Note that the grounding
point for the board is at the thumbscrew.)
6 Insert the replacement board.
7 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.
8 Reconfigure the modified GC from the front panel keypad,

supplying requested information.

138

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

7890 Series GC IPB

139

Detectors

Replacing the NPD heater

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off the oven and all heated zones and let them cool.
4 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
5 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.
6 Disconnect the column from the bottom of the detector.
7 Remove the right side mainframe panel.
8 Access the NPD module by unscrewing the single T-20 screw

holding the GC cover over the detector(s).

9 Raise it out of the way or remove it temporarily.
10 Disconnect the power/sensor cable to the NPD detector.
11 Disconnect the electrometer cable from the NPD signal

board.
12 Remove the three T-10 screws fastening the NPD pneumatic

tubing connectors to the EPC module.

140

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

13 Remove the four T-20 screws retaining the NPD assembly to

the GC.
14 Remove the NPD detector assembly from the GC.
15 Examine the underside of the detector assembly.
16 Cover or plug the sample inlet tube while servicing this unit

to limit contamination.
17 Remove the insulated cover over the heater/detector block.
18 Loosen the heater cable sufficiently to allow for the lifting off

and removal of the heater from the detector block.

19 Remove and replace the entire heater/cable assembly.
20 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

141

Detectors

Replacing the NPD electrometer

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.

Wear lint-free gloves to minimize source contamination when

servicing the bead assembly.
4 Remove both the electronics top cover and the right side

cover.
5 Lift up the hinged NPD cover and remove the T-20 screw and

J-clamp on the interconnect assembly.

6 Loosen the three Torx T-10 screws on the lid weldment and

remove the lid.

7 Remove one Torx T-20 screw from each end of the

electrometer. Do not remove the screw on the top of the

electrometer that holds the cover on.
8 Disconnect the power/sensor cable from the bead assembly

and from the NPD signal board.

142

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

9 Unlock and detach the electrometer's ribbon cable from the

NPD signal board and lift the electrometer up from the pallet.
10 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.
11 Reconfigure the modified GC from the front panel keypad,

supplying requested information.

7890 Series GC IPB

143

Detectors

Cleaning the NPD jet and collector

The collector requires occasional cleaning to remove deposits
(usually white silica from column bleed, or black, carbonaceous
soot). Deposits reduce sensitivity and cause chromatographic
noise and spikes. The cleaning procedure presented here
suggests you use an ultrasonic bath to clean the collector and
other parts of the detector. However, if your collector is not too
dirty, it may be sufficient to scrub it with a nylon brush and
then use a burst of compressed air or nitrogen to blow stray
particles away.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

This procedure summarizes the general steps for cleaning the

parts. You need to follow the standard safety practices of your
laboratory for handling chemicals. For example, wear the
appropriate safety eye glasses, lab coat, and gloves.

Scratches on the NPD jet affects its performance. If you choose to

clean the jet, be sure not to scratch or bend the jet.

It is often more convenient to replace dirty jets with new ones

than to clean them, especially jets that have been badly
contaminated.
1 Gather the following:

Small ultrasonic cleaning bath

Aqueous detergent
GC-grade methanol in a PTFE wash bottle. Wash bottles
made of other materials usually contain plasticizer
contaminates.
Dry, filtered, compressed air or nitrogen
Clean cloth
2 If you are cleaning the jet, run the cleaning wire through the

tip of the jet. Run it back and forth a few times until it moves
smoothly. Be careful not to scratch the jet.

144

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

3 Place the parts in your glassware, cover them with the

aqueous detergent, and place them in the ultrasonic bath for

1 to 5 minutes.
4 Remove the parts from the bath and push the wire brush

through the collector.

5 Rinse the parts in tap water or distilled water.
6 Rinse all surfaces of the parts in methanol; inside and

outside surfaces. To insure good rinsing use either a PTFE

wash bottle or a beaker.
7 From this point on, handle the parts only with forceps (or

tweezers). Remove the jet from the bath and rinse it

thoroughly with hot tap water and then with a small amount
of methanol.
8 Blow the jet dry with a burst of compressed air or nitrogen

and then place the jet on a clean cloth to air dry.

7890 Series GC IPB

145

Detectors

Cleaning the NPD

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

Inlets, detectors, and the oven are insulated with fibrous

materials which may cause irritation to skin, eyes, and/or
mucous membranes. Always wear gloves when working with the
insulation. Additionally, if the insulation is flaky/crumbly, wear
protective eyewear and a suitable breathing mask and/or
respirator.

Wear lint-free gloves to minimize source contamination when

servicing the bead assembly.
3 Remove the right side mainframe panel.
4 To access the NPD module unscrew the single T-20 screw

holding the GC cover over the detector(s).

5 Raise it out of the way or remove it temporarily.
6 Disconnect the power/sensor cable to the NPD.
7 Disconnect the electrometer cable from the NPD signal

board.
8 Remove the three T-20 screws fastening the NPD pneumatic

tubing assembly to the EPC module.

9 Remove the four T-20 screws retaining the NPD assembly to

the GC.
10 Lift entire unit up and off.
11 Place unit on a clean surface.
12 Lift up the hinged metal cover over the detector assembly.
13 Remove the three T-10 screws retaining the bead assembly to

the housing and then remove the bead assembly to prevent

accidental damage.
14 Do not touch the ceramic bead.

146

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

15 Apply protective cap over the bead assembly, if available.

16 Loosen the three captive T-20 screws retaining the lid.
17 Lift the lid up and off.
18 Using a pair of tweezers, carefully remove the three O-rings,

two alumina insulators, and the collector assembly.

19 At this point one can choose to clean only the parts removed

or continue the disassembly to remove, clean, or replace the

jet.
20 Use a 1/4-inch deep-socket nut driver to unscrew the jet.
21 Use slight side pressure on the nut driver to drag the jet up

out of the detector weldment and then use tweezers to grasp

and remove the jet.
22 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

147

Detectors

Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD)

The TCD is sometimes called the "universal" detector because it
responds to anything that is not the carrier gas.

Replacing the TCD detector cell

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Turn off any detector gases at their supply.
4 Shut off the detector and the detector gases and let the

detector cool.
5 Remove the detector cover, the electronics cover, the right

side cover, and the rear top panel.

6 Disconnect the TCD filament leads which run from the

detector to the detector interface card. Disconnect the wires

from the detector interface card using a small flat blade
screwdriver to push down on the connector tabs while you
pull out the wires.
7 Remove the cover and the insulation.
8 Use a T-20 Torx screwdriver to remove the two screws

securing the detector cell to the aluminum detector carrier

bracket and lift the cell from the bracket.
9 Slide the heater/sensor assembly from the detector cell.
10 Slide the PRT out of the detector cell.

148

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

11 Install the new cell and reassemble the detector. Reassembly

is the reverse of these steps with the following additional

considerations:
Before replacing the insulation, place the cap that came
with your detector over the detector vent to prevent
plugging the vent with insulation. Remove the cap once
the insulation is in place.
12 When replacing the detector cover, make sure that the hole in

the top of the cover is positioned over the detector vent and
that the filaments, plumbing and heater/sensor leads
including the PRT leads are positioned under the
appropriate cut-outs on the sides of the cover.
Make sure that only the filament wire is inserted into the
connector, not the insulation sleeve. Then, check the
filaments by tugging slightly on them.
Check the PRT sensor lead connections to the detector
card by tugging slightly on them.
Replace the heater/sensor and PRT in the sensor holes as
shown below.

CAUTION

7890 Series GC IPB

Make sure the PRT leads are properly installed. If the PRT leads
are not properly installed in the detector card, filament burnout can
occur.

149

Detectors

Replacing the TCD switching valve

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the EPC module cover and the module retainer. With

a side-mounted TCD, remove the left side cover.

4 It is possible, but quite difficult, to replace the switching

valve without further disassembly. We recommend raising

the module for better accessibility. With a side-mounted
TCD, remove the module from its bracket.

5 Trace the wires from the valve to the extension cable

connector. Disconnect them.

6 Loosen the screw holding the clamp and slide the old valve

out.
7 Examine the new valve. The plastic part has a flat side with 3

small O-rings. These must be placed over the 3 holes in the

piece to which the screw connects.
8 Slide the new valve into position (flat side against the metal)

and place the clamp over it.

150

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

9 Align the flat end of the valve with the flat metal surface next

to it. Adjust the valve position until it lies flat against the
adjacent metal.
10 Tighten the clamp screw. There should be no gap between the

plastic and the metal. If there is, loosen the clamp screw and
repeat the adjustment.
11 Reconnect the wires and remount the module.
12 Restore the covers.

7890 Series GC IPB

151

Detectors

Micro-cell Electron Capture Detector (uECD)

This detector simply ignores most compounds, but responds
with enormous sensitivity to electron-accepting species such as
the halogens.

Replacing the uECD heater/sensor assembly

After removing the uECD detector from the GC, you can further
disassemble it to replace the heater/sensor assembly.

WA R N I N G

The ECD micro-cell contains radioactive 63Ni. To reduce the risk

of exposure, wear disposable gloves while handling the ECD
micro-cell. When you are finished, dispose of the gloves and
wash your hands with soap and water.
1 Remove the detector.
2 Loosen the locking tab screw on top of the detector, slide the

locking tab back, and pivot it out of the away.

3 Lift the thermal cover up and carefully slide it off the anode

assembly.
4 Remove the two screws holding the upper heated block onto

the assembly. Lift the block over the anode lead and remove.
5 Slide the heater and sensor out of the lower heated block.

152

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

7890 Series GC IPB

153

Detectors

Replacing the uECD makeup gas adapter

After removing the uECD detector from the GC, you can further
disassemble it to replace the makeup gas adapter. The makeup
gas adapter consists of a line from the detector pneumatics
manifold that carries makeup gas to a weldment that screws
into the bottom of the uECD detector. From there, the makeup
gas sweeps past the end of the column and carries the column
effluent into the uECD cell.
1 Remove the detector.
2 Remove the Torx T-20 screw holding the pneumatics block(s)

to the detector manifold.

3 Slide the makeup gas adapter up and out of the GC.
4 When re-installing the makeup gas adapter, ensure the

following:
Approximately 6 inches of the makeup gas line resides in
the oven after installation.
The makeup gas line is bent into a coil or loop (inside the
oven) that loops around the bottom of the detector
weldment and makeup gas adapter.
The end of the column does not protrude from the top of
the makeup gas adapter. For most columns (outer
diameter > 0.20 mm), insert the column as far as it will go
into the gigabore liner. If using a microbore column (id <
0.20 mm) that passes completely through the liner,
position the column so that the total length from the back
of the capillary nut to the end of the column is about 69 to
71 mm.

154

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

7890 Series GC IPB

155

Detectors

Frequency test
Perform this test to make sure that the base frequency for the
uECD during a blank run indicates a relatively
contaminant-free system. See also the related troubleshooting
manual topic on uECD Life Cycle.

NOTE

It may take 24 hours for the uECD baseline to completely stabilize,

especially if you are starting with a cold system and want to assure
high-sensitivity operation. Therefore, for the most accurate results, run
the detector at normal operating conditions for as long as possible (at
least 2 hours and up to 24 hours) before running the frequency test. If you
will be injecting into an unused inlet, you must use low-bleed septa. Make
sure to condition new septa before use in an inlet for several hours with 1
to 5 mL/min carrier flow.
1 Make sure you are using normal operating conditions and

that at least 2 hours have elapsed since the last run.

2 Turn on the uECD and the corresponding signal.
3 Check the displayed "Output":

< 25 = uECD frequency is acceptable

1000 = Contaminants in system

NOTE

Each display count equals a frequency of 1 Hertz (e.g., a display reading of

100 = 100 Hz.).

4 If the uECD frequency indicates contamination ( 1000)

check for the following:

Contaminated carrier gas trap(s) and or supplyreplace
carrier gas supply tank and any traps on the carrier
supply line.
Insufficient column conditioningfully condition the
column.
Contaminated detectorbake out the detector.
Column, inlet and/or septum bleedclean the
inlet/replace the septum with a conditioned, low bleed
septum.

156

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Leaksperform leak tests on both the inlet and detector

systems.
Anode current leakagemake sure the anode contacts are
clean. Make sure the anode nut is tight.

7890 Series GC IPB

157

Detectors

Leak test
NOTE

Once you have determined that the flow system components upstream
from the detector (gas supply tubing, inlet, column fittings) are leak free,
perform the following uECD detector leak test.
1 With the GC on and operating normally, set the oven,

detector, and inlet temperatures to ambient.

2 Turn off the uECD and then turn off the inlet pressure.
3 Turn off the anode and makeup gas flows.
4 Cap the uECD exhaust vent with a vent plug (part no.

5060-9055).
5 Set carrier gas pressure at the inlet corresponding to the

uECD to 15 psi (103 kPa).

6 Wait until the system reaches the setpoint pressure and then

turn off the pressure and monitor the actual pressure value
for at least 10 minutes.
7 Check for pressure drop:

If the pressure stays stable or drops only 0.5 psi, you can
consider the uECD leakfree.
If the pressure drops more than 0.5 psi, you have a leak.
If you are sure none of the upstream flow system components
are leaking, check for leaks at the column fitting and plugged
inlet. If you find leaks, tighten the fittings and repeat the leak
test.

NOTE

158

If you can find no other leaks, the uECD itself is probably leaking. The
uECD cannot be disassembled without special license from the Nuclear
Regulatory Commission or Agreement State Licensing Agency (USA only).
Return the leaking uECD to Agilent for disposal.

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Performing a radioactivity leak test (wipe test)

Micro-cell ECDs must be tested for radioactive leakage at least
every 6 months. Records of tests and results must be
maintained for possible inspection by the Nuclear Regulatory
Commission and/or responsible state agency. More frequent
tests may be conducted when necessary.
The procedure used is the wipe test. A Wipe Test Kit (part no.
18713-60050) is supplied with each new uECD. Refer to the
information card supplied in the Wipe Test Kit for instructions
on performing the wipe test.

7890 Series GC IPB

159

Detectors

Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) 7890A

The sample is burned in a hydrogen-rich flame. Excited species
rise into a cooler zone above the flame, decay, and give off
characteristic radiation. This is filtered and measured by a
high-gain photomultiplier.
The intense yellow carbon radiation is blocked by a shield
around the flame. Filters select either sulfur or phosphorus
radiation.

Preparing for maintenance

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

To prevent damage to the column or columns, remove the columns

from the GC.

Additional tasks in preparation include:

If you are replacing the transfer line, turn off the source
gases to the FPD detector.
If you are not replacing the transfer line, plug base of
transfer line with a 1/8-inch Swagelok nut to keep it clean.

160

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Disassembling the FPD

Our objective is to disassemble the detector and prevent it from
getting dirty. We recommend using lint free gloves during most
of these steps.
1 Disconnect the spring and remove the photomultiplier tube

(PMT). Place it in a safe place away from the light. (For a dual
FPD, repeat for the second PMT.)

7890 Series GC IPB

161

Detectors

2 Remove and set aside the filter in a lint free cloth. For sulfur,

remove the plastic spacer and then the filter. Try tapping the
side of the detector or using the edge of a cotton swab. The
phosphorus filter sits closer to the end of the housing.

162

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

3 Remove the vent or exhaust tube with a 9/16-inch wrench.

4 Remove the 4 screws and detector cover with a Torx T-20

driver.

7890 Series GC IPB

163

Detectors

5 Loosen one screw and remove the ignitor collar with a Torx

T-10 driver. The collar of your ignitor may have 1 or 2 screws.

6 Remove the heater/sensor assembly from the emission block.

164

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

7890 Series GC IPB

165

Detectors

7 The heater/sensor assembly for the dual FPD attaches with a

screw.

8 Remove one screw and retainer for the heater/sensor

assembly in the transfer line with a Torx T-10 Key.

9 Remove the heater/sensor assembly.

166

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

10 Move the heater/sensor assemblies and ignitor cable to the

front of the oven top.

11 Remove two 7-mm mounting nuts from the base of the

transfer line.

7890 Series GC IPB

167

Detectors

12 Loosen 3 screws that hold the optics assembly to the detector

bracket with a Torx T-10 driver.

13 The objective of this step is to separate the optics from the

transfer line. Do not flex the tubing where it is brazed to the

transfer line weldment. Grasp the transfer line with your left
hand and the optics assembly with your right hand. Lift them
just high enough so that the 3 screws that you loosened in
step 11 are above the bracket.

168

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

14 Twist and lift the optics while holding the transfer line

stationary. Carefully separate the assemblies. The O-ring on

the transfer jet is compressed against the inside of the
emissions chamber. This is the resistance that you feel.
15 Place the optic assembly on a lint free cloth.

7890 Series GC IPB

169

Detectors

16 If you are not replacing the transfer line, skip to the section

Rebuilding the FPD optics assembly. If you are replacing

the transfer line, continue with the next section.

170

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Rebuilding the FPD optics assembly

Use lint-free gloves when handling the optics assembly and
O-ring seal.
1 Completely loosen the 4 T-10 screws from the clamp and

coupling.

2 Set the Y-shaped clamp to one side.

3 Carefully separate the lens housing from the stainless steel

coupling. The focusing lens and O-ring usually stick to the

coupling, but could stay with the lens housing. Try to keep
the housing, flange ring, screws and washers in place.

7890 Series GC IPB

171

Detectors

4 Remove the brown O-ring on the lens housing with a small

pick. Roll the new seal over the edge of the housing until it
sits in the groove.
5 Remove the coupling and heat shield disk from the old

emission chamber with a No 1 Pozidrive or Philips

screwdriver. Try to keep the screws, washers, and parts
together.

172

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

6 Assemble the ignitor parts. Slip the stainless steel spacer

over the glow plug, followed by the O-ring. Do not use the
copper washer.
7 Screw the glow plug into the new emission chamber and

tighten with a 5/16-inch wrench.

8 Assemble the new emission chamber, seal, and window.

7890 Series GC IPB

173

Detectors

9 Position the heat shield and coupling onto the emission

chamber so the threaded hole is aligned with the threaded

fitting for the exhaust tube.
10 Reconnect the parts using the 4 screws and washers. Tighten

opposite screws, similar to a wheel on an automobile, to

insure a good seal.

174

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

11 Turn the lens housing so that it faces the coupling. Insert the

lens and rust colored O-ring.

7890 Series GC IPB

175

Detectors

12 Place the housing onto the coupling and fasten the top screw

just tight enough to keep the parts together.

176

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

13 Hold the y-shaped clamp and start the remaining screws into

the clamp. Do not tighten until step 7 of Reassembling the

FPD.

7890 Series GC IPB

177

Detectors

Reassembling the FPD

This part of the procedure reassembles the optics assembly with
the transfer line, reconnects both to the detector bracket,
replaces the heater/sensor and ignitor wires, replaces the
covers and PMT.
1 Replace or install the O-ring on the transfer line jet. Remove

the O-ring with a small pick. Place the new O-ring over the
jet. Roll it into the groove below the jet.

2 Reposition the detector optics above the bracket.

3 The objective of this step is to reattach the optics to the

transfer line and insure a good seal between the O-ring and
the emissions chamber. Grasp the transfer line with your left
178

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

hand and the optics assembly with your right hand. Push
them together while twisting back and forth.
4 Before lowering the assemblies into the bracket, make sure

there is no gap between the transfer line and the emission

chamber.

7890 Series GC IPB

179

Detectors

5 Lower the assemblies into the bracket. Line up the holes in

the transfer line base with the threaded posts in the bracket.
Line up the 3 screws and the clamp with the notches in the
detector bracket.

180

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

6 Reattach the transfer line to the bracket with the 7-mm nuts.
7 Tighten the clamp against the detector bracket. Tighten the 3

bottom screws on the optics assembly.

8 Insert the heater/sensor assembly into the transfer line.

Make sure the sensor is at the bottom of the hole.

9 Reinstall the retainer and screw.

7890 Series GC IPB

181

182

Detectors

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

10 Insert the heater/sensor assembly into the emission

chamber.
11 Reconnect the ignitor wire to the glow plug.

7890 Series GC IPB

183

Detectors

12 Replace the cover. First, start the 2 screws on the right-hand

side of the cover. Second, start and tighten the screws at the
base on the left-hand side. Third, tighten the screws on the
right-hand side.

184

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

13 Replace the filter. If you are doing the Agilent checkout, run

the phosphorus filter before the sulfur filter with spacer.

14 Replace the photomultiplier tube (PMT). Connect the spring.
15 Install the new vent tube. Make sure it is tight to prevent light

leaks.

7890 Series GC IPB

185

Detectors

Replacing the FPD

1 Before this can be done you must first disconnect some

cables originating from the FPD board in the electronics

panel.
2 From the side panel side, disconnect heater sensors to the

Aux heater and to the back detector, the ignitor cable, the
high voltage connector, and the PMT signal cable.

186

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

3 Remove the top four T-20 screws retaining the PMT

assembly.

4 Lift up the entire assembly and lay it down on the top GC

surface.
5 Loosen the one screw holding the adjacent cover and pivot

the cover up and off.

6 The FPD is now ready for replacement, if required.

If not, reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

187

Detectors

Bake out and run checkout test

This part of the procedure bakes out the detector and restores
conditions. The detector output will level off in about 1 hour
after you restore the conditions. The detector output will
continue to drift down slowly for about 24 hours.
1 Reinstall the column or columns.
2 Reinstall the drain tube to the FPD exhaust tube.
3 Restore the gases to the GC.
4 Restore the power to the GC.
5 Restore the conditions to the inlets and detectors, but turn

off the flame of the FPD to prevent condensation.

6 After the FPD is at temperature for about 10 minutes, light

the flame.
7 Bake out the detector. Set the oven and detector

temperatures to 250C for 15 minutes. Insure there is

adequate gas flows through the column.
8 After the bakeout, restore the oven and FPD conditions.
9 Allow the output to level off.
10 Run a checkout and compare the results.

188

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Replacing the heater/sensor assemblies

Replacing the heater/sensor assemblies takes about 30 minutes.
It requires you to turn off the GC, remove the vent, and the
detector cover. (If using a dual-wavelength FPD--not available
on all GC models--also remove the left PMT assembly.)

CAUTION

When turning the GC off, turn off the flame first to prevent
condensation from dripping into the jet and column.

You may wish to replace or check the FPD heater/sensor

assemblies for the following reasons:
One or both of the heaters or sensors are defective.
The actual temperature reading on the display of the heaters
is cycling more than 1 C.
Materials needed
G1535-60610 Heater/Sensor assembly with short lead for the
emissions block assembly.
G1535-60620 Heater/Sensor assembly with long lead for the
transfer line.
Procedure
1 Turn off the flame.
2 Turn off the GC.
3 Remove the vent assembly and cover.
4 Put on an ESD wrist strap. Remove the right-side cover to

access the GC electronics. Disconnect the heater/sensor

leads from the auxiliary heater board and the connectors
above the main board.
5 Carefully pull the cables up onto the top of the GC.

Transfer line
1 Use a Torx T-10 driver to remove the screw and retainer clip

holding the lower heater/sensor assembly. Remove the

heater and sensor from the transfer line.
2 Remove the protective cap from the temperature sensor of

the heater/sensor assembly with the short cable.

3 Insert the heater and sensor into the transfer line. Make sure

the sensor is seated at the bottom of the hole. If not, the AUX
temperature will wander above and below the detector
setpoint.
7890 Series GC IPB

189

Detectors

4 Position the retainer clip over the heater/sensor assembly

and install the screw.

190

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Emissions block assembly

1 Remove the upper heater and temperature sensor from the

emissions block assembly.

2 Remove the protective cap from the sensor of the

heater/sensor assembly with the long cable.

3 Install the upper heater and sensor in the emissions block

assembly.

7890 Series GC IPB

191

Detectors

Closing up
1 Route the heater/sensor cables out of the bracket as shown.
2 Replace the cover, vent assembly, and, on the

dual-wavelength detector, the left PMT assembly. Refer to

Accessing Heaters and Ignitor.
3 Carefully thread the heater/sensor cables into the electronics

compartment.
4 Put on an ESD wrist strap. Connect the short cable as shown

in Back-top panel cutouts. Connect the long cable to the

auxiliary heater board as shown in Long cable connectors
and leads.
5 Replace the right-side cover to the GC electronics

compartment.
6 Turn on the GC. Confirm that the flame is off.
7 Restore the operating conditions.
8 Wait 20 minutes for the detector to heat up, then ignite the

flame.

192

7890 Series GC IPB

Detectors

Table 8

7890 Series GC IPB

Long cable connectors and leads

Detector type

Location

Connector

Single-wavelength

Front

A1

Single-wavelength

Back

A2

Dual-wavelength

Back

A2

193

Detectors

Replacing the FPD signal board

If changing the GC configuration, see Changing the GC
configuration for important information regarding GC
methods. Then proceed with the steps below.
1 Cool down the oven and all heated zones.
2 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
3 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
4 Disconnect all attached electrical connections to the FPD

board.
5 Turn thumb screw counterclockwise, lift screw to disengage,

slide board down, and then lift out. (Note that the grounding
point for the board is at the thumbscrew).
6 Replace board if required. (Note that the FPD board is longer

than the FID board and is attached to the full length of the
GC board receptacle.)
7 Replace connections in reverse order of disassembly.
8 Reconfigure the modified GC from the front panel keypad

supplying requested information.

194

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

4 EPC modules
EPC overview 196
Repairing EPC modules 197
Accessing EPC modules 199
Replacing the EPC modules 200
Replacing EPC module proportional valves 203
Inlet modules 205
Detector modules 208
Pneumatics Control Module (PCM) 211
Calibrating the PCM interface 212
Changing the PCM pressure channel frit 213
Correcting PCM leaks 215
Aux EPCs 217
Frits for auxiliary pressure control channels 218
Updating PID Constants 221

Agilent Technologies

195

EPC modules

EPC overview
An Electronic Pneumatic Controller (EPC) module senses gas
pressure or mass flow and controls that pressure or flow.
There are four kinds of EPC modules:
Inlet flow modules
Detector flow modules
Pneumatic control modules (PCM)
Aux EPCs
Inlet and detector modules are each designed for specific inlets
and detectors.
A PCM has two control channels. One is intended for carrier
gas. The other may function as either a forward- or
back-pressure regulator, depending on the external plumbing.
An Aux EPC provides three independent forward-pressure
regulation channels.

196

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Repairing EPC modules

The 7890 Series GC can control up to 6 EPC modules. Each has
a particular purpose and is limited to a particular location in
the EPC carrier. A TCD or AUX EPC module can be located in
the optional 3rd detector carrier.

Repairs on EPC modules should be in this order:

1 Verify the EPC module is receiving 24 VDC power, the green

LED is ON, and the EPC appears configured in the GC

display.
2 Compare the Communication buss connection with an

adjacent module that has a good power and signal

connection.
3 Replace proportional valve or valves for flow or pressure

problems.
4 Replace the module only after 1 and 2 (when dealing with

power issues).
Repairs should be verified by the following:
Zero the pressure channels before performing any
verification tests.
Inlets: With the inlet capped, perform pressure decay test.
With column installed, compare calculated flow reading from
the display with measured flow for column, septum purge,
and split vent.

7890 Series GC IPB

197

EPC modules

Detectors: With the detector capped, compare calculated

flow readings from the display with measured flow for each
gas.
Failure modes for a proportional valve include:
Sticking solenoid plunger causing variable flows.
Electronic open causing no flow. Valve fail in a closed
position.

198

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Accessing EPC modules

1 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top rear cover by pressing in the two black side

tabs and lifting the cover up and off.

4 Disconnect the gas plumbing to the module that is being

replaced. If the module is towards the back (slots 2, 4, or 6),

the gas plumbing on the front module may need to be
removed.

NOTE

7890 Series GC IPB

In some cases, it may be necessary to remove the upper rear cover plate.
Do this by first loosening the three retaining T-20 screws along the
bottom and then lifting the cover plate up and off.

199

EPC modules

Replacing the EPC modules

1 Access the EPC module. See Accessing EPC modules.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
2 EPC modules are secured by one or two clamps on the top

edge. Remove the one or two retaining clamps holding the

EPC module in place.
3 Remove the 1/8 inch Swagelok gas supply tubing connections

(1, 2, or 3) from the EPC module.

4 Lift the EPC module up and remove the communication buss

connector. The SSL, PTV, and VI EPC modules also require

removal of an electrical connector to their split vent valves.
This illustration (a split/splitless module) shows these
features.

200

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

5 Remove the 1, 2, or 3 tubing block using a T-10 driver. This is

the EPC module for an FID detector.

6 Remove the EPC module by lifting straight up.

7 Install the new EPC module. Remember to plug in the

Communication buss. If a SSL, PTV, or VI inlet module, plug

in the split vent valve.

7890 Series GC IPB

201

EPC modules

8 Remove the O-rings for the pneumatic tubing blocks. Clean

the sealing surface under the O-rings with a lint-free cloth.

Install new O-rings.
9 Install the new pneumatic tubing blocks and tighten the

screws.
10 Turn ON the GC and configure the EPC module. See

Replacing a GC module for details.

11 Zero the flow and/or pressure sensors (Options / Calibration).
12 Verify the flow or pressure control.

202

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Replacing EPC module proportional valves

This is a generalized procedure for replacing all G3440A and
G3440B EPC proportional valves. Select the valve and valve
part number from EPC Module Parts. Valves come in a kit with
spare O-rings and screws.
1 To protect the column and inlet liner, place the instrument

into Inlet or GC maintenance mode. Let instrument go ready.

2 Turn off instrument.
3 If you need to lift the EPC module to access the wire

connectors, remove 1 or 2 retaining brackets.

4 Lift the EPC module and disconnect the 2-wire connector

from the printed circuit board. The figure shows an Aux EPC
module, which has three proportional valves.

5 Using a T-10 driver, remove the two retaining screws holding

the proportional valve to the EPC module. Save and reuse the
screws if you did not get them in the kit.

6 Remove the valve and the O-rings. Clean the seat of the

O-ring on the flow block with a lint free cloth.

7890 Series GC IPB

203

EPC modules

7 Insert 2 new O-rings.

8 Except for the split vent valve, tie a loose knot in the

proportional valve wire to shorten the wire.

9 Attach the new proportional valve, the electrical connector,

the EPC retaining clamps, and body panels.

204

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Inlet modules
These modules are essentially carrier gas regulators. The SSL,
MMI, VI, and PTV modules have a split vent valve that sits next
to the module..
This is a split/splitless inlet module:

It consists of
One or more proportional valves
Gas tubing connections
A printed circuit board
A connection to the communications buss in the lower left
corner

7890 Series GC IPB

205

EPC modules

Inlet modules
Description

Part number

O-rings

Slot

COC

G3454-60554

1 or 2

PP

G3451-60551

1 or 2

PTV

G3500-60500

1 or 2

S/SL 100 PSI

G3452-60552

1 or 2

S/SL 150 PSI

G3452-60510

1 or 2

VI

G3504-60501

1 or 2

MMI

G3510-60500

1 or 2

The type of proportional valve varies with the module.

206

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Proportional valves
Description

Carrier

Septum purge

Split vent

COC

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

PP

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

PTV

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

S/SL 100 PSI

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

S/SL 150 PSI

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

VI

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

MMI

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

Valves require 2 O-rings each (5180-4181, 12/pkg).

7890 Series GC IPB

207

EPC modules

Detector modules
Detector modules often supply multiple detector gases and a
makeup gas. They always control flow by controlling pressure
through a fixed restrictor. This is a typical FID module. FID,
NPD and FPD modules control Air, Hydrogen, and column
makeup. The Hydrogen and makeup are tied together and
mixed. The Air has a separate connection.

The TCD module supplies both carrier and reference gases and
has a switching valve in the reference gas supply.

208

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Detector modules

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part number

Slot

uECD

G3433-60533

3 or 4

FID

G3431-60531

3 or 4

FPD

G3435-60535

3 or 4

NPD

G3434-60502

3 or 4

TCD

G3432-60532

3 or 4 or AUX Det 2

209

EPC modules

Proportional valves
Description

Air

uECD

Makeup

Hydrogen

Reference

G3430-67013

FID

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67014

FPD

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

NPD

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67014

TCD

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

Valves require 2 O-rings each (5180-4181, 12/pkg).

210

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Pneumatics Control Module (PCM)

This module contains two channels.
The PCM carrier channel has both pressure and flow sensors.
It is functionally identical to the Purged Packed inlet flow
module.
The PCM auxiliary channel has only a pressure sensor. When
plumbed normally (gas in at the threaded connector, out via
the tubing), it provides forward pressure regulation. If the
plumbing is reversed, it operates as a back-pressure
regulator.
Table 9

PCM module

Description

Part number

O-rings

Slot

PCM

G3476-60501

1, 2, 5, or 6

Table 10 Proportional valves

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Carrier

AUX

PCM

G3430-67013

G3430-67016

211

EPC modules

Calibrating the PCM interface

The interface's flow module contains a pressure sensor that
must be zeroed after it is installed on the GC. Calibration
ensures an accurate interface pressure display.
Do not connect the carrier gas to the flow module until you have
zeroed the interface's pressure sensor. For more information on
zeroing the pressure sensor, refer to the 7890A Advanced User
Guide or 7890B Operation Manual.
1 If the gas supply is connected to the GC, turn off the supply

at the source, then disconnect the supply line from the PCM
inlet fitting.
2 Turn on the GC and wait 15 minutes to allow it to reach

thermal equilibrium.
3 When the GC has reached thermal equilibrium, press

[Options], scroll to Calibration and press [Enter].

4 Scroll to the module to be zeroed and press [Enter].

5 Scroll to a zero line and press [Info]. The GC will remind you

of the conditions necessary for zeroing that specific sensor.

Flow sensors. Verify that the gas is connected and flowing
(turned on).
Pressure sensors. Disconnect the gas supply line at the back of
the GC. Turning it off is not adequate; the valve may leak.
6 Press [On/Yes] to zero or [Clear] to cancel.
7 Turn off the GC.
8 Plumb the carrier gas to the flow module.
9 Turn on the GC.

If you were calibrating the flow sensor after replacing the PCM,
check for leaks.

212

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Changing the PCM pressure channel frit

To change a frit:
1 Gather the following:

O-rings, package of 12, 5180-4181

Restrictor
2 Turn off the gas supply to the channel.
3 Remove the screw holding the tubing block with the output

tubing.
4 Remove the tubing block. Remove the frit and O-ring. Be

careful to avoid scratching the metal surfaces.

5 Remove the other O-ring as well. Replace it with a new

O-ring.

7890 Series GC IPB

213

EPC modules

6 Place a new O-ring on the new frit and press it down into the

block.
7 Place the block on the module and tighten the screw firmly.
8 Restore the gas supply.

214

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Correcting PCM leaks

1 Use the electronic leak detector to check all areas of the PCM

that are potential sources of a leak.

2 Tighten any connections which are leaking and retest.

NOTE

If the pressure drop is now 0.05 psi/min or less, you can consider the
interface system leakfree.

3 If the interface still leaks, continue to check for and correct

leaks.

7890 Series GC IPB

215

EPC modules

Potential PCM leak areas

Check the following areas when checking for leaks in the PCM.
Flow channel
Two O-rings behind the block where the pneumatic lines
enter the PCM
Two O-rings for the valve in the PCM
Pressure channel
Flatness of tubing block fitting
Two O-rings behind the block where the pneumatic lines
enter the PCM
Two O-rings for the valve in the PCM
Forward pressure valve leaks
Occasionally an increase in pressure, rather than a decrease,
may be observed. This is usually due to slight leakage into the
module across the forward pressure control proportional valve.
Although slight leaks of this nature do not create
chromatographic problems, they may obscure other small leaks
that do cause problems by allowing air into the system. The
valves can leak at about 0.2 mL/min and be within specification.
To check for internal valve leakage (when leak testing the PCM
only):
1 Remove the supply pressure at the carrier inlet fitting, and

quickly cap the fitting with a solid 1/8-inch Vespel plug and a
Swagelok nut.
2 Check the actual pressure on the display and monitor it for 5

minutes. Pressure loss should not be greater than 0.5 psi.

216

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Aux EPCs
Up to three of these modules can be installed, for a possible
total of 9 pressure-regulated channels. Each channel has a block
connector covering a frit with O-ring for the gas output via the
block connector.
The module is shipped with a brown (low resistance) frit in each
channel.

Table 11 Module
Description

Part number

Slot

AUX

G3470-60501

5 or 6 or AUX

Proportional valves
Table 12 Proportional valves
Description

Air, Makeup, Hydrogen

AUX EPC

G3430-67013

Table 13 Tubing weldment

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part number

Pneumatic tubing with block

connector and captive screw

G3430-60550

217

EPC modules

Frits for auxiliary pressure control channels

The auxiliary pressure control channels in the Aux EPC module
are used to provide a flow to various devices including a purged
splitter or a QuickSwap or a headspace sampler. The PCM Aux
channel can be used to provide a flow in forward pressure
control mode.
A replaceable frit is used in these auxiliary channels to optimize
control for the range of flows. The image below shows one of the
three channels.

NOTE

218

Different frits may require different PID constants. See Updating PID
Constants.

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

This table lists the 4 types of frits, their flow characteristics,

and common uses.
Kit

Component

Marking

Flow characteristic

Resistance Often used with

No

G3430-80061

1 ring Brown

Low

Yes

G3430-80062

2 rings Red

Yes

G3430-80063

3 rings Blue

Yes

G3430-20011

None

400 +/- 30 SCCM AIR @ 40

PSIG
30 +/- 1.5 SCCM H2 @ 15
PSIG
3.33 +/- 0.3 SCCM H2 @ 15
PSIG
No restriction

Medium

FID Air, QuickSwap, Splitter, Deans

Switch
FID Hydrogen

High

NPD Hydrogen

Zero

Headspace vial pressurization

Notes for this table

The Air frit, G3430-80061, ships in each channel in the AUX
EPC module. No frit ships in the PCM Aux channel.
Yes indicates this part is included in the AUX module ship kit
and the PCM ship kit.
Always use a new O-ring. 5180-4181, O-rings 12/pk

7890 Series GC IPB

219

EPC modules

Procedure for replacing frit

1 Select the appropriate frit.
2 Gather a new O-ring, a T-10 Torx driver, and a tweezer.
3 Loosen the captured screw for the channel that you want to

change.
4 Lift up the pneumatic tubing block.
5 Replace the O-ring and frit.
6 Replace the pneumatic block and tight the screw.

220

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Updating PID Constants

Pneumatic PID constants are the coefficients used by the EPC
modules to control flows and pressures. Certain gases or special
applications (such as QuickSwap, Headspace vial
pressurization, or splitter and backflush applications) require
different PIDs than provided at the factory. For the Agilent 7890
Series GC, you must use G4600AA Agilent Instrument Utilities
software to download new PIDs to the EPC modules.
The table below summarizes custom PID values required for
selected applications. Note that if updating an Aux EPC module,
you will need to change the frit for the channel used.

NOTE

7890 Series GC IPB

Application

Module

AUX Frit

Select Available
PID Values

QuickSwap

AUX EPC

G3430-80061
brown or 1 ring

Quickswap

AUX EPC
Purged Splitter
and Deans Switch
when using
Backflush

G3430-20011 no
color or no rings

Quickswap

Purged Splitter
AUX EPC
and Deans Switch

G3430-80061
brown or 1 ring

Standard

Headspace vial
pressurization

AUX EPC

G3430-20011 no
color or no rings

AUX_EPC_Heads
pace

Headspace
sampling loop

PCM in
backpressure
control

NA

PCM_Headspace

The driver for the 7890Series GC will calculate backflush conditions. The
calculation of Hold Times assumes that a zero restrictor is installed in the
AUX EPC channel. If you use an FID Air restrictor the actual hold time will
be less than what the software displays.

221

EPC modules

Updating PID constants

Follow these steps to update the PID constants for any EPC
module (inlet, detector, AUX, or PCM). Use these same
directions to apply special PIDs for use with QuickSwap,
Capillary Flow Technology devices, and Headspace samplers, or
to restore factory defaults.
The PID Constants screen displays (for the selected
instrument):
Currentlists devices (and the associated Module for each)
installed on the selected GC
Versionversion number of the currently-installed PID values
for the selected module
AvailablePID files available for upload to the selected
module
Selected Versionversion number of the Available PID values
selected for update
Statusindicates (after an update) whether or not the PID
values were uploaded to the module successfully

To set your PID values:

1 Close any online data system session for this instrument.
2 Open Instrument Utilities.
3 Select Firmware Update from the software explorer pane.
4 Select the PID Constants tab.

222

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

5 From the Instruments list, select the GC with the module(s)

you wish to update, and click Connect. The list of modules

for this GC will display. The list may not appear immediately.

6 Locate the Module you wish to update. If updating an EPC

AUX or PCM module, determine the specific channel to be

updated.
If you are unsure of the channel to be updated, remove the
pneumatics cover and trace the wiring from the device to
the EPC module. Use the figure below to determine the
module's EPC location.

7890 Series GC IPB

223

EPC modules

7 Select the row of the EPC module (and channel) that you

need to update. This is most often an AUX_EPC module.

8 From the Available selection box, select the appropriate set of

values to download. Note the Selected Version number that

appears. In the example below, we are updating Aux 1 with
QuickSwap PIDs.

9 When finished specifying your desired values, click Update in

the row(s) of the module(s) you wish to update. This will

download the PIDs to the appropriate EPC modules.

224

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

10 If the download is successful, the status will read Values Set

(see below). If the file is not accepted by Instrument Utilities,

the status will read Invalid File. Note that these Status
messages are the only feedback on the success of the PID
update.
The following screen capture illustrates updating PIDs for
QuickSwap.

11 The software writes a log entry for the instrument.

12 Power cycle the GC to activate the new PIDs.
13 If using Instrument Utilities, close the software to remove

your CE key from the customer's system.

7890 Series GC IPB

225

EPC modules

No positive feedback on reconnect

NOTE

The ChemStation driver for the 7890A will calculate backflush conditions.
The calculation of Hold Times assumes that a zero restrictor is installed in
the AUX EPC channel. If you use an FID Air restrictor the actual hold time
will be less than what the software displays.The only feedback on the
success of the update is the message Values Set and an entry in the
software log file.
If you reconnect, you will not see any confirmation that you
updated a PID. For example, if you update one or more AUX
EPC channels to QuickSwap PID values, the screen does not tell
you that the channel has QuickSwap values.
However, the Version number may have changed for all channels.
This number is read from the EPC module. There is only one
version number in each EPC module. If you update one channel
of an AUX EPC module, the version number will be the latest
update. Because there are not a version number for each
channel, it will look like you updated all channels. This is not
correct. The current version does not provide you positive
feedback that you updated one channel. Here is an example
screen after the update of one channel to QuickSwap.

The Selected Version is read from the eeprom file on your PC.

226

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC modules

Updating PID constants available for use by Instrument Utilities

If at any time the PID constant values are updated, follow the
procedure below to update the files within the Instrument
Utilities directory. Perform this procedure before accessing the
PID Constants interface.
1 Obtain the latest EEPROM files.

Browse to where the Instrument Utilities is installed (default is

C:\Program Files\Agilent\Lab Monitor).
1 In this Instrument Utilities directory, browse to

firmware\pneumatic-eeprom.

2 If the latest EEPROM file dates are newer than the files in

this directory:
a Delete the old .xml files.
b Copy the new .xml files into the

firmware\pneumatic-eeprom directory. The directory will

look similar to the one below.

c See "Updating PID Constants" to download these values

to the EPC modules.

7890 Series GC IPB

227

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

5 Performance Verification
About Chromatographic Checkout 229
To Prepare for Chromatographic Checkout 230
To Check FID Performance 232
To Check NPD Performance 238
To Check TCD Performance 244
To Check uECD Performance 250
To Check FPD Performance (Sample 5188-5953) 256
To Check FPD Performance (Sample 5188-5245, Japan) 264

Agilent Technologies

228

Performance Verification

About Chromatographic Checkout

The tests described in this section provide basic confirmation
that the GC and detector can perform comparably to factory
condition. However, as detectors and the other parts of the GC
age, detector performance can change. The results presented
here represent typical outputs for typical operating conditions
and are not specifications.
The tests assume the following:
Use of an automatic liquid sampler. If not available, use a
suitable manual syringe instead of the syringe listed.
Use of a 10-L syringe in most cases. However, a 5-L syringe
is an acceptable substitute for the 1-L injections described
here.
Use of the septa and other hardware (liners, jets, adapters,
and so forth) described. If you substitute other hardware,
performance can vary.

7890 Series GC IPB

229

Performance Verification

To Prepare for Chromatographic Checkout

Because of the differences in chromatographic performance
associated with different consumables, Agilent strongly
recommends using the parts listed here for all checkout tests.
Agilent also recommends installing new consumable parts
whenever the quality of the installed ones is not known. For
example, installing a new liner and septum ensures that they
will not contribute any contamination to the results.
1 Check the indicators/dates on any gas supply traps.

Replace/recondition expended traps.

2 Install new consumable parts for the inlet and prepare the

correct injector syringe (and needle, as needed).

Table 14 Recommended parts for checkout
Recommended part for checkout

Part number

Split splitless inlet

Syringe, 10-L

5181-1267

O-ring

5188-5365

Septum

5183-4757

Liner

5062-3587 or 5181-3316

Multimode inlet
Syringe, 10-L

5181-1267

O-ring

5188-6405

Septum

5183-4757

Liner

5188-6568

Packed column inlet

Syringe, 10-L

5181-1267

O-ring

5080-8898

Septum

5183-4757

Cool on-column inlet

230

Septum

5183-4758

Septum nut

19245-80521

Syringe, 5-L on-column

5182-0836

0.32 mm needle for 5-L syringe

5182-0831

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Recommended part for checkout

Part number

7683B Needle support assembly for

.250/.320 mm injections

G2913-60977

Insert, fused silica, 0.32-mm id

19245-20525

PTV inlet

7890 Series GC IPB

Syringe, 10-L -- for septum head

Syringe, 10-uL, 23/42/HP -- for
septumless head

5181-1267
5181-8809

Inlet adapter, Graphpak-2M

5182-9761

Silver seal for Graphpak-2M

5182-9763

Glass liner, multibaffle

5183-2037

PTFE ferrule (septumless head)

5182-9748

Microseal replacement (if installed)

5182-3444

Ferrule, Graphpak-3D

5182-9749

231

Performance Verification

To Check FID Performance

1 Gather the following:

Evaluation column, HP-5 30 m 0.32 mm 0.25 m

(19091J-413)
FID performance evaluation (checkout) sample
(5188-5372)
Chromatographic-grade isooctane (wash solvent)
4-mL solvent and waste bottles or equivalent for
autoinjector
2-mL sample vials or equivalent for sample
Inlet and injector hardware
2 Verify the following:

Capillary column jet installed. If not, select and install a

capillary column jet.
Capillary column adapter installed (adaptable FID only).
If not, install it.
Chromatographic-grade gases plumbed and configured:
helium as carrier gas, nitrogen, hydrogen, and air.
Empty waste vials loaded in sample turret.
4-mL solvent vial with diffusion cap filled with isooctane
and inserted in Solvent A injector position.
3 Replace consumable parts (liner, septum, traps, syringe, and

so forth) as needed for the checkout.

4 Install the evaluation column. (See the procedure for the SS,

MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in the Maintenance manual.)

Bake out the evaluation column for at least 30 min at 180
C. (See the procedure for the SS, MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in
the Maintenance manual.)
Be sure to configure the column.
5 Check the FID baseline output. The output should be

between 5 pA and 20 pA and relatively stable. (If using a gas

generator or ultra pure gas, the signal may stabilize below 5
pA.) If the output is outside this range or unstable, resolve
this problem before continuing.
6 If the output is too low:

Check that the electrometer is on.

Check that the flame is lit.
7 Create or load a method with these parameter values.

232

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Table 15 FID checkout conditions

Column and sample
Type

HP-5, 30 m x 0.32 mm x 0.25 m

(19091J-413)

Sample

FID checkout 5188-5372

Column flow

6.5 mL/min

Column mode

Constant flow

Split/splitless inlet
Temperature

250 C

Mode

Splitless

Purge flow

40 mL/min

Purge time

0.5 min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Gas saver

Off

Multimode inlet
Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

75 C

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

250C

Final time 1

5.0 min

Purge time

1.0 min

Purge flow

40 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Purged packed inlet

Temperature

250 C

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Cool on-column inlet

Temperature

Oven Track

Septum purge

15 mL/min

PTV inlet

7890 Series GC IPB

Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

75 C

233

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

350 C

Final time 1

2 min

Rate 2

100 C/min

Final temp 2

250 C

Final time 2

0 min

Purge time

0.5 min

Purge flow

40 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Detector
Temperature

300 C

H2 flow

30 mL/min

Air flow

400 mL/min

Makeup flow (N2)

25 mL/min

Lit offset

Typically 2 pA

Oven
Initial temp

75 C

Initial time

0.5 min

Rate 1

20 C/min

Final temp

190 C

Final time

0 min

ALS settings (if installed)

234

Sample washes

Sample pumps

Sample wash volume

Injection volume

1 L

Syringe size

10 L

Solvent A pre washes

Solvent A pre washes

Solvent A wash volume

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Solvent B pre washes

Solvent B post washes

Solvent B wash volume

Injection mode (7693A)

Normal

Airgap volume (7693A)

0.20

Viscosity delay

0s

Inject dispense speed (7693A)

6000

Plunger speed

Fast (Slow for cool on-column inlet)

PreInjection dwell

PostInjection dwell

Manual injection
Injection volume

1 L

Data system
Path

Setting

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Options

Keep instrument keyboard locked

after method is loaded? = No

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Signals

Assign Signal 1 to the detector

Choose Save Data All
Data Rate = 5 Hz

8 If using a data system, prepare the system to perform one

run using the loaded checkout method. Make sure that the
data system will output a chromatogram.
9 Start the run.

If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the

run using the data system or press [Start] on the GC.
If performing a manual injection (with or without a data
system):
a Press [Prep Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless injection.
b When the GC becomes ready, inject 1 L of the checkout

sample and press [Start] on the GC.

10 The following chromatogram shows typical results for a new

detector with new consumable parts installed and nitrogen

makeup gas.

7890 Series GC IPB

235

236

Performance Verification

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Typical values
The following are typical values for the detector results. The
results for a detector depend on site preparation related
factors. These are not pass/fail criteria.

Components

Typical area counts

C13 and C14

46 pA-sec (area counts)

C15 and C16

460 pA-sec

FID ASTM noise <= .0382 pA

Repeatability (6 runs, first deleted to avoid first run anomalies):
RSD% of RT = 0.01%; <0.0008 m of area <1%.
Split: C13/C16 and C14/C16 sensitivity ratios: >0.95 and <1.05

7890 Series GC IPB

237

Performance Verification

To Check NPD Performance

1 Gather the following:

Evaluation column, HP-5 30 m 0.32 mm 0.25 m

(19091J-413)
NPD performance evaluation (checkout) sample
(18789-60060)
4-mL solvent and waste bottles or equivalent for
autoinjector
Chromatographic-grade isooctane
2-mL sample vials or equivalent for sample
Inlet and injector hardware
2 Verify the following:

Capillary column jet installed. If not, select and install a

capillary column jet.
Capillary column adapter installed. If not, install it.
Chromatographic-grade gases plumbed and configured:
helium as carrier gas, nitrogen, hydrogen, and air.
Empty waste vials loaded in sample turret.
4-mL vial with diffusion cap filled with isooctane and
inserted in Solvent A injector position.
3 If present, remove any protective caps from the inlet

manifold vents.
4 Replace consumable parts (liner, septum, traps, syringe, and

so forth) as needed for the checkout.

5 Install the evaluation column. (See the procedure for the SS,

MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in the Maintenance manual.)

Bake out the evaluation column for at least 30 min at 180
C. (See the procedure for the SS, MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in
the Maintenance manual.)
Be sure to configure the column.
6 Create or load a method with these parameter values.

238

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Table 16 NPD checkout conditions

Column and sample
Type

HP-5, 30 m x 0.32 mm x 0.25 m

(19091J-413)

Sample

NPD checkout 18789-60060

Column mode

Constant flow

Column pressure

6.5 mL/min (helium)

Split/splitless inlet
Temperature

200 C

Mode

Splitless

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Purge time

0.75 min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Multimode inlet
Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

60 C

Initial time

0.75 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

350 C

Final time 1

2 min

Purge time

1.0 min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Packed column inlet

Temperature

200 C

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Cool on-column inlet

Temperature

Oven track

Septum purge

15 mL/min

PTV inlet

7890 Series GC IPB

Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

60 C

Initial time

0.1 min

239

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

350 C

Final time 1

2 min

Rate 2

100 C/min

Final temp 2

250 C

Final time 2

0 min

Purge time

0.75 min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Detector
Temperature

300 C

H2 flow

3 mL/min

Air flow

60 mL/min

Makeup flow (N2)

Makeup + column = 10 mL/min

Output

30 display units (30 pA)

Oven
Initial temp

60 C

Initial time

0 min

Rate 1

20 C/min

Final temp

200 C

Final time

3 min

ALS settings (if installed)

240

Sample washes

Sample pumps

Injection volume

1 L

Syringe size

10 L

PreInj Solvent A Washes

PreInj Solvent B Washes

PostInj Solvent A Washes

PostInj Solvent B Washes

Viscosity delay

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Plunger speed

Fast (Slow for cool on-column inlet)

PreInjection dwell

PostInjection dwell

Manual injection
Injection volume

1 L

Data system
Path

Setting

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Options

Keep instrument keyboard locked

after method is loaded? = No

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Signals

Assign Signal 1 to the detector

Choose Save Data All
Data Rate = 5 Hz

7 If using a data system, prepare the system to perform one

run using the loaded checkout method. Make sure that the
data system will output a chromatogram.
8 Start the run.

If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the

run using the data system or press [Start] on the GC.
If performing a manual injection (with or without a data
system):
a Press [Prep Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless injection.
b When the GC becomes ready, inject 1 L of the checkout

sample and press [Start] on the GC.

9 The following chromatogram shows typical results for a new

detector with new consumable parts installed.

7890 Series GC IPB

241

242

Performance Verification

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Typical values
The following are typical values for the detector results. The
results for a detector depend on site preparation related
factors. These are not pass/fail criteria.
Agilent ChemStation
SS/MMI/COC/PTV/PP
Sensitivity

Azobenzene area counts

38

Malathion area counts

71

Agilent ChemstationASTM noise

Measured with GC isothermal @ 100C
10 minute blank run, noise range(s) >1 minute
Performance + noise report
NPD ASTM noise .0765 pA

3396B or 3396C or 3397A integrator sample conditions with

analog input [GC Analog output, Range 0]
>>Set DATE and TIME<<
Zero

10

Pk wd

0.04

Att 2^

Thresh

Cht sp

[Stop time 12.0]

Ar Rej

1000

SS/MMI/COC/PTV/PP
Sensitivity

7890 Series GC IPB

Azobenzene area counts

306,000

Malathion area counts

575,000

243

Performance Verification

To Check TCD Performance

1 Gather the following:

Evaluation column, HP-5 30 m x 0.32 mm x 0.25 m

(19091J-413)
FID/TCD performance evaluation (checkout) sample
(18710-60170)
4-mL solvent and waste bottles or equivalent for
autoinjector
Chromatographic-grade hexane
2-mL sample vials or equivalent for sample
Chromatographic-grade helium as carrier, makeup, and
reference gas
Inlet and injector hardware
2 Verify the following:

Chromatographic-grade gases plumbed and configured:

helium as carrier gas, nitrogen, hydrogen, and air.
Empty waste vials loaded in sample turret.
4-mL solvent vial with diffusion cap filled with isooctane
and inserted in Solvent A injector position.
3 Replace consumable parts (liner, septum, traps, syringe, and

so forth) as needed for the checkout.

4 Install the evaluation column. (See the procedure for the SS,

MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in the Maintenance manual.)

Bake out the evaluation column for at least 30 min at 180
C. (See the procedure for the SS, MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in
the Maintenance manual.)
Be sure to configure the column.
5 Create or load a method with these parameter values.

244

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Table 17 TCD Checkout Conditions

Column and sample
Type

HP-5, 30 m 0.32 mm 0.25 m

(19091J-413)

Sample

FID/TCD checkout 18710-60170

Column flow

6.5 mL/min

Column mode

Constant flow

Split/splitless inlet
Temperature

250 C

Mode

Splitless

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Purge time

0.75 min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Multimode inlet
Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

40 C

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

350 C

Final time 1

2 min

Purge time

1.0 min

Purge flow

40 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Purged packed inlet

Temperature

250 C

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Cool on-column inlet

Temperature

Oven track

Septum purge

15 mL/min

PTV inlet

7890 Series GC IPB

Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

40 C

Initial time

0.1 min

245

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

350 C

Final time 1

2 min

Rate 2

100 C/min

Final temp 2

250 C

Final time 2

0 min

Purge time

0.5 min

Purge flow

40 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Detector
Temperature

300 C

Reference flow (He)

20 mL/min

Makeup flow (He)

2 mL/min

Baseline output

< 30 display counts on Agilent

ChemStation (< 750 V)

Oven
Initial temp

40 C

Initial time

0 min

Rate 1

25 C/min

Final temp

90 C

Final time

0 min

Rate 2

15 C/min

Final temp

170 C

Final time

2 min

ALS settings (if installed)

246

Sample washes

Sample pumps

Injection volume

1 L

Syringe size

10 L

PreInj Solvent A Washes

PreInj Solvent B Washes

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Column and sample

PostInj Solvent A Washes

PostInj Solvent B Washes

Viscosity delay

Plunger speed

Fast (Slow for cool on-column

inlet)

PreInjection dwell

PostInjection dwell

Manual injection
Injection volume

1 L

Data system
Path

Setting

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit Parameters>Options

Keep instrument keyboard locked

after method is loaded? = No

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit Parameters>Signals

Assign Signal 1 to the detector

Choose Save Data All
Data Rate = 5 Hz

6 Display the signal output. A stable output at any value

between 12.5 and 750 V (inclusive) is acceptable.

If the baseline output is < 0.5 display units (< 12.5 V),
verify that the detector filament is on. If the offset is still
<0.5 display units (< 12.5 V), your detector requires
service.
If baseline output is > 30 display units (> 750 V), there
may be chemical contamination contributing to the signal.
Bakeout the TCD. If repeated cleanings do not give an
acceptable signal, check gas purity. Use higher purity
gases and/or install traps.
7 If using a data system, prepare the system to perform one

run using the loaded checkout method. Make sure that the
data system will output a chromatogram.
8 Start the run.

If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the

run using the data system or press [Start] on the GC.

7890 Series GC IPB

247

Performance Verification

If performing a manual injection (with or without a data

system):
a Press [Prep Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless injection.
b When the GC becomes ready, inject 1 L of the checkout

sample and press [Start] on the GC.

9 The following chromatogram shows typical results for a new

detector with new consumable parts installed.

248

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Typical values
The following are typical values for the detector results. The
results for a detector depend on site preparation related
factors. These are not pass/fail criteria.
Agilent ChemStation

Sensitivity

C14, C15, C16 area

counts

SS/MMI/COC/PTV

PP

73

65

Discrimination C14/C16 area ratio 1.00 0.10

1.00 0.10

Agilent ChemStationASTM noise

Measured with GC isothermal at 100 C
10 minute blank run, noise range(s) > 1 minute
Performance + noise report
TCD ASTM noise 0.05733 display units (25 V/display unit)
Detector signal set to 5 Hertz

3396B or 3396C or 3397A integrator sample conditions with

analog input (GC Analog output, Range 0)
>>Set DATE and TIME<<
Zero

10

Pk wd

0.04

Att^2

Thresh

Cht sp

Stop time

8.75

Ar Rej

1000

Sensitivity

C14, C15, C16 area

counts

SS/MMI/COC/PTV

PP

585,000

515,000

Discrimination C14/C16 area ratio 1.000.10

7890 Series GC IPB

1.000.10

249

Performance Verification

To Check uECD Performance

1 Gather the following:

Evaluation column, HP-5 30 m x 0.32 mm x 0.25 m

(19091J-413)
uECD performance evaluation (checkout) sample
(18713-60040, Japan: 5183-0379)
4-mL solvent and waste bottles or equivalent for
autoinjector
Chromatographic-grade isooctane
2-mL sample vials or equivalent for sample
Inlet and injector hardware
2 Verify the following:

Clean fused silica indented mixing liner installed. If not,

install it.
Chromatographic-grade gases plumbed and configured:
helium.
Empty waste vials loaded in sample turret.
4-mL vial with diffusion cap filled with hexane and
inserted in Solvent A injector position.
3 Replace consumable parts (liner, septum, traps, syringe, and

so forth) as needed for the checkout.

4 Install the evaluation column. (See the procedure for the SS,

MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in the Maintenance manual.)

Bake out the evaluation column for at least 30 minutes at
180 C. (See the procedure for the SS, MMI, PP, COC, or
PTV in the Maintenance manual.)
Be sure to configure the column.
5 Display the signal output to determine baseline output. A

stable baseline output at any value between 0.5 and 1000 Hz

(ChemStation display units) (inclusive) is acceptable.
If the baseline output is < 0.5 Hz, verify that the
electrometer is on. If the offset is still < 0.5 Hz, your
detector requires service.
If the baseline output is > 1000 Hz, there may be chemical
contamination contributing to the signal. Bakeout the
uECD. If repeated cleanings do not give an acceptable
signal, check gas purity. Use higher purity gases and/or
install traps.
6 Create or load a method with the parameter values listed in

the table below.

250

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Table 18 uECD checkout conditions

Column and sample
Type

HP-5, 30 m 0.32 mm 0.25 m

(19091J-413)

Sample

ECD checkout (18713-60040 or

Japan: 5183-0379)

Column mode

Constant flow

Column pressure

6.5 mL/min (helium)

Split/splitless inlet
Temperature

200 C

Mode

Splitless

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Purge time

0.75 min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Multimode inlet
Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

80 C

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

250 C

Final time 1

5 min

Purge time

1.0 min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Purged packed inlet

Temperature

200 C

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Cool on-column inlet

Temperature

Oven track

Septum purge

15 mL/min

PTV inlet

7890 Series GC IPB

Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

80 C

251

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

350 C

Final time 1

2 min

Rate 2

100 C/min

Final temp 2

250 C

Final time 2

0 min

Purge time

0.75 min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Detector
Temperature

300 C

Makeup flow (N2)

30 mL/min (constant + makeup)

Baseline output

Should be < 1000 display counts in

Agilent ChemStation (< 1000 Hz)

Oven
Initial temp

80 C

Initial time

0 min

Rate 1

15 C/min

Final temp

180 C

Final time

10 min

ALS settings (if installed)

252

Sample washes

Sample pumps

Injection volume

1 L

Syringe size

10 L

PreInj Solvent A Washes

PreInj Solvent B Washes

PostInj Solvent A Washes

PostInj Solvent B Washes

Viscosity delay

Plunger speed

Fast (Slow for cool on-column inlet)

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Column and sample

PreInjection dwell

PostInjection dwell

Manual injection
Injection volume

1 L

Data system
Path

Setting

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Options

Keep instrument keyboard locked

after method is loaded? = No

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Signals

Assign Signal 1 to the detector

Choose Save Data All
Data Rate = 5 Hz

7 If using a data system, prepare the system to perform one

run using the loaded checkout method. Make sure that the
data system will output a chromatogram.
8 Start the run.

If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the

run using the data system or press [Start] on the GC.
If performing a manual injection (with or without a data
system):
a Press [Prep Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless injection.
b When the GC becomes ready, inject 1 L of the checkout

sample and press [Start] on the GC.

9 The following chromatogram shows typical results for a new

detector with new consumable parts installed.

7890 Series GC IPB

253

254

Performance Verification

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Typical values
The following are typical values for the detector results. The
results for a detector depend on site preparation related
factors. These are not pass/fail criteria.
Agilent ChemStation Noise ([N3])
Measured by ChemStation, ASTM [N3]

< 3 Hz

Signal
Area, Lindane peak

7500 [N3]

3396B or 3396C or 3397A integrator sample conditions with

analog input [GC Analog output, Range 0]
>>Set DATE and TIME<<
GC Analog output
Noise ([N1])
Measured at [GC Range 0],
[3396 Attn. 3, Chart speed 1, zero 50]

<37 mm for 1 min. measurement

Signal
GC Range 6
3396
Zero

10

Pk wd

0.04

Att 2^

Thresh

Cht sp

Stop time

11.0

Ar Rej

100000

Area, Lindane peak

7890 Series GC IPB

47,950 [N1]

255

Performance Verification

To Check FPD Performance (Sample 5188-5953)

If sample FPD checkout sample 5188-5953 is available, use it to
test FPD performance.
To check FPD performance, first check the phosphorus
performance, then the sulfur performance.

Preparation
1 Gather the following:

Evaluation column, HP-5 30 m x 0.32 mm x 0.25 m

(19091J-413)
FPD performance evaluation (checkout) sample
(5188-5953)
Phosphorus filter
Sulfur filter and filter spacer
4-mL solvent and waste bottles or equivalent for
autoinjector
2-mL sample vials or equivalent for sample
Chromatographic-grade isooctane for syringe wash
solvent
Inlet and injector hardware
2 Verify the following:

Capillary column adapter installed. If not, install it.

Chromatographic-grade gases plumbed and configured:
helium as carrier gas, nitrogen, hydrogen, and air.
Empty waste vials loaded in sample turret.
4-mL vial with diffusion cap filled with isooctane and
inserted in Solvent A injector position.
3 Verify that the Lit Offset is set appropriately. Typically, it

should be about 2.0 pA for the checkout method.

4 Replace consumable parts (liner, septum, traps, syringe, and

so forth) as needed for the checkout.

5 Install the evaluation column. (See the procedure for the SS,

MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in the Maintenance manual.)

Set the oven, inlet, and detector to 250 C and bake out for
at 15 min. (See the procedure for the SS, MMI, PP, COC, or
PTV in the Maintenance manual.)
Be sure to configure the column.

256

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Phosphorus performance
1 If it is not already installed, install the phosphorus filter.
2 Create or load a method with the parameter values listed in

the table below.

Table 19 FPD Checkout Conditions (P)
Column and sample
Type

HP-5, 30 m x 0.32 mm x 0.25 m

(19091J-413)

Sample

FPD checkout (5188-5953)

Column mode

Constant pressure

Column pressure

25 psi

Split/splitless inlet
Temperature

200 C Split/splitless

Mode

Splitless

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Purge time

0.75 min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Multimode
Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

75 C

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

250 C

Final time 1

5.0 min

Purge time

1.0 min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Purged packed inlet

Temperature

200 C

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Cool on-column inlet

Temperature

7890 Series GC IPB

Oven track (cool on-column)

257

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Septum purge

15 mL/min

PTV inlet
Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

75 C

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

350 C

Final time 1

2 min

Rate 2

100 C/min

Final temp 2

250 C

Final time 2

0 min

Purge time

0.75 min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Detector
Temperature

200 C (On)

Hydrogen flow

75 mL/min (On)

Air (Oxidizer) flow

100 mL/min (On)

Mode

Constant makeup flow OFF

Makeup flow

60 mL/min (On)

Makeup gas type

Nitrogen

Flame

On

Lit offset

Typically 2 pA

Electrometer

On

Oven

258

Initial temp

70 C

Initial time

0 min

Rate 1

25 C/min

Final temp 1

150 C

Final time 1

0 min

Rate 2

5 C/min

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Final temp 2

190 C

Final time 2

4 min

ALS settings (if installed)

Sample washes

Sample pumps

Injection volume

1 L

Syringe size

10 L

PreInj Solvent A Washes

PreInj Solvent B Washes

PostInj Solvent A Washes

PostInj Solvent B Washes

Viscosity delay

Plunger speed

Fast (Slow for cool on-column inlet)

PreInjection dwell

PostInjection dwell

Manual injection
Injection volume

1 L

Path

Setting

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Options

Keep instrument keyboard locked

after method is loaded? = No

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Signals

Assign Signal 1 to the detector

Choose Save Data All
Data Rate = 5 Hz

3 Ignite the FPD flame, if not lit.

7890 Series GC IPB

259

Performance Verification

4 Display the signal output and monitor. This output typically

runs between 40 and 55 but can be as high as 70. Wait for the
output to level off. This takes approximately 1 hour.
If the baseline output is too high:
Check column installation. If installed high, the stationery
phase burns out and increases measured output.
Check for leaks.
Bake out the detector and column at 250 C.
Wrong flows set for installed filter.
If the baseline output is zero, verify the electrometer is on
and the flame is lit.
5 If using a data system, prepare the system to perform one

run using the loaded checkout method. Make sure that the
data system will output a chromatogram.
6 Start the run.

If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the

run using the data system or press [Start] on the GC.
If performing a manual injection (with or without a data
system):
a Press [ Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless injection.
b When the GC Prepbecomes ready, inject 1 L of the

checkout sample and press [Start] on the GC.

7 The following chromatogram shows typical results for a new

detector with new consumable parts installed.

260

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Typical values
The following are typical values for the detector results. The
results for a detector depend on site preparation related
factors. These are not pass/fail criteria.

7890 Series GC IPB

FPD P filter

Typical range after 24

hours

Limits at installation

MDL (pg/sec)

0.06 to 0.08

0.10

Peak area

19000 to 32000

19000

Signal height

5000 to 11000

--

Noise

1.6 to 3.0

Half-width (min)

0.05 to 0.07

--

Output

34 to 80

80

261

Performance Verification

Sulfur performance
1 Install the sulfur filter and filter spacer.
2 Make the following method parameter changes.

Sulfur method parameters (S)

Parameter

Value ( mL/min)

H2 flow

50

Air flow

60

3 Display the signal output and monitor. This output typically

runs between 50 and 60 but can be as high as 70. Wait for the
output to level off. This takes approximately 1 hour.
If the baseline output is too high:
Check column installation. If installed high, the stationery
phase burns out and increases measured output.
Check for leaks.
Bake out the detector and column at 250 C.
Wrong flows set for installed filter.
If the baseline output is zero, verify the electrometer is on
and the flame is lit.
4 If using a data system, prepare the system to perform one

run using the loaded checkout method. Make sure that the
data system will output a chromatogram.
5 Start the run.

If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the

run using the data system or press [Start] on the GC.
If performing a manual injection (with or without a data
system):
a Press [Prep Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless injection.
b When the GC becomes ready, inject 1 L of the checkout

sample and press [Start] on the GC.

6 The following chromatogram shows typical results for a new

detector with new consumable parts installed.

262

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Typical values
The following are typical values for the detector results. The
results for a detector depend on site preparation related
factors. These are not pass/fail criteria.

7890 Series GC IPB

FPD S filter

Typical range after 24

hours

Limits at installation

MDL (pg/sec)

3.8 to 5

Peak area

8000 to 19000

8000

Signal height

2500 to 6000

--

Noise

2 to 4

Half-width (min)

0.06 to 0.08

--

Output

34 to 65

70

263

Performance Verification

To Check FPD Performance (Sample 5188-5245, Japan)

To verify FPD performance, first check the phosphorus
performance, then the sulfur performance.

Preparation
1 Gather the following:

Evaluation column, DB5 15 m x 0.32 mm x 1.0 m

(123-5513)
FPD performance evaluation (checkout) sample
(5188-5245)
Phosphorus filter
Sulfur filter and filter spacer
4-mL solvent and waste bottles or equivalent for
autoinjector
2-mL sample vials or equivalent for sample.
Chromatographic-grade isooctane for syringe wash
solvent.
Inlet and injector hardware
2 Verify the following:

Capillary column adapter installed. If not, install it.

Chromatographic-grade gases plumbed and configured:
helium as carrier gas, nitrogen, hydrogen, and air.
Empty waste vials loaded in sample turret.
4-mL vial with diffusion cap filled with isooctane and
inserted in Solvent A injector position.
3 Verify the lit offset is set appropriately. Typically, it should

be about 2.0 pA for the checkout method.

4 Replace consumable parts (liner, septum, traps, syringe, and

so forth) as needed for the checkout.

5 Install the evaluation column. (See the procedure for the SS,

MMI, PP, COC, or PTV in the Maintenance manual.)

Set the oven, inlet, and detector to 250 C and bake out for
at 15 min. (See the procedure for the SS, MMI, PP, COC, or
PTV in the Maintenance manual.)
Configure the column.

264

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Phosphorus performance
1 If it is not already installed, install the phosphorus filter.
2 Create or load a method with these parameter values.

Table 20 FPD Phosphorus Checkout Conditions

Column and sample
Type

DB-5MS, 15 m x 0.320 m x 1.0 m

(123-5513)

Sample

FPD checkout (5188-5245)

Column mode

Constant flow

Column pressure

7.5 mL/min

Split/splitless inlet
Temperature

250 C Split/splitless

Mode

Splitless

Total purge flow

69.5 mL/min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Purge time

0.75 min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Multimode
Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

75 C

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

250 C

Final time 1

5.0 min

Purge time

1.0 min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Purged packed inlet

7890 Series GC IPB

Temperature

250 C

Septum purge

3 mL/min

265

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Cool on-column inlet
Temperature

Oven track

Septum purge

15 mL/min

PTV inlet
Mode

Splitless

Inlet temperature

80 C

Initial time

0.1 min

Rate 1

720 C/min

Final temp 1

350 C

Final time 1

2 min

Rate 2

100 C/min

Final temp 2

250 C

Final time 2

0 min

Purge time

0.75 min

Purge flow

60 mL/min

Septum purge

3 mL/min

Detector
Temperature

200 C (On)

Hydrogen flow

75.0 mL/min (On)

Air (oxidizer) flow

100.0 mL/min (On)

Mode

Constant makeup flow Off

Makeup flow

60.0 mL/min (On)

Makeup gas type

Nitrogen

Flame

On

Lit offset

Typically 2 pA

Electrometer

On

Oven

266

Initial temp

70 C

Initial time

0 min

Rate 1

10 C/min

Final temp

105 C

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Column and sample

Final time

0 min

Rate 2

20 C/min

Final temp 2

190 C

Final time 2

7.25 min for sulfur

12.25 min for phosphorus

ALS settings (if installed)

Sample washes

Sample pumps

Injection volume

1 L

Syringe size

10 L

PreInj Solvent A Washes

PreInj Solvent B Washes

PostInj Solvent A Washes

PostInj Solvent B Washes

Viscosity delay

Plunger speed

Fast (Slow for cool on-column

inlet)

PreInjection dwell

PostInjection dwell

Manual injection
Injection volume

1 L

Data System

Path

Setting

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Options

Keep instrument keyboard locked

after method is loaded? = No

Method and Run Control View:

Instrument>Edit
Parameters>Signals

Assign Signal 1 to the detector

Choose Save Data All
Data Rate = 5 Hz

3 Ignite the FPD flame, if not lit.

7890 Series GC IPB

267

Performance Verification

4 Display the signal output and monitor. This output typically

runs between 40 and 55 but can be as high as 70. Wait for the
output to level off. This takes approximately 1 hour.
If the baseline output is too high:
Check column installation. If installed high, the stationery
phase burns out and increases measured output.
Check for leaks.
Bake out the detector and column at 250 C.
Wrong flows set for installed filter.
If the baseline output is zero, verify the electrometer is on
and the flame is lit.
5 If using a data system, prepare the system to perform one

run using the loaded checkout method. Make sure that the
data system will output a chromatogram.
If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the
run using the data system or press [Start] on the GC.
If performing a manual injection (with or without a data
system):
a Press [Prep Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless

injection.
b When the GC becomes ready, inject 1 L of the checkout

sample and press [Start] on the GC.

6 Start the run.

If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the

run using the data system or press [Start] on the GC.
If performing a manual injection (with or without a data
system):
a Press [Prep Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless injection.
b When the GC becomes ready, inject 1 L of the checkout

sample and press [Start] on the GC.

7 The following chromatogram shows typical results for a new

detector with new consumable parts installed.

268

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Typical values
The following are typical values for the detector results. The
results for a detector depend on site preparation related
factors. These are not pass/fail criteria.

7890 Series GC IPB

FPD P filter

Typical range after 24

hours

Limits at installation

MDL (pg/sec)

0.06 to 0.08

0.10

Peak area

19000 to 32000

19000

Signal height

5000 to 11000

--

Noise

1.6 to 3.0

Half-width (min)

0.05 to 0.07

--

Output

34 to 80

80

269

Performance Verification

Sulfur performance
1 Install the sulfur filter.
2 Make the following method parameter changes.

Sulfur method parameters

Parameter

Value ( mL/min)

H2 flow

50

Air flow

60

3 Ignite the FPD flame, if not lit.

4 Display the signal output and monitor. This output typically

runs between 50 and 60 but can be as high as 70. Wait for the
output to level off. This takes approximately 2 hours.
If the baseline output is too high:
Check column installation. If installed high, the stationery
phase burns out and increases measured output.
Check for leaks.
Bake out the detector and column at 250 C.
Wrong flows set for installed filter.
If the baseline output is zero, verify the electrometer is on
and the flame is lit.
5 If using a data system, prepare the data system to perform

one run using the loaded checkout method. Make sure the
data system will output a chromatogram.
6 Start the run.

If performing an injection using an autosampler, start the

run using the system or press [Start] on the GC.
If performing a manual injection (with or without a data
system):
Press [Prep Run] to prepare the inlet for splitless injection.
When the GC becomes ready, inject 1 L of the checkout
sample and press [Start] on the GC.
7 The following chromatogram shows typical results for a new

detector with new consumable parts installed.

270

7890 Series GC IPB

Performance Verification

Typical values
The following are typical values for the detector results. The
results for a detector depend on site preparation related
factors. These are not pass/fail criteria.

7890 Series GC IPB

FPD S filter

Typical range after 24

hours

Limits at installation

MDL (pg/s)

3.8 to 5

Peak area

8000 to 19000

8000

Signal height

2500 to 6000

--

Noise

2 to 4

Half-width (min)

0.06 to 0.08

--

Output

34 to 65

70

271

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

6 Configuration
Configuration overview 273
GC modules and the communications buss
To configure an MSD transfer line 283
To configure a valve box 286
Replacing a GC module 288
Removing a GC module 289
Changing the GC configuration 290
Configuration locks 291
Installing new devices 292
Configuring time

280

Agilent Technologies

272

Configuration

Configuration overview
There are 2 kinds of configuration information: hard and soft.
Hard configuration includes what hardware options are
installed on the GC: the type of inlets and detectors, where
they are located, and what auxiliary heaters are connected.
Soft configuration includes application specific information:
carrier gas type, make up gas type, inlet control modes,
column dimensions.
The GC modules that make up an instrument (i.e., EPC modules,
detector boards, and heaters) are initially configured during
manufacturing. This information is stored in the signal board
memory.
An inlet is configured as an EPC module and a heater.
A detector is configured as an EPC module, a detector signal
board, and a heater.
A pneumatic control module (PCM) is configured as an EPC
module and can be associated with a heater.
An Aux EPC module (AUX) is configured as 3 channels of
auxiliary pressure control and can be associated with a
heater.
A valve box is configured with one or two heaters.
An AUX thermal zone is configured with a heater. For
example, an MSD transfer line or a nickel-catalyst accessory.
There are many custom configuration options available. Most
are explained in G3430-90024, Firmware A.01.05 Instructions
For Channel Partner Devices.
You can configure the GC modules by pressing [Config] and
then pressing the key for the GC module, for example, [Config]
[Front Det]. Under the configuration menu, you will find these
features:
Install or remove the module.
If you wish to ignore a ready or not ready status.
The type of gas that the EPC module is controlling.
The baseline output to use for reigniting the flame.

7890 Series GC IPB

273

Configuration

Inlet example
The configuration control table for a front SSL Inlet includes 5
items.
CONFIGURE FRONT INLET
Configured:
Ignore Ready =
Makeup gas type
[ EPC1 ] = (INLET)
FINLET (OK) 68 watts

Split/Splitless
FALSE
He
(SS)
250.0

This list interprets each line of the control table.

Configured: The type of module configured as a front inlet is
an split/splitless capillary inlet.
Ignore Ready: If TRUE, the GC will ignore a Not Ready status.
If the inlet actuals do not match their setpoints, the GC will
go ready. The ignored items are displayed under Status.
This line indicates the EPC module. In this case, it is plugged
into the 4-wire connector labeled EPC1 and is an inlet EPC
module for an split/splitless inlet.
This line describes the heater and sensor. In this case, there
is a 64 watt heater cartridge associated with the front inlet
and the sensor is reading 250.0C.

274

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

Detector example
The configuration control table for a front FID detector includes
7 items.
CONFIGURE FRONT DETECTOR
Configured:
Ignore Ready =
Makeup gas type
Lit offset
[ F-DET ] = (SIGNAL)
[ EPC3] = (DET_EPC)
F-DET (OK) 64 watts

(FID)
FALSE
N2
2.0
(FID)
(FID)
300.0

This list interprets each line of the control table.

Configured: The type of module configured as a front
detector is an FID.
Ignore Ready: If TRUE, the GC will ignore a Not Ready status.
If the detector actuals do not match their setpoints, the GC
will go ready. The ignored items are displayed under Status.
Lit offset: The detector will try to reignite if the output drops
to this level.
This line indicates the signal board. In this case, it is plugged
into the 4-wire communication buss connector labelled
F-DET and is an FID signal board.
This line indicates the EPC module. In this case, it is plugged
into the 4-wire connector labeled EPC3 and is a detector EPC
module for an FID.
This line describes the heater and sensor. In this case, there
is a 64 watt heater cartridge associated with the front
detector and the sensor is reading 300.0C.

7890 Series GC IPB

275

Configuration

PCM example
The configuration control table for an pneumatic control
Module (PCM) module includes 6 items. For custom hardware,
the configuration could include a heater.
CONFIGURE PCM C
Configured:
Ignore Ready =
Gas type
Aux Gas type
Aux Mode
[ EPC6 ] = (AUX_EPC)

PCM
FALSE
N2
N2
Forward Pressure
(PCM)

This list interprets each line of the control table.

Configured: The type of module configured as a pneumatic
control module or PCM.
Ignore Ready: If TRUE, the GC will ignore a Not Ready status.
If the PCM actuals do not match their setpoints, the GC will
go ready. The ignored items are displayed under Status.
The next two lines indicate what gas type is associated with
each channel. The Gas type refers to channel one. The
options for an both channels are: Helium, Hydrogen,
Nitrogen, Argon methane 5%, and Air.
This line indicates the Aux Mode for the pressure control
channel. This can be Forward Pressure or Back Pressure
control.
This line indicates the EPC module. In this case, it is plugged
into the 4-wire connector labelled EPC6 and is an AUX EPC
module for a PCM.
There are no heaters configured in this example. However,
you can associate a PCM with a front or back inlet heater.
CONFIGURE PCM C
Install EPC6
Install EPC6
Install EPC6

276

Htr = NONE
Htr = FINLET
Htr = BINLET

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

AUX example
The configuration control table for an Aux EPC module includes
6 items. For custom hardware, the configuration could include a
heater.
CONFIGURE APC 1,2,3
Configured:
Ignore Ready =
Chan 1 Gas type
Chan 2 Gas type
Chan 3 Gas type
[ EPC6 ] = (AUX_EPC)

Aux Pressure
FALSE
N2
N2
N2
(AUX)

This list interprets each line of the control table.

Configured: The type of module configured as Aux EPC
channels 1, 2 and 3 is Aux Pressure module.
Ignore Ready: If TRUE, the GC will ignore a Not Ready status.
If the AUX actuals do not match their setpoints, the GC will
go ready. The ignored items are displayed under Status.
The next three lines indicate what gas type is associated with
each channel. The options for an AUX channel are: Helium,
Hydrogen, Nitrogen, Argon methane 5%, and Air
This line indicates the EPC module. In this case, it is plugged
into the 4-wire connector labeled EPC6 and is an AUX EPC
module labeled AUX.
There are no heaters associated with an AUX module in this
position.

7890 Series GC IPB

277

Configuration

Heater assignments
There are 4 standard connection for heaters and sensors. With a
valve bracket and harness, you add 2 more for a total of 6. The
following picture and table describe the harness labels and
typical uses.

Number

Label

Typical uses

FI

Front inlet

BI

Back inlet

FD

Front detector

BD

Back detector

A1

Valve box, 3rd detector,

Front FPD

A2

MSD transfer line, Valve

box. Back FPD

For our specials group and for our channel partners, there are
many options for configuring the heaters. These options are
based on connecting a heater and configuring it to a type of
module to enable a certain type of behavior. See the
278

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

configuration topics in Firmware Instructions for Channel

Partner Devices.
As an Inlet or detector, a small zone is isothermal.
As an Thermal Aux, a small zone can be programmed.
This table describes this flexibility available in firmware.
Controlling

Number

Heater type

Configuration Setpoints

Front inlet

Inlet

[Config][Front [Front Inlet]

Inlet]

Back inlet

Inlet Nickel
catalyst

[Config][Back [Back Inlet]

[Aux Temp]
Inlet]
[Config][Ther
mal Aux 1]

Front detector 3

Detector

[Config][Front [Front Det]

Det]

Back detector 4

Detector
Custom
heater

[Config][Back [Back Det]

[Aux Temp]
Det]
[Config][Ther
mal Aux 2]

Thermal Aux
1

3rd Detector
Front FPD

[Config][Aux [Aux Det]

[Back Det]
Det]
[Config][Back
Det]

Thermal Aux
2

MSD transfer [Config][Aux [Aux Temp]

[Back Det]
line Back FPD Temp]
[Config][Back
Det]

Valve box

5 6 5 and 6

Valve box
Valve box
Valve box

[Config][Ther [Aux Temp]

[Back Det]
mal Aux 2]
[Config][Back [Valve Box]
Det]
[Config][Valve
Box]

Notes:
1 You can only configure 6 heaters. Each heater can only be

configured to one component type.

2 Front FPD uses heaters 3 and 5.
3 Back FPD uses heaters 4 and 6.
4 FPDs can be configured for one or two heater versions.

7890 Series GC IPB

279

Configuration

GC modules and the communications buss

This GC provides a flexible architecture. Along with the
flexibility, the configuration of the GC can be more complex.
The flexible architecture is represented in this schematic.
Above each arrow is a label that represents an address on a
communications buss.

The 4-wire communications buss is the nervous system of the

GC. It connects to up to 6 EPC modules and up to 4 detector
signal boards. On each of the 10 connectors, there is a label to
help identify what can be plugged in.

280

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

The red and black wires on the buss provide power to the
module. The black wire is ground. The red wire is switched,
unregulated +24 VDC. All of these wires plug into the Analog
and Power Board. The white and colored wires provide serial
communications between the signal board and the module.

7890 Series GC IPB

281

Configuration

There are 2 extension cables for the GC modules of the 3rd

detector:
For the GC modules, there is an extension cable for both the
EPC module and the signal board; G3432-60505.
For the heater, there is an extension heater cable to connect
to the AUX 2 heater; G3432-60506.

282

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

To configure an MSD transfer line

The factory does NOT configure any MSD transfer line. Thus you
may find, on installation, that the MSD heater will not heat, that
you cannot set a temperature, and that the transfer line is not
seen by the software. The transfer line heater may be configured
as a valve box heater or other device.
These instructions explain how to go from the configuration
shipped to you which may look like this (the valve box case)

to the configuration that you need for the transfer line.

To set up the MSD transfer line requires the user to

un-configure where the aux heater has been configured.
1 Press Config Aux Temp #. Scroll to the Valve Box and press

Enter. CONFIGURE VALVE BOX will be displayed.

7890 Series GC IPB

283

Configuration

2 Press Mode/Type. This will display the Remove module

message.

3 Press Enter. This displays the following message.

4 While a power cycle is required for the change to take effect,

it does not need to be done until the MSD transfer line

configuration is complete. Press Clear to return to
CONFIGURE VALVE BOX. Return to Configure Aux Temp
and select the Thermal Aux zone corresponding to the MSD
transfer line connection.
Thermal Aux 1 if the heater cable is connected to
connector 5.
Thermal Aux 2 if the heater cable is connected to
connector 6.
5 Using Thermal Aux 1 as the example, CONFIGURE AUX

HEATER 1 is displayed after selecting Thermal Aux 1 and

pressing Enter.

284

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

6 Press Mode/Type. The following is displayed.

7 Press Enter. The Caution message appears again. Press Clear.

This displays the following.

8 Scroll to Auxiliary type and press Mode/ Type. Scroll to MSD

transfer line.

9 Press Enter to select. This shows the Caution message again.

Now power cycle the instrument.

10 Press Thermal Aux # and the appropriate number if

necessary. This shows the thermal aux that was configured.

7890 Series GC IPB

285

Configuration

To configure a valve box

The common approach is to configure the valve box heater to
Valve Box. Alternates are to use Thermal Aux 2 or Thermal Aux
1. A valve box can house one or two heaters.

MSD transfer line heater error

If you are updating a GC with an MSD transfer line heater, you
may observe a heater fault or error associated with Thermal
Aux 2.
Objective: Configure the Thermal Aux 2 heater, plugged into the
Aux 2 position, as an MSD transfer line heater. This may be
difficult because the heater may be configured as something
else. You may have to unconfigure it first.
Assumptions: The heater cable is plugged into the 5975A MSD
and into the Aux 2 position of the GC. Firmware is version
A.01.04 or higher.

Initial steps
1 Press Options. Scroll to Keyboard & Display and press Enter.
2 Turn Hard configuration lock off.
3 Press Config. Scroll to Thermal Aux 2 and press Enter.
4 You should see Configured Aux Heater on line 2 and

Auxiliary type: MSD transfer line on line 5.

5 If line 2 is correct, scroll to line 5. If the type is wrong, press

Mode/Type and select MSD transfer line. Confirm the change

by pressing Aux Temp.

6 If line 2 indicates that nothing is configured, press

Mode/Type to see if anything is available for configuration. If

nothing is, go to the next steps. If Thermal Aux 2 is available,
press Enter to select it, then power cycle the GC.

286

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

If that doesn't work

Examine the other heaters that could be configured as Thermal
Aux 2. These are Valve Box or Thermal Aux 1.
1 Press Config. Scroll to Valve Box and examine line 2.
2 If it is configured, press Mode/Type and then Enter to Remove

the module.
3 Navigate back to Thermal Aux 2 to see if you can configure it

as Aux 2.
4 Continue in this way until you find where Aux 2 is

configured and unconfigure it.

7890 Series GC IPB

287

Configuration

Replacing a GC module
When replacing an EPC module or a detector signal board, you
will have to update the configuration of the GC. This is because
the configuration information includes the unique ID# and
manufacturing date for these parts.
To configure the new GC module
1 Replace the module and power on the GC. The GC will list

the Exceptions to the configuration and indicate that these

modules are broken or missing.
2 Unlock the Configuration locks.
3 Press [Config] and select the GC module that you replaced.
4 Press [Mode/Type]. The GC displays Remove module. Press

[Enter].

5 A Caution message tells you to reboot the GC.

6 Press [Mode/Type]. The GC displays Install module. Press

[Enter].

CAUTION

Be sure that you select the correct module configuration. Incorrect

selections can cause operation problems. For example, for an FPD
select the 2 heater version.
7 A Caution message tells you to reboot the GC.
8 Press [Options]. Scroll to Communications and press [Enter].
9 Scroll to Reboot the GC. Press [Yes/On] twice.
10 Navigate to the configuration table for the GC module.
11 Verify that the configuration is correct. Modify any

additional configuration items, such as, Gas type or Lit

offset.

288

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

Removing a GC module
It is easy to unconfigure a module and make it appear to be
uninstalled without disconnecting any cables. This is useful if a
module fails and the customer still wants to use the other
modules. For example, if the back inlet fails, the customer can
unconfigure the back inlet and continue to use the front inlet
and detectors.
1 Press [Options] and select Keyboard & Display.
2 Press [Off / No] to turn the Configuration Lock off.
3 Press [Config] and the key for the GC module to remove.
4 From the line labeled Configure, press [Mode/Type].
5 Press [Enter]. The GC will display a message requesting you to

power cycle the instrument.

6 Power cycle the instrument.
7 Verify the removal by pressing the key for the GC module.

The GC should display an uninstalled message.

7890 Series GC IPB

289

Configuration

Changing the GC configuration

The GC configuration is changed when you do any of the
following:
Add or replace a detector signal board.
Add or replace an EPC module.
Replace the GC logic board.
Add or remove a tray or auto-injector.
Add or remove a heater.
Change any soft configuration items, such as, gas types,
heater types, and Lit offset.
Changing the GC configuration impacts data system methods
and methods stored in the GC.

Agilent data system methods

During the first connection and when loading any of the
methods created with the old configuration, the data system
will note the change in configuration and force you to resolve
the differences. If you do not resolve differences in both the
configuration and method parameter screens the method will
not load. Run method or run sequence will not start the run.
Use the GC Configuration Connection screen to get the new
configuration. Review and update any configuration
setpoints.
Use the Edit parameters screen to review and update any
method setpoints.

Methods stored in GC
Methods stored in the GC that do not match the new
configuration must be updated. Make the necessary additions or
modifications. Store this method over the old method.
When you load a method, the GC compares the method against
the current hardware it detects (inlet types, detector types,
PCM, heaters, valves, and so forth). A method which does not
match is not loaded. Default setpoints for this configuration are
loaded. Before adding new hardware or changing the installed
hardware type, verify that any methods stored in the GC have
been documented.

290

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

Configuration locks
When trying to change the GC configurationas by adding,
removing, or changing an Inlet moduleyou may encounter this
or a similar message:
Configuration is Locked
Go to keyboard options to unlock
To unlock the configuration
1 Press [Options].
2 Select Keyboard and Display.
3 Select Hard Configuration lock, then press [No/Off].

When you power cycle the GC, the configuration lock is

automatically set to On.
When you use the Reboot GC feature under Options |
Communications, the configuration lock is not changed.

7890 Series GC IPB

291

Configuration

Installing new devices

When a new device is added to the GC, it must be described so
that the GC knows what it is and how to use it.
This procedure, using a PCM module as an example, illustrates
the process.
1 Replace all instrument covers in the reverse order in which

they were removed.

2 Plug in the GC and turn on the power.
3 Unlock the GC keypad.
a Press [Options].
b Select Keyboard & Display.
c Select Hard Configuration lock, then press [No/Off].
4 Press [Configure].
5 Scroll to select the entry for the new PCM module (PCM A,

PCM B, or PCM C) and press [Enter].

6 On the GC keypad, press [Mode/Type].

7 The GC presents available configuration options.

If using the PCM for something other than an inlet (for

example, to provide carrier gas to a splitter), scroll to
Install EPC# Htr = None (where # indicated the slot chosen).
If using the PCM for inlet carrier gas supply, refer to the
inlet manufacturer's documentation for the correct
configuration choice.
8 Press [Enter]. A caution message appears instructing you to

reboot.
9 Reboot the GC.
a Press [Options].
b Scroll to Communications and press [Enter].
c Scroll to Reboot the GC? and press [Yes/On] twice to reboot

the GC and have the changes take effect. This also resets
the Hard Configuration lock.
10 Zero the pressure sensors.

292

7890 Series GC IPB

Configuration

11 Configure the gas types and control mode.

a Press [Config], then scroll to the correct PCM entry (PCM

A,PCM B, or PCM C).

b Scroll to Gas type and use the [Mode/Type] key to set the

gas type connected to the PCM's Channel 1.

c Scroll to Aux Gas type and use the [Mode/Type] key to set

the gas type connected to the PCM's Channel 2.

d Scroll to Aux Mode and use the [Mode/Type] key to set the

pressure control mode (forward or backward) for the

PCM's Channel 2.

7890 Series GC IPB

293

Configuration

Configuring time
To localize the date/time stamp in the Run and Event logs, use
this procedure.
1 Press [Config][Time].
2 Enter the offset from Greenwich Mean Time using 24-hour

format. Press [Enter].

3 Enter the local time (24 hour format). Press [Enter].

4 Enter the date, in ddmmyy format. Press [Enter].

294

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

7 External Cabling
Connectors on the back of the GC
Remote Start/Stop 297
External event 305
Automatic sampler for GC 306
Analog signal outputs 310
Analog signal inputs 312

296

Agilent Technologies

295

External Cabling

Connectors on the back of the GC

296

7890 Series GC IPB

External Cabling

Remote Start/Stop
These cables are used to link multiple instruments together, so
that they start and stop together.

APG Remote Control

Remote control allows easy connection between single
instruments or systems to ensure coordinated analysis with
simple coupling requirements. For example, you might have an
integrator, automatic sampler, and a gas chromatograph
connected with Remote cables.
You can synchronize a maximum of ten instruments using
Remote cables. Control of analysis is maintained by instrument
readiness - READY for next analysis, followed by START of run
and optional STOP of run triggered on the respective lines. In
addition, PREPARE may be issued to initiate pre-run activities.
All devices connected to APG remote are connected in parallel.
For example, if one device is NOT READY then all devices on the
bus are also NOT READY.

Electrical specifications
The APG signals are a modified open collector type. The signal
levels are generally TTL levels (low voltage is logic zero, high
voltage is logic one) but the open circuit voltage will be between
2.5 to 3.7 Volts. The typical voltage is 3 Volts. A voltage over 2.2
volts will be interpreted as a high logic state while a voltage
below 0.4 volts will be interpreted as a low logic state. These
levels provide some margin over the specifications of the
devices used.
The pull-up resistance, connected to the open-circuit voltage, is
in the range of about 1K ohms to 1.5K ohms. For a logic-low
state, for a single device on the bus, the minimum current you
must be able to sink is 3.3 milliamps. Since devices are
connected in parallel, when you have multiple devices this
minimum current must be multiplied by the number of devices
attached on the bus. The maximum voltage for a low-input state
= 0.4V.
The bus is passively pulled high. Leakage current out of a port
must be less than 0.2 milliamps to keep the voltage from being
pulled lower than 2.2 volts. Higher leakage current may cause
the state to be interpreted as a low.

7890 Series GC IPB

297

External Cabling

Over-voltage protection - APG Remote connections are clamped

by a zener diode to 5.6 Volts. Exceeding this voltage will damage
the circuit (main board).

Suggested Drive Circuits

A signal on the APG bus may be driven by another APG device
or by one of the following circuits.
A relay, with one side connected to ground, when closed will set
a logic-low state.
An NPN transistor, with the emitter connected to ground and
the collector connected to the signal line will set a logic-low
state if proper base current is supplied.
An open-collector logic gate will perform this same function.
A low-side drive IC will also work, but Darlington-type drivers
should be avoided as they will not meet the low-side voltage
requirement of less than 0.4V.

The Remote Connector

298

7890 Series GC IPB

External Cabling

Signal Descriptions
Prepare (Low True)Request to prepare for analysis. Receiver
is any module performing pre-analysis activities. For example,
shorting pin 2 to ground will put the GC into "Prep-Run" state.
This is useful for Splitless Mode to prepare the inlet for
injection or when using "Gas Saver Mode." This function is not
needed by Agilent autosampler systems.
Ready (High True) If The Ready Line is high (> 2.2 VDC) then
the system is ready for next analysis. Receiver is any sequence
controller.
Start (Low True)Request to start run/timetable. Receiver is
any module performing runtime-controlled activities.
Stop (Low True)Request to reach system ready state as soon
as possible (for example, stop run, abort or finish, and stop
injection). Receiver is any module performing
runtime-controlled activities. Normally this line is not
connected, if the GC oven program is used to control the
method "Stop" time.

Timing Diagram

7890 Series GC IPB

299

External Cabling

Cable pinouts, remote start/stop, general use

Part number 35900-60670

300

Connector 1 9 pin
(male)

Signal name

Connector 2 (spade
lugs)

GND

Black

Prepare (low true)

White

Start (low true)

Red

Start relay

Green

Start relay

Brown

No connection

Blue

Ready (high true input)

Orange

Stop (low true)

Yellow

No connection

Violet

7890 Series GC IPB

External Cabling

Cable pinouts, GC to 3395B/3396C Integrator

Part number 03396-61010

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector 1 9 pin
(male)

Signal name

Connector 2 15 pin
(male)

GND

9 Ground

Prepare

No connection

Start

3 Start in

Start relay

No connection

Start relay

No connection

No connection

No connection

Ready

14 Ready out

Stop

4 STOP2 In

No connection

No connection

301

External Cabling

Cable pinouts, GC to 35900C, D, E/MSD/Sampler, 2 meters

Part number G1530-60930

302

Connector 1 (male)

Signal name

Connector 2 (male)

GND

Prepare

Start

Start relay

Start relay

No connection

Ready

Stop

No connection

7890 Series GC IPB

External Cabling

Cable pinouts, GC to Headspace Sampler

Part number G1290-60575

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector 1 3-pin male

Signal name

Connector 4-pin male

GND

4, 5

Start

Ready

303

External Cabling

Cable pinouts, APG Remote Y-cable

Part number 31530-61020

304

All connectors 9 pin (male)

Signal name

GND

Prepare

Start

Start relay

Start relay

No connection

Ready

Stop

No connection

7890 Series GC IPB

External Cabling

External event
Two passive relay contact closures and two 24-volt control
outputs are available for controlling external devices. Devices
connected to the passive contact closures must be connected to
their own power source.

CAUTION

The external event connector is similar to the BCD connector.

Plugging an external event cable into the BCD connector can
damage the A&P board.
Part number G1530-60590

Connector

Signal name

24 volt control output

1
24 volt output 1
2
24 volt output 2
3
Ground
4
Ground
Relay contact closures (Normally open)
5
Contact closure 1
6
Contact closure 1
7
8

Contact closure 2
Contact closure 2

7890 Series GC IPB

Maximum rating

Wire terminations

Corresponds to
valve #

150 mA
150 mA

Yellow
Black
Red
White

5
6

48V ac/dc, 250 mA

Orange
Green

7
7

48 V ac/dc, 250 mA

Brown or Violet
Blue

8
8

305

External Cabling

Automatic sampler for GC

There are three connectors, Sampler 1, Sampler 2, and Tray, for
the 7683 Autosampler system.

Cable pinouts, GC to G2613A Injector

Part no. G2613-60590

306

Connector 1 16 pin (female)

Connector 2 16 pin (female)

A1

RXD

A1

TXD

A2

CTS

A2

RTS

A3

DSR

A3

DTR

A4

NCTL Reset

A4

NCTL Reset

A5

GND

A5

GND

A6

VAC 1

A6

VAC 1

A7

GND

A7

GND

A8

VAC 2

A8

VAC 2

B1

TXD

B1

RXD

B2

RTS

B2

CTS

B3

DTR

B3

DSR

B4

GND

B4

GND

B5

GND

B5

GND

B6

VAC 1

B6

VAC 1

B7

GND

B7

GND

B8

VAC 2

B8

VAC 2

7890 Series GC IPB

External Cabling

Cable pinouts, GC to G4513A and 7650 Injector

Part no. G4514-60610

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector 1 16 pin (female)

Connector 2 16 pin (female)

A1

RXD

A1

TXD

A2

CTS

A2

RTS

A3

DSR

A3

DTR

A4

NCTL Reset

A4

NCTL Reset

A5

GND

A5

GND

A6

VAC 1

A6

VAC 1

A7

GND

A7

GND

A8

VAC 2

A8

VAC 2

B1

TXD

B1

RXD

B2

RTS

B2

CTS

B3

DTR

B3

DSR

B4

GND

B4

GND

B5

GND

B5

GND

B6

VAC 1

B6

VAC 1

B7

GND

B7

GND

B8

VAC 2

B8

VAC 2

307

External Cabling

Cable pinouts, GC to G2614A Tray

Part no. G2614-60610

308

Connector 1 16 pin (female)

Connector 2 16 pin (female)

A1

RXD

A1

TXD

A2

CTS

A2

RTS

A3

DSR

A3

DTR

A4

M Reset

A4

M Reset

A5

GND

A5

GND

A6

VAC 1

A6

VAC 1

A7

GND

A7

GND

A8

VAC 2

A8

VAC 2

B1

TXD

B1

RXD

B2

RTS

B2

CTS

B3

DTR

B3

DSR

B4

GND

B4

GND

B5

GND

B5

GND

B6

VAC 1

B6

VAC 1

B7

GND

B7

GND

B8

VAC 2

B8

VAC 2

7890 Series GC IPB

External Cabling

Cable pinouts, GC to G4514A Tray

Part no. G4514-60610

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector 1 16 pin (female)

Connector 2 16 pin (female)

A1

RXD

A1

TXD

A2

CTS

A2

RTS

A3

DSR

A3

DTR

A4

M Reset

A4

M Reset

A5

GND

A5

GND

A6

VAC 1

A6

VAC 1

A7

GND

A7

GND

A8

VAC 2

A8

VAC 2

B1

TXD

B1

RXD

B2

RTS

B2

CTS

B3

DTR

B3

DSR

B4

GND

B4

GND

B5

GND

B5

GND

B6

VAC 1

B6

VAC 1

B7

GND

B7

GND

B8

VAC 2

B8

VAC 2

309

External Cabling

Analog signal outputs

There are two channels of analog output available on the back
panel, labeled Sig 1 and Sig 2. Two cables are available one for
3395/6 series integrators and one for general use.

Analog cable: GC to 3395A/B or 3396B/C Integrators and 35900 C/D/E

Analog to Digital Interface instrument
Part number G1530-60570

310

Connector 1

Signal Name

Color

Connector 2

1V

Black

Common

White

Shell

Ground

Orange

7890 Series GC IPB

External Cabling

Analog cable: general use

Part number G1530-60560

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector 1

Signal name

Connector 2 quick
disconnects

not used

Brown

0 to 1 V, 0 to 10 V()

White

not used

Red

1 V (+)

Black

10 V (+)

Blue

Shell

Ground

Orange

311

External Cabling

Analog signal inputs

The data from external detectors, such as the
chemiluminescence detectors, can be imported into the GC
using the appropriate signal input cable and the analog input
board.

General purpose AIB cable

G1530-60560 Signal cable, general purpose, 6 pins

Connector 1

Signal name

Connector 2 quick
disconnects

not used

Brown

0 to 1 V, 0 to 10 V()

White

not used

Red

1 V (+)

Black

10 V (+)

Blue

Shell

Ground

Orange

XCD Chemiluminescence detector AIB cable

G6600-60800 Recorder Cable

312

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

8 Internal Cabling
Internal cabling overview 314
MSD transfer line heater cable 315
Third detector heated zone cable 316
Communication harness 317
Motor Harness & AC Control Assembly 320
Keyboard and display connection board (original style only)
AC power inlet assemblies 325
Inlet/Detector harness 326
Auxiliary zone/Valve box harness 328
Third detector EPC communication cable 330
Keyboard/Display harness 331
Keyboard interconnect board 332
Heated zone extension cable 333
Ignitor cable, FID 334
Ignitor cable, FPD 335
RS-232 cable, ALS controller 336
PTV thermocouple cable 337
NPD power cable 339

324

This section covers wiring harnesses in the gas chromatograph.

The following wiring harnesses are described:
Communication harness
Motor harness and AC control assembly
Third detector EPC communication cable
Inlet/Detector harness
Aux zone / valve box cable
Third detector heated zone cable
Keyboard/Display harness
Interconnect board, keyboard
Ignitor cable, FID
Ignitor cable, FPD
RS-232 cable, ALS controller
PTV thermocouple cable
NPD power cable
MSD transfer line heater cable

Agilent Technologies

313

Internal Cabling

Internal cabling overview

The various modules that make up the GC are powered and
interconnected by a set of cables and wiring harnesses. These
modules include inlets, detectors, temperature controllers,
printed circuit boards, and power supplies.

314

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

MSD transfer line heater cable

Part number G1530-60790
This cable provides heater power and temperature sensing for
an MSD transfer line heater.

7890 Series GC IPB

315

Internal Cabling

Third detector heated zone cable

Part number G3432-60506
This is a 4-conductor cable that provides heater power and
sensor connections for a third detector mounted on the left side
of the GC.

Table 21 Connection table

316

TD1 connector
pin

Wire color

Twisted pair?

TD2 connector
pin

Orange

Yes

Black

Grey

Green

3
Yes

2
4

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

Communication harness
Part number G3430-60513
This harness provides 24 VDC from the Analog and Power board
to all EPC modules. It also carries communications between the
EPC modules and the signal board.The harness connector
labeled "power" connects to P1 on the Analog and Power board.
The harness connector labeled "Comm Bus" connects to P7 on
the logic board.

7890 Series GC IPB

317

Internal Cabling

Power connection table

Black wires, that are not part of twisted pairs, are GROUND for
pin 2 of the associated EPC.
Red wires, that are not part of twisted pairs, supply + 24 VDC to
pin 1 of the associated EPC module.

318

Power connector
pin

Wire color

Signal

EPC (pin)

Red

+ 24 VDC

EPC 1 (1)

Red

+ 24 VDC

EPC 2 (1)

Red

+ 24 VDC

EPC 3 (1)

Red

+ 24 VDC

EPC 4 (1)

Red

+ 24 VDC

EPC 5 (1)

Red

+ 24 VDC

EPC 6 (1)

Red

+ 24 VDC

AUX DET 2 (1)

Red

+ 24 VDC

AUX DET 1 (1)

Red

+ 24 VDC

B DET (1)

10

Red

+ 24 VDC

F DET (1)

11

Black

GROUND

EPC 1 (2)

12

Black

GROUND

EPC 2 (2)

13

Black

GROUND

EPC 3 (2)

14

Black

GROUND

EPC 4 (2)

15

Black

GROUND

EPC 5 (2)

16

Black

GROUND

EPC 6 (2)

17

Black

GROUND

AUX DET 2 (2)

18

Black

GROUND

AUX DET 1 (2)

19

Black

GROUND

B DET (2)

20

Black

GROUND

F DET (2)

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

Data communication table

Data are transmitted to and from the EPC modules on twisted
pairs of wires.

7890 Series GC IPB

Comm Bus
connector pin

Wire color

White

Black

White

Brown

White

Red

White

Orange

White

10

Yellow

11

White

12

Green

13

White

14

Blue

15

White

16

Violet

17

White

18

Grey

19

White

20

White/Black

Twisted pair?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

EPC (pin)
EPC 1 (3)
EPC 1 (4)
EPC 2 (3)
EPC 2 (4)
EPC 3 (3)
EPC 3 (4)
EPC 4 (3)
EPC 4 (4)
EPC 5 (3)
EPC 5 (4)
EPC 6 (3)
EPC 6 (4)
AUX DET 2 (3)
AUX DET 2 (4)
AUX DET 1 (3)
AUX DET 1 (4)
B DET (3)
B DET (4)
F DET (3)
F DET (4)

319

Internal Cabling

Motor Harness & AC Control Assembly

Part number G3430-60512
This harness provides 24 VDC power from the Analog and
Power board at P18 for the following functions:
Flapper motor (6 pin, 2 x 3 connector)
Inlet fan motor (3 pin)
Oven sensor (2 pin, shortest)
Pneumatics fan motor (2 pin)
Cryogenic cooling valve for the oven (5 pin)
Shut-off solenoid on the AC board (5 pin, 3 used)

320

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

Table 22 Connection table

7890 Series GC IPB

C1 connector pin

Wire color

Destination

Black

Flapper motor 2

White/Nlue

Flapper motor 4

Red

Flapper motor 6

Orange

Inlet fan 2

White/Green

Inlet fan 3

Blue

Pneumatics fan 2

Green

Oven cryovalve 3

Brown

Oven cryovalve 4

White

AC control 3

10

no connection

11

Violet

Oven sensor 2

12

White

Flapper motor 1

13

White/Black

Flapper motor 3

14

Blue

Flapper motor 5

15

Grey

Oven cryovalve 5

16

Yellow

Inlet fan 1

17

Brown

Pneumatics fan 1

18

Violet

Oven cryovalve 2

19

White/Red

Oven cryovalve 5

20

Black

AC control 2

21

Red

AC control 1

22

Black

Oven sensor 1

321

Internal Cabling

Keyboard and display connection board (original style only)

This board combines the oven door sensor (P2) with the
keyboard and display ribbon cable (P1) and connects them to
the keyboard and display harness (P3).

P1 pins are connected to the corresponding pins on P3 (P2-1 to

P3-1, etc.).
P2 pins are connected to P3 pins 33 and 34.

322

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

AC power inlet assemblies

These assemblies provide the connection between the external
power cord and the internal AC power board.
C20 assembly (for C19 plug)
Part number G1530-61550

C14 assembly (for C13 plug)

Part number G1530-61560

7890 Series GC IPB

323

Internal Cabling

Keyboard and display connection board (original style only)

This board combines the oven door sensor (P2) with the
keyboard and display ribbon cable (P1) and connects them to
the keyboard and display harness (P3).

P1 pins are connected to the corresponding pins on P3 (P2-1 to

P3-1, etc.).
P2 pins are connected to P3 pins 33 and 34.

324

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

AC power inlet assemblies

These assemblies provide the connection between the external
power cord and the internal AC power board.
C20 assembly (for C19 plug)
Part number G1530-61550

C14 assembly (for C13 plug)

Part number G1530-61560

7890 Series GC IPB

325

Internal Cabling

Inlet/Detector harness
Part number G3430-60535
This harness connects the inlet and detector EPCs to the logic
board at P7.

The FI and BI connectors are for inlets; FD and BD are for

detectors. FV and BV are two-conductor connectors mounted on
the top left edge of the GC near the inlets. They supply 24 VDC
to various accessories.
Table 23 Connection table

326

S1 pin

Wire color

Signal name

Destination
(pin)

Black

ADC-GND

F1 (3)

Black

ADC-GND

BI (3)

Black

ADC-GND

FD (3)

Black

ADC-GND

BD (3)

Green

C GROUND

FI (4)

Green

C GROUND

BI (4)

Green

C GROUND

FD (4)

Green

C GROUND

BD (4)

Yellow

+ 24 V

FV (1)

10

Yellow

+ 24 V

BV (1)

11

Violet

INJA-SENSE

FI (2)

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

7890 Series GC IPB

S1 pin

Wire color

Signal name

Destination
(pin)

12

Grey

INJB-SENSE

BI (2)

13

Violet

DETA-SENSE

FD (2)

14

Grey

DETB-SENSE

BD (2)

15

Red

INJ-FRONT

FI (1)

16

Orange

INJ-BACK

BI (1)

17

Red

DET-FRONT

FD (1)

18

Orange

DET-BACK

BD (1)

19

Blue

ICRYOSPLT-FRONT

FV (2)

20

White

ICRYOSPLT-BACK

BV (2)

327

Internal Cabling

Auxiliary zone/Valve box harness

Part number G1530-60660
The Auxiliary Zone/Valve Box harness runs from connector P22
on the A&P board to the valve driver bracket screwed on to the
right side of the GC above the A&P board. It powers the valve
actuator drivers and two auxiliary heater/sensors.
The A1 and A2 connectors have a tab which helps ID which wire
is the heater, sense, or ground.

328

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

Table 24 Connection table

Wire color

Pin # on S1

Signal name

Destination (and
Pin #)

Violet

Aux 1 Sense

A1 (2)

Aux 2 Sense

A2 (2)

Heater GND

A1 (4)

Heater GND

A2 (4)

+24 Volts

V1 (1)

+24 Volts

V2 (1)

+24 Volts

V3 (1)

+24 Volts

V4 (1)

Sensor GND

A1 (3)

10

Sensor GND

A2 (3)

Red

11

Aux 1 Heater

A1 (1)

Orange

12

Aux 2 Heater

A2 (1)

Brown

13

Valve #1

V1 (2)

Blue

14

Valve #2

V2 (2)

Gray

15

Valve #3

V3 (2)

White

16

Valve #4

V4 (2)

Green

Yellow

Black

7890 Series GC IPB

329

Internal Cabling

Third detector EPC communication cable

Part number G3432-60505
This cable extends the communications harness to a third
detector mounted on the left side of the GC. It connects to the
EPC 6 connector and extends across the top of the GC to the
side mount.
When removing and replacing the third detector cable, note
carefully how it enters the side detector carrier. You may need
to loosen the screws holding the carrier to the GC body.

Figure 6

EPC AreaSide Carrier Area

Table 25 Connection table

330

Connector, EPC
area (pin)

Wire color

Aux Det 1 (1)

Red

Aux Det 1 (2)

Black

Aux Det 1 (3)

White

Aux Det 1 (4)

Blue

EPC 5 (1)

Red

EPC 5 (2)

Black

EPC 5 (3)

White

EPC 5 (4)

Yellow

Twisted pair?

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Connector, side
carrier area (pin)
Aux Det 1 (1)
Aux Det 1 (2)
Aux Det 1 (3)
Aux Det 1 (4)
Third Det EPC (1)
Third Det EPC (2)
Third Det EPC (3)
Third Det EPC (4)

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

Keyboard/Display harness
Part number G3430-60514
This harness connects the keyboard and display to the logic
board at P8.

7890 Series GC IPB

331

Internal Cabling

Keyboard interconnect board

Part number G3430-60003
This board, mounted behind the keyboard/display module,
connects the keyboard to the keyboard/display harness.

Flex circuit from keypad attaches to P1.

Oven door sensor attaches to P2.
Ribbon cable from logic board attaches to P3.

332

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

Heated zone extension cable

Part number G1530-60790

Table 26 Connection table

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector C1 pin

Wire color

Connector C2 pin

Orange

Violet

Black

Green

333

Internal Cabling

Ignitor cable, FID

Part number G3431-60680
The ignitor cable connects the glow plug ignitor to its power
source.

334

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

Ignitor cable, FPD

Part number G3435-60600
This cable connects the glow plug ignitor to its power source.

7890 Series GC IPB

335

Internal Cabling

RS-232 cable, ALS controller

Part number G2612-60510
The ALS controller is driven by the analog and power board.
This cable makes the connection at J8.

336

J8 pin

Signal

+5 V

no connection

+5 V

DSRA

Ground

+5 V

Ground

RSTA

Ground

10

Ground

11

Ground

12

Ground

13

nStart (ALS Start paralleled with APG

Start to FPGA as nAPG_START)

14

Spare.VDSP

15

RxDA

16

Spare.VDSN

17

TxDA

18

DTRA

19

CTSA

20

RTSA

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

PTV thermocouple cable

Part number G2617-60505
The Thermocouple Cable connects the PTV thermocouple board
to the PTV inlet heater/sensor cable, and to the valve and power
connectors on the inlet/detector wiring harness.

7890 Series GC IPB

337

Internal Cabling

Table 27 Connection tables

338

PCB pin

Wire color

Signal

Destination (pin)

Blue

ICRYO_SPLT_FRO FV (2)
NT

Violet

INJA_SENSE

FI (2)

No connection

Yellow

+ 24 VDC

FV (1)

Black

ACC-GND

FI (3)

No connection

HTR pin

Wire color

Destination (pin)

Yellow

FI (1)

No connection

Blue

FI (4)

7890 Series GC IPB

Internal Cabling

NPD power cable

Part number G3434-60600
This cable provides power to the heated bead in the NPD.

Table 28 Connection table

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector A pin

Wire color

Connector B pin

Braided shield

Shell

Blue

Female

Clear

Male

339

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

9 Mainframe
Mainframe overview 341
Covers and Fans 342
Replacing the oven bezel 348
Replacing the oven door 349
Replacing the oven door button 350
Replacing the keypad assembly and display board 351
Oven temperature control 362
Oven temperature troubleshooting 363
Testing resistance of the heater coil 365
Cryo valve installation/replacement 366
Replacing the oven sensor 371
Replacing the oven door sensor 372
Replacing the oven shroud, oven fan, and oven fan motor 375
Replacing the oven flapper assembly 381
Replacing the flapper or flapper motor 383
Replacing Components Inside the Electronics Panel 385
Replacing Components Inside the Lower Rear Metal Cover 400

Agilent Technologies

340

Mainframe

Mainframe overview
The GC mainframe consists of the chassis (baseplate) plus the
following:
A set of metal and plastic covers
The oven, oven door, and related parts
Electronic components inside the right side cover. These are
the "mind" of the GC.
Power handling components inside the lower back cover
Wiring cables and harnesses
Inlets, detectors, valves, and other selected components are
mounted on or in the mainframe.

7890 Series GC IPB

341

Mainframe

Covers and Fans

Metal and plastic covers protect the GC components and guard
the user from exposure to heat and electric shock. The covers
also play a part in controlling the flow of cooling air through the
instrument. The GC should not be operated unless all covers are
in place.
Additional cooling is needed in two areas, the inlets and the
EPC pneumatic controllers. The inlet fan is located at the rear
of the inlet cover. The preumatics fan is located on the back of
the GC under the center of the pneumatics slots.

342

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Removing and replacing the covers

Detector top cover
This cover protects the detectors, valve box, and valve assembly.
To remove it, raise it to a vertical position, lift the right side,
and disengage the pin on the lower left side.

CAUTION

Do not force the cover, either when installing it or closing it. This
could break the plastic parts.

To replace the cover, make certain that the slot in the brass
bushing (lower right corner) is vertical and that the bushing is
fully seated. Installation is then the reverse of removal.

The pneumatics top cover

The large plastic cover over the pneumatics area on the top, rear
of the GC is held by a black button on each end. Press both
buttons and lift the cover off.

Replacing the pneumatics top cover buttons

1 Remove the cover from the GC.
2 Turn the cover over and remove the two screws holding the

button to be replaced.
3 Assemble the plastic button and the metal mount. Position

the assembly over the two nuts and install the screws.

The electronics top cover

1 Raise or remove the top cover.
2 This exposes a screw near the left front side of the

electronics cover. Loosen this screw.

3 Raise the cover to the vertical position.
4 To remove the cover completely after raising it to the vertical

position, Tilt it to the right to disengage the left end, then

slide it to the left and remove it.

The side covers

The left and right side covers are each held by 2 captive screws
at the bottom and a hook at the rear. Unfasten the screws, slide
the panel to the rear, and remove it.

7890 Series GC IPB

343

Mainframe

The rear covers

The upper and lower rear covers are held by several screws
each, but all are visible from behind the GC. Note that some of
the screws are in slots rather than holes; these screws do not
need to be completely removed.

The side cover on the third detector assembly

Remove 2 screws at the bottom of the panel, then lift and
remove the combined side and top panel.

344

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the inlet cooling fan

1 Cool down the oven and all heated zones to below 70 C to

avoid the creation of active sites.

2 Turn off the GC main power switch.

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the top rear cover by pressing in on the side

retaining clips and lifting off.

4 Disconnect its cable from the GC wiring harness.

5 Remove the fan from its clips.
6 In reassembly, make sure the label side of the fan faces

upwards (flow must be in the upwards direction). Also, the

cable should exit nearest its connector on the GC wiring
harness.

7890 Series GC IPB

345

Mainframe

Replacing the EPC cooling fan

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the lower rear cover on the GC.
4 The fan is located below the EPC module compartment; begin

by disconnecting the fan's cable.

346

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

5 Remove 4 screws.
6 In replacement, be careful to not overtighten the screws such

that the fan's plastic frame is cracked. Also, in replacing the

screws, it may be easiest to start with the one at the right
forward corner due to interference caused by the nearby
oven fan motor.

NOTE

7890 Series GC IPB

In reassembly, make sure fan orientation is such that air flow is directed
upwards through the EPC modules.

347

Mainframe

Replacing the oven bezel

WA R N I N G

Be careful! The oven and/or bezel may be hot enough to cause

burns. If it is hot, wear gloves to protect your hands.

The bezel consists of a plastic cover over a metal plate. It is held

by two screws that are reached through holes in the top of the
bezel.
1 Unscrew the two mounting screws.
2 Lift the bezel and metal plate off the GC.
3 When reinstalling, note that the lip on the bezel extends

forward over the top of the oven door. Be very certain that
the metal plate is between the plastic part and the top of the
GC.

348

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the oven door

WA R N I N G

Be careful! The oven and/or inlet may be hot enough to cause

burns. If the inlet is hot, wear gloves to protect your hands.
1 If an ALS is installed, remove it.
2 Remove the GC pneumatics cover and the top back panel.
3 Remove the six T-20 screws retaining the inlet cover, lift off

and remove the cover.

4 Open the oven door. This exposes the top of the shaft that

attaches the door to the GC.

5 The hinge shaft threads completely through its bracket, so

that the threads cannot engage and loosen during use. To

remove the shaft, use a flat- head screwdriver to lift the shaft
from the bottom until it contacts the threads. Hold in place
while using a T- 20 driver to loosen the shaft. Turn the T- 20
driver a few times to engage the threads on the bottom of the
shaft with the top threaded plate of the bottom door hinge.
6 While supporting the weight of the door, use pliers to pull the

door shaft up and out of the door.

7 Remove the door.
8 Installation of the new door is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

349

Mainframe

Replacing the oven door button

WA R N I N G

The oven door button mechanism is under the mainframe. To

reach it, you must either tip the GC on its side or slide it part way
off the bench so that the right front corner is accessible. Be very
certain that the GC is stable and cannot fall.
1 Move the GC so that the bottom of the mainframe near the

button is accessible.
2 Open the oven door and operate the button several times.

Note that the operating lever from the button is behind the
vertical lever that moves the latch,
3 To remove the mechanism, remove the two screws that hold

it and pull it down out of the mainframe.

4 Replacement is the reverse of these steps. Be certain that the

button lever is behind the latch lever.

350

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the keypad assembly and display board

Replacing the keypad assembly (original style)

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove three screws with -inch nut heads from the

detector electronics panel side. Two of the screws are near

the upper left and lower left corners of the front detector
signal board; the other is on the bottom of the GC in a slotted
hole.
4 Disconnect the large keypad ribbon cable from the inner

connector board.
5 Remove the T-20 screw from the bracket near the top of the

keypad assembly to release it from the GC body.

6 From the front, slide the keypad panel forward.
7 At this point there are two servicing options: replacement of

the entire keypad assembly or just the display. [See next

topic for the replacement of the display only.]

7890 Series GC IPB

351

Mainframe

8 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the display board.

9 Disconnect the large ribbon cable from the inner connector

board.
10 Disconnect the cable (at the lower left of the inner connector

board) from the oven door safety switch.

11 Remove the inner connector board from the GC.

352

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

12 Replace the entire keypad assembly with a new one.

13 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

353

Mainframe

Replacing only the display board (original style)

If changing the GC configuration, see Changing the GC
configuration for important information regarding GC
methods. Then proceed with the steps below.
1 Cool down the oven and all heated zones.
2 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
3 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
4 Perform steps 4 through 8 of the Replacing the keypad

assembly (original style) procedure.

5 Disconnect the connector cable from the display board to the

inner connection board.

6 Remove the four screws holding the display assembly to the

keypad panel.
7 Replace the display panel, making sure it is oriented as

shown in the figure, with the connector receptacle on the

right.

354

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

8 Reassemble all screws and cables in the reverse order of

disassembly.

7890 Series GC IPB

355

Mainframe

Replacing the keypad assembly (new style)

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Open the oven door to facilitate the removal of the front

keypad assembly.
4 Raise the detector top cover.
5 Remove three screws with -inch nut heads from the

detector electronics panel side. Two of the screws are near

the upper left and lower left corners of the front detector
signal board; the other is on the bottom of the GC in a slotted
hole.
6 Remove the T-20 screw from the bracket near the top of the

keypad assembly to release it from the GC body.

7 From the front, slide the keypad panel forward.
8 At this point there are two servicing options: replacement of

the entire keypad assembly or just the display. [See next

topic for the replacement of the display only.]
9 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps.

356

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing only the display board (new style)

If changing the GC configuration, see Changing the GC
configuration for important information regarding GC
methods. Then proceed with the steps below.
1 Cool down the oven and all heated zones.
2 Turn off all gas flows at their sources.
3 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
4 Perform steps 4 through 8 of the Replacing the keypad

assembly (new style) procedure.

5 Disconnect the connector cable from the display board.
6 Remove the four screws holding the display assembly to the

keypad panel.
7 Replace the display panel, making sure it is oriented as

shown in the figure, with the connector receptacle on the

right.

7890 Series GC IPB

357

Mainframe

8 Reassemble all screws and cables in the reverse order of

disassembly.

358

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the original keypad assembly with the new assembly

NOTE

When replacing the original assembly with the new assembly, the only
new parts needed are the new Keypad Assembly (G3430-60555) and the
Door Sensor Interconnect Cable (G3430-60561). All other original parts
are reusable.
1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove three screws with -inch nut heads from the

detector electronics panel side. Two of the screws are near

the upper left and lower left corners of the front detector
signal board; the other is on the bottom of the GC in a slotted
hole.
4 Disconnect the large keypad ribbon cable from the inner

connector board.
5 Remove the T-20 screw from the bracket near the top of the

keypad assembly to release it from the GC body.

6 From the front, slide the keypad panel forward.
7 Disconnect the ribbon cable from the display board.
8 Disconnect the large ribbon cable from the inner connector

board.
9 Disconnect the cable (at the lower left of the inner connector

board) from the oven door safety switch.

10 Remove the inner connector board from the GC.
11 Remove the inner connector board bracket from the GC.

7890 Series GC IPB

359

Mainframe

12 Connect the door sensor interconnect cable to the door

sensor cable (to extend the cable length).

13 If the new keyboard assembly does not include a display,

remove the display from the old keyboard assembly and

install it onto the new one.
14 Connect the small ribbon cable to the display board.
15 If using the new ribbon cable, connect the grounding nut to

the GC chassis.
16 Connect the large ribbon cable from the the main board to

the new keypad assembly ribbon cable.

17 Set the new keypad panel in place.
18 From the front, slide the keypad panel backward.
19 Install the T-20 screw in the bracket near the top of the

keypad assembly to fasten it to the GC body.

20 Install three screws with 1/4-inch nut heads on the detector

electronics panel side. Two of the screws are located near the
upper left and lower left corners of the front detector signal
board; the other is on the bottom of the GC in a slotted hole.
21 Lower the detector top cover, and close the oven door.

360

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

7890 Series GC IPB

361

Mainframe

Oven temperature control

The oven temperature is controlled by a combination of the
shroud heater, the flapper assembly, and (optionally) a
cryogenic cooling assembly.

CAUTION

362

Temperature control and safety require a tight seal between the

oven door and the oven body. DO NOT place anything (such as
thermocouple leads) between these two parts. The small gap
created by a wire allows hot air to escape, which can damage or
melt nearby parts.

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Oven temperature troubleshooting

See the 7890 GC Troubleshooting manual for more detailed
procedures and details. The table below lists summary
information for reference.

WA R N I N G

The exhaust coming from the back of the GC is very hot. Keep
hands and face away from the exhaust vent.

Oven does not heat up

1 Press [Status] to check for errors to report to Agilent.
2 Power cycle the GC.
3 Check oven flapper operation.
a Increase oven temperature by at least 20 degrees.
b Verify that the oven flaps in the back of the GC are closed.

Listen to verify that the fan is operating.

If the fan is on but the flap is open, the flap motor or the
analog & power board is not functioning properly.
If the fan is off but the flap is closed, the fan motor or the
analog & power board is not functioning properly.
If the fan is off and the flap is open, the analog & power
board is probably bad.

7890 Series GC IPB

363

Mainframe

Oven not cooling or never cools

Check oven flapper operation.
1 Decrease oven temperature by at least 20 degrees.
2 Verify that the oven flaps in the back of the GC are open.

Listen to verify that the fan is operating.

If the fan is on but the flap is closed, the flap motor or the
analog & power board is not functioning properly.
If the fan is off but the flap is open, the fan motor or the
analog & power board is not functioning properly.
If the fan is off and the flap is closed, the analog & power
board is probably bad.
If using cryo cooling:
Check for sufficient cryo coolant.
Check if operating limits have been exceeded.
Bad cryo valve
Clogged cryo cooling nozzle
Cryo cooling tank does not have proper "dip tube." See the
GC, GC/MS, and ALS Site Preparation Guide.
Bad A&P board

364

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Testing resistance of the heater coil

If you believe that your heater coil is cracked or otherwise
damaged and has caused an open circuit, you can check it by
measuring its resistance.

WA R N I N G

Before proceeding, turn off the main power switch and unplug the
power cord.

CAUTION

Make sure you are properly grounded with an ESD strap before
continuing.
1 Turn the instrument power off.
2 Disconnect the oven heater leads (P3, P4) from the AC power

board.
3 Use an ohmmeter to measure resistance at the connectors.

Acceptable resistance ranges (in ohms) are given below.

Acceptable resistances range from the nominal value for a new,
cold heater to +5% from the nominal value.

NOTE

Resistance goes up approximately 3% after heating the coil.

Nominal cold heater

resistances, ohms

Standard oven

Fast-ramp oven

120 V

9.079.52

n/a

200 V

n/a

17.7818.7

220 V

n/a

21.5122.6

230 V

33.0634.71

23.5124.7

240 V

n/a

25.6026.9

n/a = not available

7890 Series GC IPB

365

Mainframe

Cryo valve installation/replacement

A cryogenic valve allows liquid nitrogen or CO2 to be dispersed
into the double-walled plenum of the GC oven where the fan
blows the vapors into the oven itself. Use the procedures that
follow to install a new cryogenic valve or to replace an existing
cryogenic valve or nozzle.

Installing a new cryo valve

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the left side cover on the instrument and remove the

plug for the cryo valve.

If a side mount carrier is installed on the left side of the
instrument, remove its left cover by removing the two bottom
screws, sliding the panel towards the back of the instrument
and lifting it off.
4 Remove the knockout on the left side of the instrument. Use

a screwdriver to pry it out.

5 Insert the cryogenic valve probe though the insulation into

the oven plenum.

6 Screw the valve to the side of the GC oven using the two Torx

T-20 screws provided.

7 If you are installing COC cryo blast for the front and/or rear

inlet(s), connect it at this time. See Cool On-Column Inlet

for details.
8 Plumb the valve to the liquid nitrogen or carbon dioxide

source.

366

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

9 Plug the cryo valve's wiring harness into the five pin

connector to the left of the valve.

10 Route the cryo tubing through the cutout in the GC side

cover and reinstall the cover.

If a side mount carrier is installed, route the cryo tubing out
of the slot in the back of the carrier.

7890 Series GC IPB

367

Mainframe

Replacing an existing cryo valve

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the left side cover on the instrument.

If a side mount carrier is installed, remove its left cover by

removing the two bottom screws, sliding the panel towards
the back of the instrument and lifting it off.
4 Shut off the cryo fluid supply and crack the valve at the

supply to release any residual pressure.

5 Use a 9/16-inch wrench to disconnect the cryogenic fluid

supply tube at the cryo valve.

6 Disconnect the cryo valve's wiring harness from the

connector to the left of the valve.

7 Remove the two Torx T-20 screws holding the old cryo valve

and pull it straight out from the instrument.

8 To remove the valve from the bracket, disconnect any cryo

blast plumbing from the valve at the Swagelok tee. Remove

the two Torx T-20 screws on the bottom of the bracket.
9 To replace the cryogenic nozzle, proceed as follows:
a Use a 9/16-inch wrench to unscrew the old nozzle. Discard

the nozzle.
b Wrap the threads of the new nozzle with PTFE tape, being

careful not to cover the first two threads of the nozzle.

c Screw on the new nozzle and tighten firmly with a

9/16-inch wrench.
10 Insert the cryogenic valve probe though the insulation into

the oven plenum.

368

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

11 Screw the valve assembly back on to the side of the GC oven

using the two Torx T-20 screws.

12 If you are installing COC cryo blast for the front and/or rear

inlet(s), connect it at this time. See Cool On-Column Inlet

for details.
13 Plumb the valve to the liquid nitrogen or carbon dioxide

source.
14 Plug the cryo valve's wiring harness into the connector to the

left of the valve.

15 Route the cryo tubing through the cutout in the GC's side

cover and reinstall the cover.

If a side mount carrier is installed, route the cryo tubing out
of the slot in the back of the carrier.
Removing the valve from the valve bracket (N2 valve shown)

Cryo blast attachments

7890 Series GC IPB

369

370

Mainframe

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the oven sensor

The oven temperature sensor can be replaced after removing
the oven shroud.

WA R N I N G

Before proceeding, turn off the oven and let it and any heated
zones cool. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power
cord.
1 Remove the oven shroud as described in Replacing the oven

shroud assembly.
2 Loosen the two Torx T-20 screws securing the sensor

retainer to the back of the shroud.

3 Slide the old sensor out of the retainer. Thread a new sensor

through the opening in the rear of the oven.

4 Slide the new sensor under the retainer. One of the grill holes

on the front of the shroud is stamped. Make sure that the end
of the sensor is positioned behind the stamped hole before
tightening the retainer.

7890 Series GC IPB

371

Mainframe

Replacing the oven door sensor

The oven door sensor installs above the oven door button, and
connects to a cable that runs to the GC keyboard and display.

WA R N I N G

Before proceeding, turn off the oven and let it and any heated
zones cool. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power
cord.
To remove the old sensor:
1 Prepare the GC. To replace the over door sensor, you will

need to tilt the GC slightly. You may need to vent and

disconnect any MS devices or otherwise move instruments
that block access or otherwise prevent you from lifting the
right side of the GC enough to reach underneath it.
2 Remove the display and keyboard assembly. See Replacing

the keypad assembly and display board. (As part of this

step, you will disconnect the door sensor cable from the
display.)
3 Pull the oven door sensor cable back through the electronics

carrier.
4 Remove the 1/4-inch socket head screw that secures the oven

door sensor to the GC.

5 Pull the oven door sensor cable through and remove the

sensor from the GC.

372

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

To install the new sensor:

1 Feed the oven door sensor cable down through the hole

behind where the sensor mounts.

Feed cable back

into open area
behind the door
button plates.

2 With one hand, tilt the GC (raise the right side) enough to be

able to reach under it and grab the sensor cable. (Prop up if

needed.)
3 While holding the GC up, pull the cable down and through

the opening, then feed it back up and into the space behind
the oven door latch plate. Gently let the GC down.
Electronics carrier

Through hole

Reach through the

bottom of the GC
to help pull the
cable through the
opening as shown.
4 Use tweezers or similar to pull the cable up and then feed the

cable through the opening in the electronics carrier.

5 Install the oven door sensor using the 1/4-inch socket head

screw. Keep the sensor face square (flat) to the oven door.
7890 Series GC IPB

373

Mainframe

The face of the sensor should be parallel to the outer edge of

the GC frame.

Sensor

1/4-in. SHCS

Cable routed to electronics carrier

6 With one hand, tilt the GC (raise the right side) and use your

other hand to set the cable wires in the retaining clip on the
GC frame. Make sure the cable wires route as shown in the
figures. Proper routing prevents the GC frame and oven door
button from clipping the cable.

Cable wires in
retaining clip
7 Reinstall the keyboard and display assembly. Check oven

door operation.
8 Turn on the GC and verify that the door sensor functions

properly.
9 Return the system to operating conditions.

374

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the oven shroud, oven fan, and oven fan motor
1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 At the front of the GC, remove all obstructing items from

inside the oven (column(s), column hanger(s), inlet/detector

insulation cups, and so forth).

4 At the rear of the GC, disconnect the oven sensor cable at the

Analog and Power board and feed the cable back to the rear

7890 Series GC IPB

375

Mainframe

of the GC. Also disconnect the two oven heater leads at the
AC board.

5 From the oven, remove the two lower screws securing the

oven shroud and loosen the upper two. These are special
stainless steel screws: the ones removed must not be
confused with any other screws.
6 Lift the shroud over the upper screws and work it out of the

oven.

NOTE

376

Connectors for the oven heater wires and for the oven sensor must be
carefully worked through the access hole at the rear of the oven. There is
also a 'plug' of insulation which may fall from the access hole during this
process: it must be replaced in reassembly from the rear of the GC.

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

7 Inspect the oven heater and its supporting circular quartz

glass rod: they must be undamaged in any way.

NOTE

7890 Series GC IPB

Be very careful to not disturb the oven temperature sensor: it is fragile

and easily damaged. Also, its physical location is critical to proper oven
temperature control: do not alter its position in any way.

377

Mainframe

8 In replacement, insert oven heater leads first through the

access hole, followed by the oven sensor cable.

9 Before removing the oven fan, note its hub's physical location

on the fan motor shaft so as to return it to the same position

in reassembly.
10 Being careful to not deform its blades, remove the fan by

loosening the 5/32-inch Allen setscrew on its hub and then

pulling the fan from the motor shaft.

378

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

11 At the rear of the GC, disconnect the fan motor ground lead.

Then disconnect the cable to the Analog and Power board

and work the cable back to the rear of the GC.

WA R N I N G

The oven fan motor is heavy! Make sure you have a firm grip on
the motor before removing / replacing it. Always handle the
motor by the body. Do not carry the motor by the shaft.
12 Remove three 7-mm nuts with lockwashers and cone washers

to release the motor. Remove the top nut last to maintain

mechanical support for the motor. Manually support the
motor as the top nut is removed.
13 Reassembly is the reverse of these steps with the following

considerations:
Each motor mount must have both an inner and outer
cone washer
Orient the motor such that its power cable exits towards
the electronic side of the GC
Reinstall the top nut first to support weight of the motor
After motor reassembly into the GC, check that its shaft
extends perpendicularly from the back oven wall. If not
perpendicular, there may be mounting part(s) missing or
misplaced, and/or mounting nut(s) untightened.

7890 Series GC IPB

379

Mainframe

In fan replacement, make sure the fan's hub is returned to

its original location, or slightly rearward from being
exactly flush with the end of the motor shaft. Also make
sure the setscrew is tightened against the flat side of the
motor shaft.
For the oven heater/sensor shroud, if not already done,
inspect the oven heater and its supporting circular quartz
glass rod: they must be undamaged in any way
After the oven heater/sensor shroud is reinstalled,
remember to return the plug of insulation in the access
hole at the back of the oven.

380

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the oven flapper assembly

CAUTION

Components can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Be

sure to wear a grounded ESD strap while performing this procedure.
1 Remove rear GC cover.
2 Remove left side GC cover.
3 Disconnect flapper motor cable and pull it back to the motor.

4 If present, remove the PTV N2 cryo feed line cover by

removing two screws. If necessary, also remove the bracket

behind the feed line cover.

7890 Series GC IPB

381

Mainframe

5 Loosen three captured T-20 screws to remove the flapper

assembly. To support the weight of the assembly, the

top-most screw should be removed last.
6 Pull the assembly straight out.

7 In replacing the assembly, steps are the reverse of removal

steps.
Install the top-most screw first to support the weight of the
assembly

382

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the flapper or flapper motor

This disassembly procedure enables you to replace either the
flapper or flapper motor.
1 Remove the flapper assembly. See Replacing the oven

flapper assembly.
2 Remove the T-20 set screw on the coupling between motor

and flapper shafts.

3 Remove three T-10 screws securing the motor to the frame.

7890 Series GC IPB

383

Mainframe

4 Slide the motor off the flapper shaft and replace it with a

new motor.
If you are replacing the flapper, slide the flapper out of the
duct assembly.
Be careful to not lose the bushing at the upper end of the
flapper shaft.

In reassembly, do the following:

Insure the upper part of the flapper shaft is inserted into its
bushing at the top of the duct before securing motor
mounting screws.
Line up the hole in the flapper shaft with the set screw on
the coupler mounted on the motor shaft.
Verify the flapper operation by:
Observing the flapper behavior at turn on. The flapper
self-adjusts by closing.
Set the oven temperature to 70C. The flapper should close.
Set the oven temperature to 45C. The flapper should go to
full open.

384

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing Components Inside the Electronics Panel

Accessing the analog and power board

To access the analog and power board in the rear of the
electronics carrier, you must first remove:
The ALS controller board
The valve bracket
The logic board

7890 Series GC IPB

385

Mainframe

Replacing the ALS board

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the right side panel.
4 Remove 2 T-20 screws holding the assembly to the back of the

electronics carrier.

5 Slide out the ALS assembly.

6 Pinch and pull the 2-wire power connection at the bottom of

the assembly and set the assembly aside.

386

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

7 Carefully pinch and disconnect the flex cable from J8 on the

Analog & Power board.

8 Pull the ALS module free from the back panel.

9 Connect the flex cable of the new ALS module to the Analog

& Power board.

10 Slide the ALS module hook into the 4th slot.

11 Connect the 2-wire power cable.

12 Secure the assembly with 2 screws.
13 Plug in the ALS modules and power on the GC.

7890 Series GC IPB

387

Mainframe

14 Press [Service Mode] and select Diagnostics, ALS Status. Verify

that the ALS controller model number and firmware revision

appear on the display.
15 Update the ALS controller board firmware if necessary.

For more information, see the Electronics carrier IPB.

388

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing the fuse on the ALS controller board

A small fuse on the ALS controller board protects it from
over-currents originating in the ALS components (Injector, for
example), or shorts in their cables. The fuse is associated with
the 42 VAC circuit. You can easily replace this fuse.
1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Gather ESD protection, T-10 driver, and tweezer.
4 Remove the ALS controller board. See Replacing the ALS

board.
5 Unscrew the T-10 screw and remove the cover.
6 Using the tweezer, carefully replace the fuse.

7890 Series GC IPB

389

Mainframe

7 Reinstall the cover. Insure that the connectors are visible.

8 Reinstall the ALS controller board.
9 Before plugging in any ALS components (for example

injectors), power on the GC. Check Service Mode |

Diagnostics | ALS status to make sure the model number and
firmware revision of the board are displayed.
10 If appropriate, update the firmware to the ALS controller.

Troubleshooting

If the ALS Controller is not installed, check the cable

connections. Consider replacing the assembly.
If the firmware revision is blank, the ALS controller board
may not be programmed correctly.

390

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Removing the valve bracket

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.
Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear
an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the GC right side cover.
4 Remove the ALS board. See Replacing the ALS board.
5 Remove all cables connected to the upper side of the valve

bracket (the illustration shows 2).

6 Loosen the screws at the top left and top right corners of the

bracket. Remove the bracket.

7 Disconnect the wiring harness from the Analog and Power

board at P22.

7890 Series GC IPB

391

Mainframe

Replacing the logic board

The logic board contains information specific to the GC and its
configuration, including methods, sequences, serial number,
date of manufacture, the Gateway, Subnet Mask, and IP address
of the LAN, logs, oven type, AUX heater configuration(s), and so
forth. These items must be reentered after the new logic board
is installed.
If the GC is functional, use the keypad to view and record the
following information:
Configuration-required
Gas types
Cryogenic cooling, if present
Heater assignments: valve box, MSD transfer line, others
Valve types
If the configuration includes non-Agilent components or
specials, you may need to re-enter custom heater or
pneumatic PIDs. View and record this information.
1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the right side electronics panel cover.

392

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

4 Disconnect the ribbon cable to the keyboard/display.

5 Disconnect the communications bus cable and cable to the

keypad and display. If present, also remove the external LAN

cable.
6 For the G3430-61010, G3430-60120, or G3430-60101 logic

and communication board, loosen the thumbscrew in the

bottom right corner of the board. If you have a G3430-60100
logic and communication board remove the two screws that
secure the logic board to the rear panel.
G3430-60101 (G3430-61010 and G3430-60120 are similar):

7890 Series GC IPB

393

Mainframe

G3430-60100:

7 Slide the logic board toward you while using a rocking

motion to unplug the board from its analog and power board
receptacle.
8 Once free of the analog and power board, slide the logic

board to the left and lift it out.

9 For 7890B, main board G3430-61010 does not use a battery

backup. Skip to the next step.

For 7890A, verify the battery backup is ON. With respect to
the new logic boards (G3430-60120 and G3430-60101), verify
battery backup switch is ON (change if needed). For the
G3430-60100 board, switch the two battery-connect switches
found next to the battery: BOTH switches must be in
positions away from the analog and power board (see above).
G3430-60101:

394

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

G3430-60120 and G3430-60100:

NOTE

If switches are incorrectly-set (battery disconnected), critical internal GC

information will be lost any time AC power is not present.

10 Reinstallation is the reversal of removal steps.

11 Restore power to the GC.
12 The zero offsets for the flow and pressure sensors are stored

on the logic board rather than in the EPC modules. You must
now zero all sensors. Navigate to Service Mode | Diagnostics
| Electronics | Pneumatics to do this.
13 You must now restore information stored on the logic board

specific to the GC and its configuration.

14 Press Service mode. Scroll to Diagnostics and press [Enter].
15 Scroll to Instrument Status. Press [Enter].
16 Press [.][.][Mode/Type], select the country, and press [Enter].
17 Press [.][.] and enter the 8-digit serial number; press [Enter].
18 Scroll to Mfr date. Press [.][.] and enter 6 digits in ddmmyy

format. Press [Enter].

19 You have changed the configuration of the GC. See Changing

the GC configuration for important information regarding

GC methods.

Check GC configuration
Gas types
Cryogenic cooling
Heater assignments: valve box, MSD transfer line, others
Valve types
If the configuration includes non-Agilent components or
specials, you may need to re-enter custom heater or
pneumatic PIDs.
7890 Series GC IPB

395

Mainframe

Replacing the analog and power board

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the right side electronics panel cover.

If present, remove the ALS controller module. See Replacing

the ALS board.
4 Remove the logic board. See Replacing the logic board.
5 If present, disconnect valve box heater/sensor(s) from the

valve bracket and remove the bracket. See Removing the

valve bracket.
6 Disconnect cables at all board receptacles. G3430-60150

Analog and power board shown below (G3430-60151 is

similar).

396

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

7 Remove 8 T-20 screws:

One is a long grounding screw found at the lower right

corner of the board
One screw is difficult to locate next to and above the
transformer receptacle near the right center of the board
In all cases, locate the specific screw first before you
attempt to remove it: a misplaced screwdriver may
damage nearby board components.
8 Slide the board slightly outward and to its left to release it

from the GC. G3430-60151 Analog and power board shown

below (G3430-60150 is similar).

7890 Series GC IPB

397

Mainframe

9 Installation of the new board is essentially the reverse of

removal steps with the following considerations:

Make sure the long grounding screw is returned to its
proper location
Be careful in returning all screws to their proper locations
in that you avoid accidental contact with / damage to
nearby board components

10 For the G3430-60150 Analog and power board there are three

LEDs at the upper left corner of the board: red, yellow, and
398

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

green. The LEDs for the G3430-60151 Analog and power

board are located in the middle on the right next to the
REMOTE connector. When power is restored, yellow and green
LEDs should be lit (on) indicating, respectively, that
regulated and unregulated +5 VDC supplies are functional.
The red LED is lit only under FAULT conditions.

NOTE

7890 Series GC IPB

Note: The G3430-60151 analog and power board requires GC firmware

version A.01.09 or greater. If you have replaced a G3430-60150 board with
the newer G3430-60151 board, and the GC firmware is < version A.01.09,
the GC will boot into manufacturing test mode (MMON). To use the GC,
connect to it using Agilent Instrument Utility or Lab Advisor (see Using
Lab Advisor Tools: firmware update) and update the firmware.

399

Mainframe

Replacing Components Inside the Lower Rear Metal Cover

400

Item

Description

Qty

GC chassis

Pneumatics fan

Screw

Flapper assembly

Oven fan motor

Transformer

AC power board

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

Replacing AC board fuse sets

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the lower rear metal cover from the GC.
4 Replace the necessary fuse set. Use of a fuse puller is

recommended for ease of removal.

NOTE

7890 Series GC IPB

The two sets of fuses on the AC board are each always replaced as a set.

401

Mainframe

Replacing the AC board

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the rear lower metal cover on the GC.
4 The AC board is located below the oven flapper assembly.

Disconnect cables (4), 2 wires to AC power receptacle, and 3

wires to the oven triac located below the board. The
configuration plug on the original board must be removed
and moved to the new replacement board.

5 At the front right corner of the board, disconnect the on/off

power switch's connecting push rod by pushing the rod

forwards towards the front of the GC until it releases from
the switch on the board.
6 Rotate the mounting thumbscrew counterclockwise until an

audible "click" sound is heard. Then slide the board slightly

towards the center of the GC and lift it off its standoffs.
402

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

7 In reassembly, pay attention to the following:

Do not forget to reconnect the power switch push rod.

Make sure the new board is located on its standoffs. Then
slide it slightly away from the center of the GC such that the
mounting thumbscrew is properly positioned.
Engage the thumbscrew threads by pressing it downwards
gently while rotating clockwise.

7890 Series GC IPB

403

Mainframe

Replacing the oven triac

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
3 Remove the AC board. See Replacing the AC board.

404

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

CAUTION

Carefully note BOTH physical orientation of the triac AND which of

its three leads connects to each of its terminals. A mistake here in
reassembly may destroy the new triac and/or result in a lack of
proper oven control.
4 Remove three wires from the triac.
5 Remove two 5.5-mm hex nuts with captured lockwashers

securing the triac.

6 Lift the triac straight up to remove it. Also, if necessary,

remove the thin piece of plastic film found under the triac.
7 In reinstallation, remember to first install the piece of plastic

film supplied with the new triac.

7890 Series GC IPB

405

Mainframe

Replacing the power transformer

1 Cool down the oven.
2 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.

The transformer is very heavy! Make sure you have a firm grip on
the transformer before removing / replacing it.
3 Remove the lower rear metal cover on the GC.

406

7890 Series GC IPB

Mainframe

4 Disconnect the cable from the transformer to the AC board.

Also disconnect the ground wire to the GC frame. Finally,

disconnect the cable harness to the Analog and Power Board
and feed the harness and connector back to the rear of the
GC. Feed the two smaller cable connectors through first to
maximize room to pass through the largest of the three cable
connectors.
5 Note the orientation of the old transformer with respect to

the various cables, then remove the Allen bolt to release the
transformer. Carefully lift it from the GC.
6 In replacement, make sure the lower pad is in place, then

orient the new transformer onto the pad.

7 Replace the upper pad and associated hardware. In restoring

cables, feed the large cable and connector through to the

electronics side of the GC first.

7890 Series GC IPB

407

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

10 Valves
Valves 409
Valve Box 417
Actuators 423
Valve actuator drivers 431
Typical Valve Configurations 442
Troubleshooting 452

Agilent Technologies

408

Valves

10

Valves
Valves are used to modify the carrier gas flow during an
analysis. Among their uses are:
Highly reproducible injections, both liquid and gas
Changing the order of columns
Backflushing to eliminate high-boilers
Column selection
and many others. Some examples are included in this section.
In this GC, valves are rotated by air-driven actuators. This keeps
electrical activity away from where hot sample might leak. The
air is controlled by solenoid valves located behind the right side
cover.

7890 Series GC IPB

409

10 Valves

Introduction
This document does not provide instruction for first time
installation of any of the options discussed. The add-on sheets,
which accompany the various options, exist for just this
purpose, and should be referenced when performing a first time
installation.
The valves described in this manual are W-series minivalves,
manufactured by VALCO Instruments Co, Houston, Texas. The
valve body is made of Nitronic-60 nickel steel with 1/16-inch
fittings.
Proper instrument operation will prolong the life of the valve
system. Read all the accompanying information and avoid the
following operational abuses:
Exceeding the specified temperature and pressure ranges
Plugging a valve with column packing or sample
precipitation
Scoring valve surfaces with column packing or particulates
in liquid or gas sample
Contaminating the system with samples (non-eluting
materials) or poor quality support gases
Because valves operate best at a constant temperature, the GC
places valves in their own heated compartment.

WA R N I N G

410

To reduce the fire hazard when sampling flammable gases or

liquids under pressure, operators should routinely make
pressure-leak tests of the plumbing, fitting and valves. Both valve
positions should be checked. Depending on the nature and
pressure of the sample stream, periodic pressure leak test and
visual inspection should be made since wear or use could cause
leaks to develop. Leaks may occur inside the valve box and be
concealed from the operators view.

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Valco W-series minivalves

Valves consist of a driver, valve body, rotor, and preload
assembly.

Valve bodies
Body parts are made from Nitronics 60 nickel steel. If required,
the valve may also be produced from Hastelloy C. External
tubing (plumbing) is connected to the valve body ports by
ferrules and fittings provided with the instrument.
The left (CCW, counterclockwise) and right (CW, clockwise)
stops on general purpose valve bodies limit rotor rotation so the
correct flow path results when the index pin is close to or
against either stop of the index lip.

CAUTION

7890 Series GC IPB

Intermediate positions of the rotor may result in an interrupted flow

path which could cause damage to the valve or other components
in the chromatograph.

411

10 Valves

Valve rotors
Rotor type can be identified by color:
An off-white rotor is made of a PTFE composite and may be
used from room temperature to 200C.
A black rotor is made of polyimide and may be used from 100
to 350C.

CAUTION

The life of a valve is shortened if used outside its specified

temperature range. Do not mix rotor types in the same system.

The rotor seats on a highly polished conical surface. When

properly seated, the polished surface prevents leakage around
the rotor and between non-selected ports. The finish precludes
adsorption of most GC samples.
The rotor assembly is a one-piece part with an integral molded
and machined conical hub and the parts necessary for proper
seating. The sample contacts only the PTFE composite (low
temperature) or polyimide (high temperature) as well as the
stainless steel of the valve.
Grooves in the rotor surface form the paths between specific
ports. The index pin prevents rotation beyond either stop of the
index lip. Valve ports are connected by the grooves only when
the index pin is close to or against either stop. Intermediate
positions result in flow shutoff through the valve and possible
damage if left in this position.

Preload assembly (not shown)

This assembly consists of a body, a spring, and an adjusting nut.
It holds the rotor in the valve body.

412

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Valco W-series minivalve

Valve bodies
Body parts are made from Nitronics 60 nickel steel. If required,
the valve may also be produced from Hastelloy C. External
tubing (plumbing) is connected to the valve body ports by
ferrules and fittings provided with the instrument.
The left (CCW, counterclockwise) and right (CW, clockwise)
stops on general purpose valve bodies limit rotor rotation so the
correct flow path results when the index pin is close to or
against either stop of the index lip.

CAUTION

7890 Series GC IPB

Intermediate positions of the rotor may result in an interrupted flow

path which could cause damage to the valve or other components
in the chromatograph.

413

10 Valves

Valve rotors
Rotor type can be identified by color:
An off-white rotor is made of a PTFE composite and may be
used from room temperature to 200C.
A black rotor is made of polyimide and may be used from 100
to 350C.

CAUTION

The life of a valve is shortened if used outside its specified

temperature range Do not mix rotor types in the same system.

The rotor seats on a highly polished conical surface. When

properly seated, the polished surface prevents leakage around
the rotor and between non-selected ports. The finish precludes
adsorption of most GC samples.
The rotor assembly is a one-piece part with an integral molded
and machined conical hub and the parts necessary for proper
seating. The sample contacts only the PTFE composite (low
temperature) or polyimide (high temperature) as well as the
stainless steel of the valve.
Grooves in the rotor surface form the paths between specific
ports. The index pin prevents rotation beyond either stop of the
index lip. Valve ports are connected by the grooves only when
the index pin is close to or against either stop. Intermediate
positions result in flow shutoff through the valve and possible
damage if left in this position.

414

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

General purpose valves

The 6- and 10-port general purpose valves are suitable for
column switching, isolation, backflushing, and other uses as
well as gas sampling.

Gas sample valves

The standard gas sample valves have 1/16-inch zero dead
volume fittings and an internal port diameter of 0.016-inch.
6-port valve (actuator side view) showing flow path grooves

Gas sample loops

A 0.25 mL sample loop is included with all gas sampling valve
systems. 10 mL and 5 mL loops occupy one valve position,
limiting the number of valves that can be housed in a valve
compartment.

Adjustable restrictor valves

Adjustable restrictors are used to balance flow resistance
between the two valve positions. They are available with
ambient to 225C (part no. 0101-0633) or ambient to 350C
(part no. 0101-0948) operating ranges.

7890 Series GC IPB

415

10 Valves

Liquid sample valves

Agilent Technologies offers 4-port LSVs with 0.2, 0.5, or 1 L
internal loops.
These valves are designed for liquefied gases under pressure
such as ethane, propane, butane, LNG, etc. They are not
intended for nonvolatile liquids (at room conditions) where a
concealed leak could allow an accumulation or pool of liquid to
form that may present a significant fire hazard.
All liquid sample valves have 1/16-inch fittings. The 0.5 L size
is available in low- (1000 psig limit) and high-pressure (5000
psig) versions; the other sizes are low-pressure (1000 psig) only.
An adjustable restrictor may be used on the sample outlet line
to maintain internal sample pressure to keep a compressed gas
liquefied.
Temperature ranges

CAUTION

1/16 inch PTFE rotor valves

0 to 200 C

Adjustable restrictor valves

Ambient to 225 C

The life of an LSV is shortened if used outside its specified pressure

and temperature ranges. Highly dangerous leaks can occur if the
valve box temperature ever exceeds the specified temperature
limits.
Adjustable restrictor valve
The adjustable restrictor supplied with a liquid sample valve is
designed for temperatures up to 225C; it is NOT compatible
with high-temperature valves.

416

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Valve Box

Installing the valve box

The valve box sits on top of the GC and contains the valves and
plumbing, heated zones and sensors, and the insulation.
1 Use a pair of diagonal cutters to remove the metal cutout on

the top of the GC.

WA R N I N G

Be careful of sharp edges!

Cut toward the outside edge of the tabs so that the valve box
will fit correctly.
2 Screw the aluminum standoffs into the valve box bottom

plate using one Torx T-20 screw for each standoff.

3 Screw the valve box bottom plate onto the top of the GC

using three Torx T-20 screws.

4 There are six holes in the plate for up to four valves. The

outside holes on each side of the plate are for valves and the
inside holes are for plumbing into the GC. Punch out the
pre-perforated insulation from the holes you plan to use.
5 Use two Torx T-20 screws to mount the heater block(s) on the

valve box bottom plate.

6 Install the heater/sensor into the heater block(s) and secure

the leads to the valve box bottom plate with the U-clamp and
two Torx T-10 screws.

NOTE

Make sure that the sensor is seated all the way in the heater block.

7 Insert the valve(s) into the appropriate hole(s) in the heater

block and secure each valve with two long Torx T-10 screws.
8 Plumb the valves in the appropriate configuration. A variety

of valve configurations are diagrammed in the Typical Valve

Configurations section in this chapter.
9 Orient all of the valves in the OFF (CCW) position.

7890 Series GC IPB

417

10 Valves

10 Place the valve box insulation in the valve box top. Make sure

the perforations in the insulation line up properly with the

valve box top.
11 Insert the insulation retainer plate in the bottom of the valve

box top and secure it to the threaded studs using the two
5.5-mm nuts.
Tighten the nuts until they are flush with the top of the stud.
Make sure the holes in the retainer plate line up with the
perforations in the insulation.
12 While wearing a pair of protective gloves and holding the

valve box top over a waste receptacle, punch or cut out the
insulation from the appropriate holes.
13 Use two Torx T-20 screws to secure the valve box top over the

installed valves, making sure the heater/sensor leads are

routed under the appropriate cutout(s).
Make sure the valve box top is oriented correctly with holes
punched out over the installed valves.
14 Install the actuators as described in the Actuators section

of this chapter.

Figure 7

418

Removing the sheet metal cutout. 6890 shown.

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

7890 Series GC IPB

Figure 8

Attaching the standoffs to the bottom plate

Figure 9

Attaching the bottom plate to the GC

10

419

10 Valves

Figure 10 Attaching heater block to the bottom plate

Figure 11 Installing valves

420

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Figure 12 Valve in the OFF position (top view)

Figure 13 Installing the valve box top assembly

7890 Series GC IPB

421

10 Valves

Removing the valve box assembly

1 Place the main power switch in the off position.

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present in the instrument when the power

cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock hazard by
disconnecting the power cord before working on the instrument.
2 Unplug the line power cord from its receptacle.
3 Allow some time for the oven and heated zones to cool.
4 When the oven has cooled, turn off all gas supplies.
5 Switch the solenoid valve off so the actuator is in its fully

extended position (piston rod extended).

6 If variable restrictors are present, remove their mounting

hardware in the following order: two Torx T-20 screws, hex

nut, and mounting bracket for each restrictor valve.
7 Remove the two Torx T-20 screws securing the valve box top

assembly to the standoffs. Lift the valve box top assembly

straight off the valve box. Be careful not to move the valve
rotor index pin from its "at rest" position.

NOTE

If valve/actuator alignment is to be made, see Valve actuator alignment

in this section.

8 To reassemble: Align the two mounting holes in the valve box

top assembly with the standoffs in the valve box. Lower the
box top assembly until it rests on the standoffs.
9 Secure the valve box top assembly with two Torx T-20

mounting screws. Tighten these screws firmly. Reinstall

hardware for variable restrictors if present.
10 Exercise the valve(s) on and off a few times to verify

operation.

422

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Actuators
Valve rotors are driven by air-operated actuators. The air is
controlled by solenoid valves inside the right side panel.

Installing the actuators

The actuators use pneumatic pressure (40 to 70 psi) to switch
the valves between their two positions.
1 After installing the valves and valve box as described in the

Valve Box section, you can install the valve actuators.

2 Set each actuator to the appropriate degree of rotation. Move

the grenade style pin to the hole on the actuator marked with
the correct degree of rotation, as shown below:
Four port valvesPlace the pin in the 90 hole
Six port valvesPlace the pin in the 60 hole
Ten port valvesSame as six port valves, but with the
tubular 36 actuator limiter on the pin.
3 Mount an actuator over each valve installed using two Torx

T-20 screws.
4 Engage the actuator drive shaft coupler with the valve.
a Loosen the hex nut on the actuator near the drive shaft.
b Slide the shaft down.
c Insert a flat bladed screw driver in the slot on the top of

the actuator and turn the shaft back and forth until you
feel the coupler engage the valve.
d Tighten the set screw.
5 Install the valve actuator drivers.

7890 Series GC IPB

423

10 Valves

Mounting the actuator on the valve box

Engaging the actuator drive shaft with the valve

424

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Setting the actuator's degree of rotation

7890 Series GC IPB

425

10 Valves

Installing the actuator on a heated valve box

WA R N I N G

The valve box is insulated with a fibrous material that can cause
irritation to the skin, eyes, and mucous membranes. Always wear
gloves when working with the insulation. If the insulation is
flaky/crumbly, wear protective eyewear and a respirator.
Before continuing, install the heated zone kit (if purchased) as
described in the instructions included with that accessory. Also
install any new rotary valves into the valve box. Leave the GC
covers off and the power cord disconnected.
1 Hold the upper valve box over a trash can, then remove the

pre-cut insulation from the appropriate hole in the upper

valve box. Remove any excess or loose pieces from around
the hole.

2 Verify that all valve rotors are in the full counterclockwise

position (valve Off).

3 Locate the two half-moon cutouts at the bottom back of the

upper valve box. Place the upper valve box on top of the
lower valve box assembly, routing the heater/sensor wires
through the cutouts. Secure with two T- 20 mounting screws.
4 Install the new valve actuator.
a Insert the actuator through the valve box cover.
b Push the coupling/shaft assembly downward with a

flathead screwdriver until the slot on the coupling

engages the rotor index pin.
426

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

If the coupling and valve do not engage, check that both are
fully counterclockwise and try again. If necessary, turn the
shaft slightly to engage the coupling.
c Secure the actuator to the valve box with two T- 20 Torx

screws provided in the kit.

5 For each actuator that mates with a newly installed valve:

a Loosen the adjustment set screw.

b Using a flathead screwdriver, turn the rotor adjustment

shaft counterclockwise until it stops, then back it off a

small amount (< 1 mm) to set one end of the rotor's
motion.

7890 Series GC IPB

427

10 Valves

c Tighten the adjustment set screw.

428

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Installing the actuator on a side mount bracket

1 Install the side mount bracket on the left side of the GC using

four machine screws.

2 Attach the clamp ring to the back of the bracket with two

screws.
3 Align the actuator assembly with the upper or lower

standoffs. The cylinder must be down. Insert the actuator

drive though the hole in the bracket, and secure with two T20 Torx screws.

7890 Series GC IPB

429

10 Valves

Valve actuator alignment

1 Remove the valve box top assembly. See steps 1 through 3 of

Removing the valve box assembly for the procedure.

2 Loosen the actuator link arm lock screw at each actuator

with a 3 mm hex key wrench so that the coupling/shaft

assembly is free to rotate. Push the coupling shaft fully into
the actuator.
3 Turn the valve rotor index pin of each valve

counterclockwise until it is 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) from the

counterclockwise (left-hand) valve stop.
4 Reinstall the valve box top assembly.
5 Gently rotate and push the coupling/shaft assembly with a

blade-type screwdriver until the slot on the coupling fully

engages the valve rotor index pin. Repeat this procedure for
each valve installed.

CAUTION

Use care in performing the following operation so as not to

accidentally turn the valve rotor away from its preset (step 3)
position.
6 Make sure that all solenoid valves are turned "off" by the

appropriate valve controller. Turn on the air supply to the

solenoid valve(s). The piston rod of each actuator will move
all the way out to the extended (OFF) position. Very firmly
tighten the link arm lock screw for each actuator.
7 Install the hardware for any variable restrictors present.

430

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Valve actuator drivers

Solenoid differences
Beginning in April 2010, a new type of solenoid valve became
available to drive the GC valve actuators. The new solenoid
valve, made by Airtek, is not compatible with the original
solenoid valve. They function in the same way, but mount
differently and require different valve brackets.

Which solenoid valve is installed?

Any valve installed on a GC before April 2010 used the original
style solenoid. Upgrading to the new solenoid requires a
replacement of the entire driver stack assembly (valve bracket,
elbow, solenoids, and mounting hardware).
You can easily distinguish between the solenoid valve types, as
shown below. The new style solenoid valve has a silver metal
fitting instead of a red pressure vent button.

Replacing an original solenoid valve

If replacing an original style solenoid valve, first try to order the
original replacement part. If that part is not available, then you
will need to replace the entire solenoid stack assembly. See the
chapter on Valves in the IPB for assembled stack part
numbers.

7890 Series GC IPB

431

10 Valves

Installing a new valve stack assembly

If installing a new valve stack assembly, order the new style
parts.

Original style
Assemble the valve driver block
The valve driver block accommodates up to four valve drivers. A
valve driver must be installed for each valve/actuator installed.
1 Install two mounting posts on the intake/exhaust endplate

(two large threaded holes). Install an O-ring in the

supply/exhaust ports on the inside of the plate.
2 Slide a valve driver over the mounting posts in the

orientation shown. Install two O-rings in the valve driver

supply/exhaust ports as shown.

3 For each additional valve installed, install two more

mounting posts and a valve driver with O-rings in the same

manner as the first.
4 When all the drivers have been installed, screw on the other

end plate with the two hex screws as shown.

432

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Install the bracket and cabling (original style)

1 Install the valve actuators before installing the valve actuator

drivers.
2 Screw the valve driver bracket into the right side of the GC

using the two captive screws.

3 Plug the connectors on the valve driver cable harness up

through the slots on the valve driver bracket.

4 Plug the larger 2 2 heater sensor connectors (P1, P2) into

the outside slots and the smaller 1 2 valve driver

connectors (P3 to P6) into the four middle slots.
5 Plug in the heater/sensor lead(s) from the valve heater

blocks on top of the GC. Thread the heater/sensor lead(s) to

the right side of the instrument, through one of the keyhole
wiring slots and into the P1 or P2 connector on the actuator
bracket.

7890 Series GC IPB

433

10 Valves

Installing the valve driver block

1 Slide the valve driver block down into the driver bracket

until the drivers plug into the connectors.

NOTE

To remove drivers from the driver block, use a hex wrench to unscrew
the two hex screws on the left side of the block. Remove the driver,
collapse the block to the width of the remaining drivers and reinstall the
hex screws.
2 Plug the other end of the valve driver cable harness into the

P22 connector on the analog and power board.

3 Wrap the threaded ends of the 90 elbow fitting in PTFE pipe

tape. Screw the fitting into the air supply intake on the side
of the valve driver block facing the rear of the GC.
The supply intake is the outside threaded hole, the one
farthest from the analog and power board.
4 Run a length of 1/4-inch tubing out the hole on the rear of the

GC in the lower left corner (when facing the rear of the

instrument). Connect this tubing to your air supply.
5 Unscrew the screw plugs (if present) on the top of each

driver you are using. Replace the screw plugs with tubing
connectors.
6 Plumb the tubing from each installed actuator to the tubing

connectors on the corresponding driver. The tubing from the

side of the actuator goes to the connector farthest from the
board. Grip the tubing with a piece of sandpaper and push it
onto the tubing connector.

434

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

7890 Series GC IPB

10

435

10 Valves

New style
Replacing a solenoid valve (new style)
To replace a new style solenoid valve:
1 Turn off the valve actuator air supply.

WA R N I N G

The detector, inlet, oven top, and valve box may be hot enough to
cause burns.
2 Remove the GC right side cover.

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present when the GC electronics are

exposed.
3 Press and hold the switch on the bottom of one of the

solenoid valves until no residual air pressure remains.

4 Turn off the GC and unplug the power cord. If installed,

allow the heated valve box to cool.

5 Disconnect the valve box heater wires to the A1 connector.

436

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

6 Disconnect the tubing from the broken or damaged solenoid

valve.
7 Remove the two screws that hold the end plates and existing

valves together.

8 Use a 4-mm hex key to remove the screw that holds the

solenoid stack left end plate in place.

7890 Series GC IPB

437

10 Valves

9 Remove the broken or damaged solenoid valve wires from the

wire connector on the valve bracket.

10 Replace the solenoid valve(s).
11 Plug the new solenoid valve wires into the appropriate valve

bracket connectors. See the diagram below.

12 Reassemble the solenoid stack including the new solenoid

valve and left end plate. While holding the valves in one
hand, align them as best as possible, then slide a screw
through the left end plate and solenoids.
Use 25 mm screws for 1 solenoid
Use 50 mm screws for 2 solenoids
Use 70 mm screws for 3 solenoids
Use 85 mm screws for 4 solenoids
Repeat for the second screw. Both screws should extend a
little bit out of the last solenoid.
13 Line up the stack screws with the holes in the right end plate

and assemble. Before tightening, align the solenoid valves so

their tops are even.
14 Use the screw removed in step 8 to install the left end plate

to the valve bracket. Be careful not to trap any wires behind

the plate.
15 Reconnect the valve box heater wires to the A1 connector.
16 Connect the tubing from the actuator to the new solenoid

valve by pushing it into the press fitting.

The tubing from the side of the actuator connects to the
outside fitting on the solenoid (the fitting furthest from
the electronics board, labeled 2).
Trim the tubing as needed to keep installation neat.

438

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

17 If installing new tubing, cut the tie-wrap around the tubing

leading from the actuator and route the tubing as shown

below.

7890 Series GC IPB

439

10 Valves

18 Turn on the valve actuator air.

WA R N I N G

Hazardous voltages are present when the GC electronics are

exposed.
19 Connect the GC power cord and turn on the GC.
20 Press the switch under each solenoid to activate it and

pressurize the system.

21 The solenoid valve replacement is complete. If no other

accessories or parts require installation, reinstall all GC

covers.

440

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Installing the valve driver (solenoid) bracket, cabling, and elbow

fitting (new style)
1 Install the valve actuators before installing the valve actuator

drivers (solenoids).
2 Screw the valve driver bracket into the right side of the GC

using the two captive screws.

3 Plug the valve driver bracket cable harness into P22 on the

GC board.
4 Plug the connectors on the valve driver cable harness up

through the slots on the valve driver bracket.

Plug the larger 2 2 heater sensor connectors A1 and A2 into
the outside slots and the smaller 1 2 valve driver
connectors V1 to V4 into the four middle slots.
5 Wrap the threaded ends of the 90 elbow fitting in PTFE pipe

tape. Screw the fitting into the air supply intake on the side
of the valve driver block facing the rear of the GC.
The supply intake is the outside threaded hole, the one
farthest from the analog and power board.
6 Run a length of 1/4-inch tubing out the hole on the rear of the

GC in the lower left corner (when facing the rear of the

instrument). Connect this tubing to your air supply.

7890 Series GC IPB

441

10 Valves

Typical Valve Configurations

442

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Option numbers
Numbers of the form n0n are for standard temperatures
(ambient to 200 C).
Numbers of the form n3n are for high temperatures (100 to
350 C).

Custom Plumbing (diagram required), Option 700 or 730

Custom Plumbing (Diagram Required), Option 700 or 730

Gas Sampling Option, Option 701 or 731

Gas Sampling Option, Option 701 or 731

7890 Series GC IPB

443

10 Valves

Column Isolation, Option 702 or 732

Column Isolation, Option 702 or 732

High temperature needle valve supplied with option 732

Two Stream Selection (Requires Gas Sampling), Option 703 or 733

Two Stream Selection (Requiers Gas Sampling), Option 703 or

753

444

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Backflush to Detector, Option 704 or 734

Backflush a Precolumn to Vent, Option 705 or 735

7890 Series GC IPB

445

10 Valves

Column Selection (Unused Column Isolated), Option 706 or 736

Sequence Reverse, Option 707 or 737

446

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Sequence Reverse with Backflush of Column 1, Option 708 or 738

Custom Plumbing (Diagram Required), Option 800 or 830

Custom Plumbing (Diagram Required)), Option 800 or 830

7890 Series GC IPB

447

10 Valves

Gas Sampling with Backflush of Precolumn to Vent, Option 801 or 831

Gas Sampling with Backflush of Precolumn to Vent, Option 801

or 831

Gas Sampling with Backflush to Detector, Option 802 or 832

Gas Sampling with Backflush to Detector, Option 802 or 832

448

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Gas Sampling of Alternate Streams, Option 803 or 833

Gas Sampling with Sequence Reverse, Option 804 or 834

7890 Series GC IPB

449

10 Valves

Gas Sampling with Sequence Reverse and Backflush of Column 1, Option

805 or 835

Gas Sampling with Sequence Reverse and Backflush of Column

1, Option 805 or 835

Column Selection with Backflush to Vent, Option 806 or 836

450

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Liquid Sampling, Options 850, 852, 854, and 856

7890 Series GC IPB

451

10 Valves

Troubleshooting
Most of the problems associated with sampling valves are
related to peak broadening in transfer lines and inlets, sample
adsorption by the valve or transfer lines, leaks, and
perturbations in the baseline.

Chromatographic symptoms
Troubleshooting valves and their related plumbing is primarily
a matter of systematic checking and verification of unimpaired
mechanical operation of any moving part. This requires an
understanding of how the valve functions internally and how
the plumbing is configured. A plumbing diagram is essential for
effective troubleshooting.
The following "symptom-cause" list gives the most commonly
encountered problems found with valves and their solution.
Symptom

Possible cause

Lost peaks (degradation) Valve or transfer lines

too hot

Reduce temperature 50
C, reevaluate

Transfer line activity

Use nickel or Hastelloy

tubing

Lost or tailing peaks

Valve or transfer line too

cold

Increase temperatures
50 C, reevaluate

Baseline perturbation

Slow valve rotation

Increase actuator
pressure

Rotor distorted

Replace rotor

Sample/column
pressure too different

Add back-pressure
regulator to sample drain

Peak tailing broad peaks Column overload

452

Solution

Use smaller sample loop

Increase split flow

Flow too slow

Increase column flow

Increase split flow

System voids

Check connections
Reduce volume of
connecting tubing

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Loss of sensitivity or excessive drift

Several possible causes exist for overall deterioration of the
chromatogram.
Contamination in the valve requires a thorough cleaning.
Internal leakage requires a complete disassembly and
inspection of the mating surfaces.
Poor temperature control may require a full check of
electronic and thermal components.
Lack of proper conditioning techniques, columns, etc.
Failure or deterioration of other components (columns,
detectors, etc.).

Loss of peaks in specific areas of the chromatogram

Entire sections of chromatographic data can be lost due to a
valve that does not rotate or one that rotates improperly. Other
than obvious component failures (solenoid, actuator, etc.),
improper adjustments and misalignments cause most problems.
Check that adequate air (about 482 kPa or 70 psi) is
supplied.
Check the valve. Is it rotating?
If the valve rotates, check for proper alignment of the
actuator, mechanical binding or slippage of connecting parts.
Check for blocked flow paths with valve in both positions.

Extraneous peaks
Air peaks are sometimes seen in a chromatogram when leakage
occurs because the valve rotor does not seal properly. These
leaks may not be detectable using the soap-bubble method.
If a leak is suspected but cannot be located with soap bubbles, a
pressure check will determine definitely if a leak exists.
Extraneous peaks can occur due to contamination or improper
conditioning of the valve. If leaks are not apparent, clean or
condition the valve.
Other causes, totally unrelated to the valve, may produce
similar symptoms. Impure carrier gas (i.e., containing water)
can cause extraneous peaks.

7890 Series GC IPB

453

10 Valves

Peak broadening and tailing

Voids in the flow system (valve and connecting tubing) cause
tailing and peak broadening. Use inlets and liners with small
internal diameters and connect the valve to the inlet or column
with short lengths of connecting tubing of narrow inner
diameter.
If early-eluting peaks are too broad, stationary phase or thermal
focusing effects should be used with packed-column ports or
increased split flows when capillary split inlets are used. Inlets
should be equipped with narrow inner diameter liners, and
narrow-bore connecting tubing should be used between the
valve and inlet.

Baseline shifts
Baseline perturbations are caused by changes in column flow as
the valve is rotated and as the sample loop equilibrates to
system pressure. Slow valve rotation momentarily stops carrier
gas flow and, when the valve stops rotating, a sudden increase
in flow occurs which slowly returns to the set point. Check
actuator pressure (usually 40 to 75 psi), valve rotor tension, and
valve temperature to ensure that the valve rotates as quickly as
possible. A restrictor or backpressure regulator can be added to
the sample vent line to maintain the sample loop at system
pressure. This will reduce the time it takes for the flow to
stabilize after the valve is switched.

Baseline upsets
Frequently, baseline upsets are seen on chromatograms when
valves are switched. These upsets are caused by pressure
changes within the system, injections of large volume samples,
or by changing the amount of restriction in the flow path. These
upsets will become more of a problem when high sensitivity is
required. Addition of a fixed restriction downstream from the
valve may help minimize the upset. Changes in column length
may also help reduce the upsets.
Fixed restrictors are used immediately before flame detectors
to prevent flameout and are used in some instances to prevent
pressure surges from damaging TCD filaments. An adjustable
restrictor (needle valve) can also be used where a matched
restriction is desired but not for preventing pressure or flow
surges.
Often confused with baseline upsets, an offset is a shift in the
baseline that does not return quickly to the original level.
454

7890 Series GC IPB

Valves

10

Baseline offsets may be caused by air leaks but more commonly

are due to a change in gas purity or flow rate in the detector.
Poor carrier gas or improperly conditioned filters and traps
should be suspected whenever offsets occur.

Variation in peak area and retention time

The amount of sample contained in the loop and, therefore, the
amount injected onto the column is affected by loop pressure
and temperature. Variations in pressure and temperature lead
to variability in peak areas. Flow restrictors or back-pressure
regulators help to maintain constant loop pressure, and valve
boxes help maintain temperature.
Leaks can occur in the valve itself or at any of the connecting
points with transfer lines. Leaks usually cause area
irreproducibility, retention times changes, and increases in the
area of air peaks (with thermal conductivity detectors). Leaks
in rotors can sometimes be fixed by tightening the nuts holding
the rotor in the valve body. Leaks in connections are usually
found with an electronic leak detector or with a liquid leak
detection fluid (e.g., Snoop).

Pressure check
Leak checking the plumbing involved in a valve system must be
done carefully and methodically. The pressure check method
below will indicate, but sometimes not isolate, a leak in the flow
path. Since this method does not necessarily isolate the leak,
other leak check methods may be needed to locate the leak
specifically.

NOTE

Each valve in a system has two flow paths, ON and OFF. A leak
sometimes occurs in only one of these two positions. Check both.

1 Disconnect the detector from the valve system.

2 Cap the valve system at its outlet and pressurize to 689 kPa

(100 psi). Allow 2 to 5 minutes for pressure to equilibrate. If

your instrument has flow control, it should read zero flow.
3 Turn off the gas supply at the source.
4 Generally, the pressure will drop quickly for approximately

30 to 60 seconds, then stabilize. After this initial pressure

drop, the gauge should not indicate more than a 7 to 14 kPa
(1 to 2 psi) drop during a 10 minute period.

7890 Series GC IPB

455

10 Valves

5 If no leak is indicated, actuate all valves and repeat steps 2 to

4.
6 If a leak does show up, try to pinpoint the source using a

soap bubble meter. Do not assume that the leak exists only at
the valve. Often plumbing connections such as unions or
bulkhead fittings are at fault. See Valve Box should it
become necessary to expose the valve system.
7 If the leak cannot be found easily, divide the system in half

and repeat the pressure check. Continue dividing in halves,

and pressure check until the leak is isolated.

456

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

11 Capillary flow technology (CFT)

devices
CFT overview 458
Ultimate union 460

Agilent Technologies

457

11 Capillary flow technology (CFT) devices

CFT overview
CFT devices consist of a plate and tubing. Ultimate unions are
often used with CFT devices and are described here.
A CFT plate consists of two thin metal plates that are bonded
together. Gas passages are left between the plates, and tubing
fittings are brazed to the surface. Finally, the gas passages are
deactivated. This results in a sturdy and inert unit with a very
low thermal mass.
Accessories contain the plate, plus installation/use instructions
and some related parts (ferrules, nuts, tubing, etc.) needed for
use.
The following accessories and plates are available at the time of
writing.
Description

Accessory

Plate only

Deans switch

G2855B

G2855-61500

Splitter, 2-way with

make-up gas

G3180B

G3180-61500

Splitter, 2-way without

make-up gas

G3181B

G3181-60500

Splitter, 3-way with

make-up gas

G3183B

G3183-60500

Quick Swap for MSD

G3185B

G3185-60065

Tubing connects plates with one another and with other parts
of the analytical path.
Description

Part Number

CPM-1/16-inch x 0.010 -inch id tube, 50cm

G1580-80060

CPM-1/16-inch x 0.20-inch id tube, 50cm

G1580-80062

Fused silica, deactivated, 0.20 mm x 5 m

160-2205-5

Fused silica, deactivated, 0.25 mm x 5 m

160-2255-5

Fused silica, deactivated, 0.18 mm x 10 m

160-2615-10

Fused silica, deactivated, 0.10 mm x 5 m

160-2635-5

Miscellaneous parts are used in making column connections.

458

7890 Series GC IPB

Capillary flow technology (CFT) devices

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part number

Oven bracket kit

G2855-60140

Reducing union, 1/8-inch to 1/16-inch

0100-0241

Restrictor, SS, 1/16-inch od x 0.01-inch id x 1 m

0100-2354

Union, SS, 1/16-inch

0100-0124

Screw, T-20, M4 x 8 mm

0515-2755

Column storage fitting

G2855-20590

Wire, SS, 0.015-inch x 40 mm

G2855-60593

Plug for CFT fittings or unions

G2855-60570

QuickSwap transfer line locking nut

G3185-20501

Deans switch supplies kit

G2855-60150

11

459

11 Capillary flow technology (CFT) devices

Ultimate union
This union combines a stainless steel body, inert metal ferrules,
and very low dead volume to provide durable connections of
capillary columns, retention gaps, pre-columns, and other
capillary devices.

Tools and kits

The kits do not contain ferrules. The appropriate size must be
ordered separately.

460

Part number

Description

G3182-61580

Union kit, deactivated

G3182-61581

Union kit, non-deactivated

G2855-20530

Internal nut

G2855-20555

Swaging nut

8710-0510

5/16 x 1/4 open end wrench (need 2)

5181-8836

Column cutter

7890 Series GC IPB

Capillary flow technology (CFT) devices

11

Metal ferrules and nuts

Identify the internal diameter of your column and select the
part number for the appropriate sized nut and ferrule. Each
packet contains an internal nut.
Part number

Description

5184-3569

Metal ferrules, 0.1- to 0.25-mm columns, pkg of 10

5184-3570

Metal ferrules, 0.32-mm columns, pkg of 10

5188-2789

Metal ferrules, 0.53-mm columns, pkg of 10

Assembling nut, ferrule and swaging nut

1 Thread the column end through the internal nut and the

ferrule leaving approximately 3 cm of column protruding

beyond the ferrule. Thread the swaging nut onto the internal
nut with the column protruding.

2 Tighten the two nuts together a little at a time, occasionally

checking to see if the ferrule is grabbing the column. When

the ferrule just starts to grab, notice the position of the nut
and then tighten the nuts by turning 60 degrees (one flat).

7890 Series GC IPB

461

11 Capillary flow technology (CFT) devices

3 Remove the swaging nut.

4 Rest the ceramic column cutter on the small end face of the

ferrule at a 45-degree angle.

462

7890 Series GC IPB

Capillary flow technology (CFT) devices

11

5 Scribe the column, then break off the end. It should break off

with approximately 0.3 mm of column extending beyond the

ferrule. It is important that you cut the column to a
maximum of 0.5 mm beyond the swaged ferrule end. The end
of the column need not be perfectly square, but should not
have cracks that extend under the ferrule.

7890 Series GC IPB

463

11 Capillary flow technology (CFT) devices

Connecting and disconnecting columns

Connecting columns
Connect columns to the union with internal nuts and
preswaged SilTite ferrules. Finger-tighten the nuts. Further
tighten with a wrench only 15 to 20 degrees.

Disconnecting columns
Loosen and remove the internal nut. If the column and ferrule
do not come free, insert a pointed object (pen, paper clip) into
the ferrule release hole and press firmly. You will hear a click as
the ferrule releases.

Mounting the union

The ultimate union is probably too heavy to be supported only
by the capillary columns. Use the oven wall clip to support the
weight of the union by attaching it to an opening in the oven
wall.

464

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

12 Electrical
Power options 466
Converting the power option 469
Remote start/stop connection 470
Remote control 471
Measuring inlet and detector heater and PRT resistance
Temperature sensor resistance 475
Oven heater coil resistance 476
Setting the instrument power configuration 477
Line voltage configuration plug 478
Ceramic and glass fuses 479
AC power board schematic 480
Oven shroud 481

Agilent Technologies

472

465

12 Electrical

Power options
There are 8 power option kits. These contain the configuration
plug, oven shroud, label, and power connector for each option. If
you are converting from one power option to another you can
order the kit or order the unique individual parts.
The power cord must be ordered separately. See Power cords.

Regular oven
There are 4 power options for the regular oven:
G1530-63800 Regular power kit 120V
G1530-63810 Regular power kit 220V
G1530-63820 Regular power kit 230V
G1530-63830 Regular power kit 240V

Kits

120VAC
G1530-63800

220VAC
G1530-63810

230VAC
G1530-63820

240VAC
G1530-63830

Configuration
plug

G1530-60690

G1530-60710

G1530-60720

G1530-60730

Oven shroud

G1530-61610

G1530-61230

G1530-61670

G1530-61240

Label

G1530-90928

G1530-90921

G1530-90922

G1530-90923

Power
receptacle

G1530-61550

G1530-61560

G1530-61560

G1530-61560

Clamp

1400-1663

Common to all regular power options:

0515-1084 Screw, M3x0.5x12mm T20, quantity 2 for power
input assembly
0515-2711 Screw, M4X0.7x12mm T20, coated, quantity 4 for
shroud
0535-0043 Nut with lock washer, M4X0.7x3.2mm 7mm for
grounding wire
05890-00460 Insulation plug for heater/sensor tube
G3430-00104 Heater Wire Insulation Sleeving

466

7890 Series GC IPB

Electrical

12

Fast oven
There are 4 power options for the fast oven:
G1530-63840 Fast power kit 200V (Japan)
G1530-63850 Fast power kit 208 or 220V
G1530-63860 Fast power kit 230V
G1530-63870 Fast power kit 240V

Kits

200VAC
208 220VAC 230VAC
240VAC
G1530-63840 G1530-63850 G1530-63860 G1530-63870

Configuration
plug

G1530-60700

G1530-60710

G1530-60720

G1530-60730

Oven shroud

G1530-61620

G1530-61630

G1530-61650

G1530-61640

Label

G1530-90924

G1530-90925

G1530-90926

G1530-90927

Common to all fast power options:

0515-1084 Screw, M3x0.5x12mm T20, quantity 2 for power
input assembly
0515-2711 Screw, M4X0.7x12mm T20, coated, quantity 4 for
shroud
G1530-61550 Power input assembly
1400-1663 Clamp, 1.25x1.0 inch
0535-0043 Nut with lock washer, M4X0.7x3.2mm 7mm for
grounding wire
05890-00460 Insulation plug for heater/sensor tube
G3430-00104 Heater Wire Insulation Sleeving

7890 Series GC IPB

467

12 Electrical

Table of GC voltage by country

468

Country

Kit

Voltage

Oven type

Australia, 10 amp

G1530-63830

240 V

Regular

Australia, South
Africa

G1530-63870

240 V

Fast

China

G1530-63810

220 V

Regular

China, Hong Kong

G1530-63850

220 V

Fast

Continental Europe,
dual phase

G1530-63860

230 V

Fast

Continental Europe,
single phase: Russia

G1530-63850

220 V

Fast

Denmark,
Switzerland, 10 amp

G1530-63820

230 V

Regular

India, Denmark,
Switzerland, 16 amp

G1530-63860

230 V

Fast

Israel

G1530-63850

220 V

Fast

Japan

G1530-63840

200 V

Fast

United Kingdom,
Ireland

G1530-63870

240 V

Fast

USA

G1530-63800

120 V

Regular

USA

G1530-63850

208 V

Fast

USA

G1530-63870

240 V

Fast

7890 Series GC IPB

Electrical

12

Converting the power option

This procedure outlines the steps you must complete to prepare
a GC for use in another country or to configure for a different
oven heating speed.
The basic requirements for use of the fast heating oven are:
The electric service must be capable of providing >= 200 V at
>=15 amperes.
In the United States, the electric service must be 208 V or
240 V.

Procedure
1 Select the appropriate power option kit. See Power options.

There are 8 power option kits. These contain the

configuration plug, oven shroud, label, and power connector
for each option. If you are converting from one power option
to another you can order the kit or order the unique
individual parts. Compare the parts listings for the present
and new power option to see what must be replaced.
2 Select the appropriate power cord. See Power cords.
3 Cool down the oven.
4 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.
Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear
an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
5 If necessary, replace the oven shroud. See Replacing the

oven shroud, oven fan, and oven fan motor.

6 Replace the oven configuration plug. See Line voltage

configuration plug.
7 If necessary, replace the power cord connector.
8 Attach the new label.
9 Power on the unit. Watch for any errors after self-test.
7890 Series GC IPB

469

12 Electrical

Remote start/stop connection

Prepare (low)Request to prepare for analysis. Receiver is any

module performing pre-analysis activities.
Start (low)Request to start run/timetable. Receiver is any
module performing runtime-controlled activities.
Ready (high)System is ready for next analysis. Receiver is any
sequence controller.
Stop (low)Request to reach system ready state as soon as
possible (for example, stop run, abort or finish, and stop
injection). Receiver is any module performing
runtime-controlled activities.

470

7890 Series GC IPB

Electrical

12

Remote control
Remote control allows easy connection between single
instruments or systems to ensure coordinated analysis with
simple coupling requirements.
Start RelayA 120 millisecond contact closure
Control of analysis is maintained by signal readiness READY for
next analysis, followed by START of run and optional STOP of
run triggered on the respective lines. In addition, PREPARE and
START REQUEST may be issued.
The signal levels are defined as standard TTL levels (0 V is logic
true, +5 V is logic false).
Input Load >= 2.2 kOhm against +5 V
Output type is open collector.
Remote control timing

7890 Series GC IPB

471

12 Electrical

Measuring inlet and detector heater and PRT resistance

If you suspect that an inlet or detector heater or PRT is
defective, you can check its resistance and compare against the
expected nominal values.
To check the resistance of an inlet or detector heater, or to
check the resistance of an inlet or detector PRT:
To measure the inlet or detector heater or PRT resistance:
1 Turn off the GC main power switch and disconnect its power

cord.

WA R N I N G

CAUTION

Hazardous voltages are present in the mainframe when the GC

power cord is connected. Avoid a potentially dangerous shock
hazard by disconnecting the power cord before removing any GC
panels.

Components can be damaged by static electricity: be sure to wear

an ESD strap grounded to the GC chassis while performing this
procedure.
2 Remove the GC panels required to access the zone's

heater/sensor connector to be tested.

For inlets, remove the inlet cover and GC left side panel
For detectors, remove the electronics cover and GC right
side panel

472

7890 Series GC IPB

Electrical

12

3 Remove the connector from the GC chassis.

4 Use an Ohmmeter to measure the resistance across the

connector pins of the heater/sensor cable.

For heated zones the PRT is connected to the white wires
on pins 2 and 3 of the connector.
With the heater/sensor connector removed from the GC,
there should be no connection to ground on any of the
four pins. A reading of ~0 indicates a possible shorted
sensor or heater.
5 Compare the results against the resistance values in the

tables below.

7890 Series GC IPB

473

12 Electrical

Sensor resistance
The approximate resistance of a temperature sensor is:
R = 100 + (.35 t)
where R is resistance in ohms and t is sensor temperature in C.
Table 29 Temperature Sensor Resistance by Heater Temperature
C

+0

+10

+20

+30

+40

+50

+60

+70

+80

+90

+100

100.00

103.90

107.79

111.67

115.54

119.40

123.24

127.07

130.89

134.70

138.50

100

138.50

142.28

146.06

149.82

153.57

157.32

161.04

164.76

168.47

172.16

175.84

200

175.84

179.51

183.17

186.82

190.46

194.08

197.70

201.30

204.88

208.46

212.03

300

212.03

215.58

219.13

222.66

226.18

229.69

233.19

236.67

240.15

243.61

247.06

400

247.06

250.50

253.34

257.34

260.75

264.14

267.52

270.89

274.25

277.60

280.93

Nominal inlet and detector heater/sensor resistances

474

Inlet or Detector

Heater type

Nominal heater
resistance

Sensor
type/comments

Split/splitless

70 W

23

100 PRT

Purged packed

70 W

23

100 PRT

Cool on-column

60 W

26-27

100 PRT

Multimode

150 W

~9

Type K
Thermocouple
Resistance, cold: ~
13

PTV

150 W

~9

Type K
Thermocouple
Resistance, cold: ~
13

Volatiles interface 60 W

26-27

100 PRT

FID

70 W

23

100 PRT

TCD

70 W

23

100 PRT

NPD

70 W

23

100 PRT

uECD

70 W

23

100 PRT

FPD

60 W (2 each)

26-27

100 PRT (2 each)

7890 Series GC IPB

Electrical

12

Temperature sensor resistance

The approximate resistance of a temperature sensor is:
R = 100 + (.35 x t)
where R is resistance in ohms and t is sensor temperature in C.
Table 30 Temperature Sensor Resistance by Heater Temperature
C

+0

+10

+20

+30

+40

+50

+60

+70

+80

+90

+100

100.00

103.90

107.79

111.67

115.54

119.40

123.24

127.07

130.89

134.70

138.50

100

138.50

142.28

146.06

149.82

153.57

157.32

161.04

164.76

168.47

172.16

175.84

200

175.84

179.51

183.17

186.82

190.46

194.08

197.70

201.30

204.88

208.46

212.03

300

212.03

215.58

219.13

222.66

226.18

229.69

233.19

236.67

240.15

243.61

247.06

400

247.06

250.50

253.34

257.34

260.75

264.14

267.52

270.89

274.25

277.60

280.93

7890 Series GC IPB

475

12 Electrical

Oven heater coil resistance

If you believe that your heater coil is cracked or otherwise
damaged and has caused an open circuit, you can check it by
measuring its resistance.
To measure the resistance:
1 Turn the instrument power off.
2 Disconnect the oven heater leads (P3, P4) from the AC power

board.
3 Use an ohmmeter to measure resistance at the connectors.

Acceptable resistance ranges (in ohms) are given below.

Acceptable resistances range from the nominal value for a new,
cold heater to +5% from the nominal value.

NOTE

Resistance goes up approximately +3% after heating the coil.

Table 31 Resistances of the Heater Coil

Nominal cold heater resistances, ohms

476

Standard oven (1600

VA)

Fast-ramp oven (2250

VA)

120 V

9.07 9.52

n/a

200 V

n/a

17.78 18.7

220 V

n/a

21.51 22.6

230 V

33.06 34.71

23.51 24.7

240 V

n/a

25.60 26.9

7890 Series GC IPB

Electrical

12

Setting the instrument power configuration

There are seven possible line voltage power configurations for
the GC.
To change the power configuration for the instrument, you must
install the appropriate types of the following components:
Line voltage configuration plug
Ceramic fuses on the AC power board
Oven shroud assembly
These three components are explained in the topics that follow.
Table 32 Voltage configuration information
Voltage (10%, +5%)

Frequency (Hz)

Maximum power
consumption (VA)

Power line
requirement

Oven type

120 V

48-66

2,250

20-amp dedicated
receptacle

Regular

200 V

48-66

2,950

15-amp dedicated
receptacle

Fast-heating

208 V

48-66

2,950

15-amp dedicated
receptacle

Fast-heating

220 V

48-66

2,950

15-amp dedicated
receptacle

Fast-heating

230 V

48-66

2,250

10-amp dedicated
receptacle

Regular

230 V

48-66

2,950

16-amp dedicated
receptacle

Fast-heating

240 V

48-66

2,950

13- or 16-amp
dedicated receptacle

Fast-heating

7890 Series GC IPB

477

12 Electrical

Line voltage configuration plug

There is a different line voltage configuration plug on the AC
power board for each power configuration. Each configuration
uses three or five jumper wires, each connecting to two
different pins on the plug. The 120 VAC configuration uses five
jumper wires and all other configurations use three jumper
wires.

Figure 14 Top view

Jumper locations for power configuration plug

Transformer

120 VAC

200 VAC

208/220 VAC

230 VAC

240 VAC

3 13

2 13

3 13

5 13

3 13

6 15

6 12

6 12

69

69

14

14

14

14

9 14
Oven fan

1 10
48

478

7890 Series GC IPB

Electrical

12

Ceramic and glass fuses

The two sets of fuses on the G3440A AC power board:
Two ceramic fuses to protect the board from the oven heating
circuit (F1, F2)
Two glass fuses to protect the board from the main supply
(F3, F4)

See the table below for the part numbers. When replacing both
the glass and ceramic fuse types, always replace them in pairs.
I.D.

Description

System

Part number

F1

Ceramic Type F 20A/250 V

Oven heater

2110-0098

F2

Ceramic Type F 20A/250 V

Oven heater

2110-0098

F3

Glass Type F 8A/250 V

Main supply

2110-0036

F4

Glass Type F 8A/250 V

Main supply

2110-0036

7890 Series GC IPB

479

12 Electrical

AC power board schematic

The AC power board supplies AC power to the oven heater and
to the main transformer.

480

7890 Series GC IPB

Electrical

12

Oven shroud
There are two different oven shrouds depending on the power
option used. The oven shroud contains the oven heater and
sensor as part of the assembly. If you need to replace the heater
or sensor, you should replace the entire shroud assembly. See
Replacing the oven shroud, oven fan, and oven fan motor for
more details.
Table 33 Part numbers for Oven Shrouds and Configuration Plugs
Voltage

Shroud part no.

Configuration plug part

no.

120 V

G1530-61610

G1530-60690

230 V

G1530-61670

G1530-60720

Regular oven shrouds

Fast ramping oven shrouds

7890 Series GC IPB

200 V

G1530-61620

G1530-60700

208 V

G1530-61630

G1530-60710

220 V

G1530-61630

G1530-60710

230 V

G1530-61650

G1530-60720

240 V

G1530-61640

G1530-60730

481

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

13 Firmware
Firmware overview 483
To Update GC Firmware 484
Firmware history 487
Confirm firmware update 495
Problems and solutions 496
Clearing battery-backed PF-RAM (7890A only)
Set the default method 500
Default method listing 501

497

Agilent Technologies

482

Firmware

13

Firmware overview
The firmware is the programming that controls the entire GC.
Periodic updates to correct errors and/or add features are
available from the Agilent Web site and may be downloaded to
the GC using the Agilent G4600AA Instrument Utilities
software that shipped with the 7890A GC.
To successfully update GC firmware, you can use any version of
the Instrument Utilities software. Do not use any other
firmware update utility. To access the firmware update utility
in Instrument Utilities, open the software and look for the
Firmware Update link. You do not need to be monitoring the
instrument.
About 160 7890A GCs were shipped to channel partners,
distributors, and regional sales offices with very early versions
of firmware. Contact the CAS factory problem manager (FPM)
for instructions on how to update these units.
The latest version of Instrument Utilities software includes the
ability to update the board serial number in the event that this
was not done at the GC after replacing the logic board. (It is still
best to update the serial number at the GC front panel after
changing the logic board.) This version can also successfully
update GCs without a manufacture date.

7890 Series GC IPB

483

13 Firmware

To Update GC Firmware
To update the GC firmware, use Agilent Instrument Utiltiies,
version B.01.06 or greater. When possible always use the latest
version of Instrument Utilities.
The software maintains configuration information (including
serial number) when updating a GC. However, any stored
methods are lost. Click Restore to restore the active method after
updating firmware.

NOTE

The Firmware Update utility requires full control of the instrument. Be

sure to disconnect any Agilent data systems before using the Firmware
Update utility.
1 Open Instrument Utilities.

NOTE

Once you connect to an instrument in the Firmware Update screen, no

other tasks can be performed on the instrument until you Disconnect.

2 Make sure the instrument/component is turned on and not in

use. Make sure any sampler or other device is also connected

and turned on.
3 Record any information about the device stored in the device

itself, for example, any local methods or service information

(Early Maintenance Feedback counters, runtime details, and
so forth).
4 Select Firmware Update from the explorer pane.
5 Select the desired instrument from the Instrument list and

click Connect.

If it is not available, click Add New Instrument to open

Configure Instruments. Add the new instrument, then return
to firmware update.
6 Highlight the row of the component you wish to update.
7 Select the desired firmware version from the Available

drop-down list. If the desired firmware version is not

available, add it as follows:
a Go to the Agilent web site at

http://www.chem.agilent.com/en-US/Support/Downloads
/firmware/Pages/default.aspx.
b Download the updated firmware for your instrument type.
484

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

c Unzip the firmware file(s).

d In the Firmware Update utility, click Add. Browse to and

select the files unzipped in the previous step. The new

firmware version will now appear in the Available
drop-down list.
8 Click Update.
9 When prompted, save the active method and configuration

data. You will restore the data from this file in a later step.

WA R N I N G

Do not turn off power to the device during firmware update.

10 When the process completes, the instrument reboots.

Reconnect to the instrument, then click Restore. Select the

previously-saved data file to restore the active method.

11 Click Disconnect to disconnect the firmware update utility

from the instrument.

7890 Series GC IPB

485

13 Firmware

Troubleshooting problems
If the Instrument Utilities fails to connect to the GC, reboot the
PC and try again.
If the firmware does not completely download to the GC, reboot
the GC and try again. (Note that firmware download takes time,
so be patient.)
If the firmware update fails, try again. Reboot the GC and PC if
needed.

486

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

Firmware history
NOTE

The firmware history here is up to date as of the release of this manual.

Check service notes and the firmware download site (Agilent internal:
http://cas.service.agilent.com/gc/Firmware/firmware_file_downloads.h
tm) for more recent firmware versions and information.
Serial number <= number in table - the unit could be updated to
the latest revision.
Serial number > number in the table - the unit should already
have this revision or greater.
Revision

CN serial number US serial number

break
break

Service note

A.01.10.2

TBD

TBD

G3440A-45

A.01.10.1

TBD

TBD

G3440A-41, -39

A.01.10

TBD

TBD

G3440A-37

A.01.09.2

TBD

TBD

G3440-31

A.01.09.1

CN10839078

TBD

G3440-30

A.01.09

CN10831XXX

US10831015

G3440A-27

A.01.08

TBD

TBD

G3440A-20

A.01.07

CN10751086

US10751031

G3440A-18

A.01.06

CN10738001

US10737020

A.01.05

CN10731026

US10731014

A.01.04

CN10722043

US10722003

G3440A-05

A.01.03

CN10717036

US10717009

G3440A-04

A.01.02.581

CN10716014

US10715013

G3440A-03

A.01.02

CN10708001

US10710002

G3440A-

B.01.01

Externally, firmware downloads are available from the Agilent

web site.
Internally, go to:
http://cas.service.agilent.com/gc/Firmware/firmware_file_dow
nloads.htm (link active as of October 2009)

7890 Series GC IPB

487

13 Firmware

7890 A.01.10.2
Described in Service note G3440A-45
Fixes: 7890 GC keypad now allows entry of serial numbers for
injectors and tray. In certain circumstances the oven will not
shut down if it cannot reach temperature for reasons such as an
oven flap failure - This has now been fixed. Lab advisor can now
connect to the GC whilst it is in MMON mode resolving
firmware download connection problems. 7890 GC can now
store barcode labels that contain more than 34 characters
Injector light" is inconsistent with 7890 "Tower LED".
The error pertaining to the oven shut down may case very hot
air to be continuously released through the oven vent. It is
advisable therefore that this firmware be installed on the GC at
next visit. After installation of this firmware it is not necessary
to requalify either GC nor the ALS. Firmware files can be
obtained externally at http://www.chem.agilent.com/
_layouts/agilent/downloadFirmware.aspx?whid=50307 or
internally at
http://cas.service.agilent.com/gc/Firmware/firmware_file_dow
nloads.htm

488

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

7890 A.01.10.1
Described in Service note G3440A-41, G3440-39
The 7890A GC firmware, A.01.10.1 has recently been released.
Included in this firmware are not only enhancement and bug
fixes but diagnostic "watchdogs" to help resolve and track
possible future problems. Recent instrument failures have
occured that could have been avoided or troubleshot more
efficiently with the latest firmware installed.
GC Front/Back detector hardware fault (Team Track 02500)
Spurious error message. Error introduced in A.01.10. Evident at
power on. NPD Analog signal always 0.0V (Team Track 02501).
Error introduced in A.01.10. Digital Signal works OK. At times,
GC keyboard, UI & LAN response is sluggish/stalled (Team
Track 02502) PTV cryogenic cooling operating as per A.01.07.
Cryo did not control inlet during run. (Team Track 00233) Fixes
for External ready for 7820A. Fix method file upload and
download of inlet temperature ramps. Fix power up procedure
to not energize the small zone contactor when there is a shorted
driver. Fix detector thermal shutoff status messages. Fix
download of column calibration. Clean up small zone readiness
calculation. Fix small zone shorted sensor detection. Add delay
to valve state upload during a run. PVCS2476 Fix PTV Cryo for
SOLVENT VENT Time. Fix method download during a run for
non programmed zones. New PCOC PID's and control. MMI
Temperature minimum for MMI multimode inlet set to -180
degC (Team Track 00234) LVI with a 500ul syringe set incorrect
draw speed. (Team Track 00056) Fix Solvent Vent pressure
calculation, use gage pressure. Give MMI inlets 10 ramps. 7693
ALS 7890 System Calibration should fail if G4514A internal
calibration not completed (Team Track 00049) Tray LED does
not flash when G4514A does not find a bottle during return all.
(Team Track 00029). GC display updates BCR firmware revision
correctly after a firmware update. Tray chiller info and text
modified chiller temperature upper limit is now 60C. Give
MMI inlets 10 ramps Fix error in FPD single heater
configuration. Tray Chiller configuration items added under
Tray Config Tray Chiller temperature added to GC readiness
Sampler devices reset after a firmware update/SN change
causes 7890 to reconfigure QQQ Fix collision cell fault
messages. Add QQQ to system readiness, Add QQQ shutdown
test. Add QQQ diagnostic panels. Add Argon control mode to
QQQ based on ECD Nitrogen and Argon frit calibrations. Add
'QQQ' Collision cell gas controller Fix cannot pick collision cell
from aux epc list

7890 Series GC IPB

489

13 Firmware

7890 A.01.10
Described in Service note G3440A-37
Enhancements: Support for the 7693A ALS and associated
modules. Support for the 7000A Triple Quad GCMS. Support for
the MMI. Fixes: Fix PTV Cryo for SOLVENT VENT Time. Fix
method download during a run for non programmed zones. New
PCOC PID's and control. Fix missing small zone fault messages
and events. Fix download of column calibration. Clean up small
zone readiness calculations. Fix small zone shorted sensor
detection. Add delay to valve state upload during a run. Fix
power up procedure to not energize the small zone contactor
when there is a shorted driver. Fix detector thermal shutoff
status messages. Fixed readiness for external devices Fix
method file upload and download of inlet temperature ramps.

7890 A.01.09.2
Described in service note G3440A-31
Customers have been experiencing problems with oscillating
temperatures with the PCOC inlets of the 7890. When the inlet
was set to 50-80 degC, the temperature was seen to fluctuated
+/- 5 degC causing a not ready status. In some cases the
temperature would stabilize but only after a considerable length
of time. Replacing the heater or even the whole weldment may
or may not fix the problem.
Solution : The heating control coefficients (PIDs) have been
modified in the firmware to better control and resolve these
fluctuating temperatures. The new firmware revision is
A.01.09.2 If you have have a customer with a PCOC inlet,
regardless of whether they are experiencing temperature
problems or not, it is advisable to update the firmware to
A.01.09.2
Additional Information
In addition to the PCOC resolution one further problem has
been fixed with this version. It has been noted that the DC210
led on the logic board intermittently flashes when the normal
state is solid on. The status of this led does not affect the
normal operation of the GC. To avoid all confusion firmware
has now forced this led to lit all of the time.

490

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

7890 A.01.09.1
Described in service note G3440A-30
A list of defects fixed are as follows: Fix cryo trap for JAS Fix
oven cryo shutdown. Fix download during run for oven thermal,
and pressure zones. Fix download during a run for column flow
programs. PCM AuxC reports as PCM AuxB Not Ready
(p_aux.c) Fix detector makeup mode for download. Fix status
message for bad serial #. Fix entering zero value for analog out.
Fix analog out for detector OFF.

7890 A.01.09
Described in service note G3440A-027
Changes applicable to Customers and Support Providers are as
follows.
Able to specify Cryo Type for User Aux Heaters
Fixed analog out noise problem.
Turn on PMT voltage when FPD flame is turned ON.
Turn off FID air and H2 on ignition fail and gas shutdown
Enable test signals for valve box heaters
Add current limit to NPD SetBead voltage. If current exceeds
100pA during bead turn on, detector will turn off.
Add ColComp setpoints to method.
Add zone_limit to AuxHeater config reporting
Add several aux temp models for ICPMS
Fix reporting of AuxDet Heater On/Off
Remove Cryo Focus Valve configuration.
Add Configure Collision Gas Control Module.
Fix status display to not allow flow on COC.
Add Column Compensation output in analog and digital
modes (via config detector).
Network settings (IP address, DHCP etc) can now be
modified from the keyboard
while in MMON mode.
ALS appeared to go off line after 3 weeks of continuous use.
Power reset resolved issue. Now fixed.
(ALS firmware A.01.01)
Gaps in Bar Code Reader can now be read. (ALS firmware
A.01.01)

7890 Series GC IPB

491

13 Firmware

7890 A.01.08
Described in service note G3440A-020

7890 A.01.07
Described in service note G3440A-018

7890A.01.04
Described in service note.G3440A-005.
The following defects or perceived defects were fixed:
Fixed PTV inlet configuration defect where Install Inlet
(Cryo) was not a selection in the configuration list after a
power cycle.
Fixed the PCM Autoflow zero feature. Symptom would
include PCM issues when in flow control mode. Measured
flow is greater than flow displayed on screen. To confirm
problem, navigate to Options, Calibration, PCM and scroll to
Flow zero. Press Off / No to reset to factory defaults after
updating firmware.
Fixed symptom where pneumatic shutdown of PCM cannot
be cleared without fixing the leak and power cycling the GC.
Symptom may appear as PCM does not accept On / Yes or
entering a new flow or pressure.
Fixed symptoms where text alignment is incorrect and the
cursor disappears when Options | Keyboard & Display |
Language is set to Chinese.
Fixed symptom where GC method is not downloaded from
control software.
Fixed the symptom where GC triggers a thermal shutdown
with the flaps wide open. Chromatographic results indicate
that the flaps were partially open for several runs.
Fixed the symptom where the PP inlet behaves as if there is
an oven track temperature mode.
Fixed the symptom where no exception or error message is
displayed when back detector heater, logic board, or EPC
module is "broken."
Fixed the symptom where your cannot program User Key 2
until after programming User Key 1. If you go through the
steps of programming User Key 2 before User Key 1, the key
will not work.

492

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

Default configuration for the Auxiliary 2 Heater changed to

MSD transfer line.
The following modifications were added to enable channel
partners to configure and control their applications:
Increased the maximum temperature of a small heated zone
from 400 to 450C. Using this maximum on our standard
inlet or detector may cause damage to the instrument.
Added a lock to the configuration settings so that someone
cannot modify the configuration without turning the lock off.
The lock is located under Options | Keyboard & display. At
power On the lock is set to On.
Added the capability to specify the wattage of the heater for
a small heated zone: inlet, detector or auxiliary heater.
Added the capability to configure 3 custom heaters with
specific PID coefficients and store those coefficients.
Added the capability for our channel partners to configure a
variety of heaters.
The Valve Box heater can be configured as an independent
isothermal heater.
Added the capability to configure an Auxiliary heated zone
to have a maximum temperature between 40 and 450 C.
Adds the capability to configure a 140 watt inlet or auxiliary
heater and program it to heat between 1 to 5 C/min.
Added the capability to configure the PTV without a heater.

7890 Series GC IPB

493

13 Firmware

7890A.01.03
Described in service note G3440A-004.
The modifications in this firmware revision include:
Adjusts control of oven flapper. Eliminates flapper not
closing completely.
Improves communication using DHCP with lower baud rate
hubs. Lower baud rate hubs include the generation of early
twisted-pair hubs. An example hub is the Hewlett-Packard
J3128A AdvanceStack Hub-8e 10 base-T hub with the speed
of 10 Mb/sec.
Fixes this symptom: Aux EPC channel 6 always reads 0
pressure in the software Edit Parameters screen.

7890A.01.02.581
Described in service note G3440A-003.
The modifications in this revision include:
Prevents interruption of firmware update process when
using the standard tool.
Fixes sequencing with multi-position and gas sampling
valves.
Fixes the displayed flow when column inlet is unspecified for
SSL and PTV inlets. The flow was displayed as zero, even
though the flow was accurate.
Prevents inappropriate thermal shutdown for inlet, detector,
and AUX heated zones when they are heating slowly.
Fixes pressure setpoint ranges for Pneumatic Control Module
(PCM).
Eliminates cycling or multiple GC reboots after a power
cycle.

494

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

Confirm firmware update

Confirm the firmware update by pressing [Status][Clear]. The
display should look like this.

Agilent 7890A GC
A.01.09
Power on successful

The firmware update will become part of the GC's Event Log.
When upgrading 7890A GC firmware from:
A.01.0x to A.01.07, or from
A.01.03, A.01.04, and A.01.05 to A.01.08/A.01.09
configuration information can be lost. See document
G3430-90035. The information is especially important if also
upgrading OLCDS or GC ChemStation or MSD Productivity
ChemStation.
Please check the following setpoints on the GC:
Inlet and detector gas types - Config | <Front or Back><Inlet
or Det>.
Heater configuration. For example, the MSD transfer line
may need reconfiguration.
LAN configuration information - Options | Communications.
Serial number and manufacturing date - Service Mode |
Diagnostics | Instrument Status.

CAUTION

7890 Series GC IPB

If the GC does not have a valid serial number, you may have issues
connecting with the ChemStation software. If the GC does not have
a valid manufacturing date, the configuration settings will not be
saved and will be lost if you power cycle the GC.

495

13 Firmware

Problems and solutions

If the update is interrupted or there is a defect in either of the
boards, the update may fail. Click on the link to see more
information about each of these symptoms.
GC firmware update unsuccessful and GC reboots into
MMON mode
ALS firmware update incomplete

Possible solutions to unusual behaviors

At installation and after a firmware update, we have had some
communication issues between the GC and the software. The
symptoms include unexpected changes to configuration or to
method setpoints. Here are some suggested actions for
eliminating these symptoms.
Load the default method. Press Method.
Replace the logic board.
a From the keyboard and display, check the configuration

and method in the hardware.

1 From the software, upload the GC method.
2 From the software, select Instrument | GC Configuration.

Review the GC configuration after clicking on Get GC

configuration.
3 From the software, select Instrument | Edit GC

parameters. Review your method setpoints.

Save the method under a new name.

496

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

Clearing battery-backed PF-RAM (7890A only)

After updating to a firmware revision before A.01.06, clearing
all or part of the PF-RAM memory has eliminated some
symptoms, such as, heater faults and corrupted OLCDS or
ChemStation methods.
Clearing some or all of the memory forces the GC to reload
defaults. See Default method listing for a listing of the values.

Partial clear
This procedure resets both configuration and current setpoints.
Here is a listing of what is reset to defaults.
Configuration items: Oven, Display, Inlets, Detectors, Aux
EPC modules, PCM EPC modules, Valves, Thermal Aux, and
Valve box.
Sequence items: All items stored under the sequence
including: Sample numbers, Overlap, Auto-injector, and
Method number.
Current setpoints (Workfiles): GC and ALS setpoints.
Instrument state flags: Run states, Blank run, Power fail,
Method directory dirty, Status table, Analog column
compensation values.
Procedure
1 Power OFF the GC.
2 Press and hold down [Clear].
3 Power ON the GC.
4 When the GC Status screen appears on the display, release

[Clear].

Total clear
This procedure clears all of the battery-backed PF-RAM. In
addition to what is reset by holding down the Clear key, these
items are reset to defaults:
ID items: Serial number, IP networking setpoints, Uptime
clock, Column names
Other: Service counters, Event log

7890 Series GC IPB

497

13 Firmware

Procedure
1 Power off the GC.
2 Remove the left-side panel to access the logic board. Find the

small DIP switch (G3430-60100) or DIP switches

(G3430-60120 and G3430-60101) between the battery and the
large connector.
3 For the G3430-60120 and G3430-60101 boards, move the

switch to OFF. For the G63430-60100 (shown below), move

both switches away from you toward the GC oven. This is the
Off position.

4 Wait 5 minutes to allow the battery-backed RAM to clear.

5 Reset the battery switches to On (G3430-60100 shown).

498

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

6 Power on the GC. The GC will post some messages about

loading default configuration and method files.

7 Re-enter any lost configuration information, such as, gas type

and method setpoints.

7890 Series GC IPB

499

13 Firmware

Set the default method

To set the default method conditions, do the following:
1 Press [Method].
2 Scroll to the last line of the table: Set default method and press

[Enter].

3 Press [On/Yes] to confirm the request.

500

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

Default method listing

This page lists the default configuration and method setpoints
for the GC.
Instrument
Post run hold time = 0
Auto Prep Run = Unknown
Keyboard lock = False
Type of connection = LAN
GCName = blank
GCNotes = blank
Table 34 Inlets
COC

PP

PTV

SSL

VI

True

True

True

True

True

COC oven track

False

False

False

Septum purge flow

Septum purge state

On

On

On

Septum purge switching

False

False

False

Purge switching time

Total flow

18

Total flow state

Off

Off

Off

Control mode

Pressure

Pressure

Pressure

Temperature state

Off

Off

Off

Initial hold time

Initial value

250

250

250

Post run value

250

250

Pressure state

Off

Off

Off

Initial hold time

Initial value

689475.7

689475.7

689475.7

Post run value

689475.7

689475.7

689475.7

Cryo

Off

Off

Off

Cryo temperature

25

25

25

Time out detection

Off

Off

Off

Time out time

30

30

30

Fault detection

Off

Off

Off

Quick cool

Off

Off

Off

Determine readiness

7890 Series GC IPB

501

13 Firmware

COC

PP

PTV

SSL

Gas saver time

Gas saver flow

20

20

20

Gas saver state

Off

Off

Off

Operation mode

Splitless

Solvent
vent

Split

Split ratio

100

100

Purge flow

15

15

15

Purge time

0.75

0.35

0.75

Pressure pulse

689475

689475

Pulse time

0.75

0.75

Vi Inject time

Vent flow

100

Vent pressure

344737

Vent time

0.25

VI

Columns 1 to 6
Ignore ready = True; except for Columns 3 through 6 = False
Mode = Constant pressure
Flow state = Unknown
Initial hold time = 0
Initial value = 1; except for Column 1 where Initial value = 0
Post run value = 1
Oven
Ignore ready = True
Cyro = Off
Use Temperature = 0
Time out detection = Off
Time out = 0
Fault detection = Off
Quick cool = Off
Equilibration time = 3
Temperature state = Off
Initial hold time = 0
Initial value = 50

502

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

Post run value = 50

Auxiliary Thermal Zones
Thermal Aux 1, Determine readiness = True
Thermal Aux 2, Determine readiness = True
Thermal Aux 3, Determine readiness = False
Table 35 Detectors
FID

FPD

NPD

TCD

ECD

Determine readiness

True

True

True

True

Temperature

250

200

250

250

Heater

Off

Off

Off

Off

Fuel flow

40

75

Fuel

Off

Off

Off

Off

Utility flow

450

100

60

10

Utility

Off

Off

Off

Off

Makeup flow

50

60

30

Makeup

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Constant total flow

False

False

False

False

False

Total flow

Electronics

On

On

On

Off

Flame

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

State

Unknown

Unknown

Unknown

Unknown

Unknown

Off

Off

Off

Auxiliary flow and pressure control modules

For each of the 9 possible Aux EPC channels (AUX).
Determine readiness = False
For each of the PCM channels that function like a purged
packed inlet.
Determine readiness = True
Mode = Forward pressure control
Total flow = 0
Pressure = 689475.7

7890 Series GC IPB

503

13 Firmware

Pressure State = Off

Initial hold time = 0
Initial value = 689475.7
Post run value = 689475.7
For each of the PCM channels that function like an Aux EPC
channel.
Determine readiness = False
Pressure state = Off
Initial hold time = 0
Initial value = 689475.7
Post run value = 689475.7
Valves
For GC x GC Valve.
GCxGC Valve sample time = 250
Modulation time = 60000
Valve idle state = Off
Delay time = 60000
For each of the 8 possible valves.
Valve initial state = Off
For Cyro-focusing valve.
Pre-run time = 1
Hold time =1

504

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware

13

Table 36 Automatic liquid sampler

Fan
Pre-wash A Reps
Volume
Draw speed
Dispense speed
Viscosity delay
Pre-wash B Reps
Volume
Draw speed
Dispense speed
Viscosity delay
Sample wash Reps
Volume
Draw speed
Dispense speed
Viscosity delay
Depth offset
Sample pumps Reps
Draw speed
Dispense speed
Viscosity delay
Depth offset
Sample volume
Draw speed
Viscosity delay
Depth offset
Injection dispense speed
Pre-injection dwell time
Post-injection dwell time
Large volume reps
Large volume delay
Post-wash A Reps
Volume
Draw speed
Dispense speed
Viscosity delay
Post-wash B Reps
Volume
Draw speed
Dispense speed
Viscosity delay

7890 Series GC IPB

Front injector
On
0
80
200
10
0
0
80
200
10
0
0
80
200
10
0
0
6
200
10
0
0
10
200
0
0
10
0
0
1
0
0
80
200
10
0
0
80
200
10
0

Back injector
On
0
80
200
10
0
0
80
200
10
0
0
80
200
10
0
0
6
200
10
0
0
10
200
0
0
10
0
0
1
0
0
80
200
10
0
0
80
200
10
0

505

13 Firmware

Tray
Temperature = 0
Barcode reader = false
Mixing intensity = Unknown
Time = 0
First sample preference = 2
Enable ALS tray = False
Overlapped injection mode = No overlap
Overlapped injection delay = 0
Service counters
Twenty (20) counter IDs set to a default number.
Enabled = False.
Signals
Each of the 4 digital signals are set to
Test Plot at 50 Hertz
Signal is saved = False.

506

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel

Partner Devices
Firmware overview for channel partners 508
Tuning a small heated zone 509
Thermal Aux Configuration 510
Valve Box Configuration 521
Inlet configuration 525
Cryo focus valve configuration 540
Cryo trap configuration 541
Detector configuration 543

Agilent Technologies

507

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Firmware overview for channel partners

This section contains instructions for installing and configuring

channel partner inlets, detectors, thermal aux zones, and cryo
focus valves, on an Agilent 7890 Series GC. Each section
includes information on:
How to wire your hardware
How to configure the GC to recognize your hardware
How to access the method parameter screen for your
hardware
For configuration of standard Agilent devices for the GC, see
the Accessory Installation sheets and the Agilent 7890A GC
Advanced User Guide or 7890B Operation Manual.

508

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Tuning a small heated zone

1 Disable the I and D terms. The D term is set to zero to disable

it, but the I term has an inverse effect, i.e. the larger the I
term the smaller its effect, so set the I term to its maximum
value.
2 Increase the P term as needed to achieve oscillation, then

decrease it until the oscillation is barely maintained. Note

the value of the P term, which we call Ku, and the period of
the oscillation in seconds, which we call Pu.
3 Use these values in one of the standard PID tuning methods,

such as Ziegler-Nichols, to calculate the PID terms.

For example: using Ziegler-Nichols tuning the PID values would
be:
P = Ku / 1.7
I = Pu / 2
D = Pu / 8
Ziegler-Nichols is probably a good tuning to use for any zone
that needs to be temperature programmed. It has a small
amount of overshoot but it settles fairly quickly. For zones that
don't need to be temperature programmed there are other
tunings that have less overshoot but are slower to settle, such as
Tyreus-Luyben tuning. The PID values using Tyreus-Luyben
tuning are:
P = Ku / 2.2
I = Pu * 2.2
D = Pu / 6.3
Reference: http://www.chem.mtu.edu/~tbco/cm416/zn.html

7890 Series GC IPB

509

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Thermal Aux Configuration

There are several control models to select for the standard
Agilent thermal aux zones. These include the AED transfer line,
the MSD transfer line, and the Nickel catalyst. This section only
covers the custom configuration of a thermal zone that is
available by selecting User configurable heater as the auxiliary
heater type during configuration. See the Agilent 7890A GC
Advanced User Guide or 7890B Operation Manual for
configuration of standard thermal aux zones.
Up to 3 thermal auxiliary zones can be configured. All 6 of the
GC's small heated zones are available for use. If cooling and
heating are required in the thermal zone's control, a cryo valve
is selected during configuration of a thermal zone.

Heater and cryo connection locations

Each heater connector has a 40 to 180 watt heater power supply
and a temperature sensor for the control loop. Labels on the
wiring harness near the connector identify the connection. The
labels match the GC display except for the FI or BI wiring
harness labels displayed as FINLET and BINLET.

510

Connector label / GC display

identifier

Connector location on GC

A1

Right side electrical compartment

position A1 (far left) on valve bracket
electrical harness

A2

Right side electrical compartment

position A2 (far right) on valve bracket
electrical harness

FI/FINLET

Left top side of GC frame adjacent to

front inlet

BI/BINLET

Left top side of GC frame adjacent to

back inlet

F-DET

Right side electrical compartment at

top position adjacent to front detector

B-DET

Right side electrical compartment at

top position adjacent to back detector

FV

Left top side of GC frame adjacent to

front inlet

BV

Left top side of GC frame adjacent to

back inlet

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Connections assigned to a thermal zone

Each Aux thermal zone can support one of two fixed heating
connections containing a heater and temperature sensor. When
one of the two allowed heater connections is configured to an
Aux Zone the other connection is not available for thermal zone
assignment. Additionally each thermal zone can support a cryo
valve.
Thermal Zone

Thermal Aux 1

Thermal Aux 2

Thermal Aux 3

Heater
Connection

Aux1 or
BI/BINLET

Aux2 or B-DET

FI/FINLET or
F-DET

Cryo Valve
Connection

BV

BV

FV

The User Configurable Heater allows heated zones ranging

from 40 watts to 180 watts.

7890 Series GC IPB

511

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Auxiliary Type Selection

After assigning a heater or heater and cryo valve to an Aux
thermal zone and rebooting the GC, you configure the type of
device requiring thermal control. This is done by selecting the
Auxiliary type: field from the configuration menu and pressing
the [Mode/type] key. Several Agilent standard devices are listed
along with a selection for a User configurable heater.
When configuring a device for thermal control that is not listed
you can select the User configurable heater and create a
custom thermal control model. All but the User configurable
heater control model have a fixed maximum device setpoint of
400 deg C. The only auxiliary type to support a cryo valve is
User configurable heater.
Auxiliary type

Use

AED transfer line

For the AED transfer line

MSD transfer line

For the Agilent GC/MSD transfer line

Nickel Catalyst

For the Agilent nickel catalyst

Unknown
User configurable heater

512

For creation of a custom thermal

device

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

User Configurable Heater

The control algorithm used to maintain a stable temperature
setpoint requires several constants in order to model the
thermal response of a physical device. These constants can be
modified to model a custom control device when the Auxiliary
type: is set to User configurable heater.

Custom heater parameters

The PID and Mass fields These fields allow entry of custom
constants for the Proportional, Integral, Derivative, and Mass
associated with a thermal device's control algorithm.
The Power field This field allows for entry of the maximum
power that the heater requires. This value must be within 10%
of the actual maximum or an error is generated.
The Maximum Programming Rate field Enter the maximum rate
that the temperature of the device can change from one
temperature to another in a fixed period of time. If this field is
left at the default value of zero, the device cannot be
temperature controlled.
The Maxmimum Setpoint field Enter the maximum setpoint
allowed for the custom thermal device. The GC will not allow
the user to enter a value higher than this number.
Sensor Pressing [Mode/Type] on this field brings up the
sensor type for selection. Select from RTD and TC.
The zone control model Pressing [Mode/Type] on this field
brings up the available zone control models summarized in the
table.

7890 Series GC IPB

Control Model

Use

SS

Isothermal zone with cryo

PTV

High power requirement with cryo and

the ability to program temperature
ramps during a run

COC

Low power requirement with cryo and

the ability to program temperature
ramps during a run

513

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Programmable temperature zones

The PTV and COC zone control models for the User
configurable heater Auxiliary type and the Unknown Auxiliary
type, allow a temperature program to be entered for the device
similar to that available on an Agilent standard PTV and COC
inlet.

514

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Cryo control model

This field is only displayed if a cryo valve is configured in the
hardware.
Pressing [Mode/Type] on this field brings up the available cryo
control models summarized in the table.

7890 Series GC IPB

Cryo control model

Use

PTV

A control model that is similar to the

Agilent PTV inlet.

CryoTrap

A control model that lowers a device's

temperature anywhere during a run
and then increase the device's
temperature at a later time during the
run.

515

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Configuring the thermal Aux zone (Firmware A.01.07)

1 With the GC disconnected from its power source, install the

device containing the heater and temperature sensor and

optionally install a cryo valve.
2 Plug the heater and sensor cable from this device into one of

the six small heated zone connections.

3 Optionally plug the cryo valve 24-volt power supply into the

FV or BV connector.
4 With all covers installed, attach the power supply to the GC

and power the GC on.

5 Unlock the GC configuration. Press the [Options] key, select

Keyboard & Display and press the [Enter] key. Scroll down
to Hard Configuration Lock and press the [off] button.
6 From the section above titled "Connections assigned to a

thermal zone" determine the Aux Zone (1, 2 or 3) that you are
using based on the heater connection.
7 On the GC keypad press [Config] [Aux Temp #] press the

number of the thermal zone 1, 2, or 3.

8 With Unconfigured: selected press the [Mode/Type] key on

the GC keypad and if necessary scroll to see all selections.

You must only make a selection that contains the GC
identifier for the heater zone that your device is attached to.
If a cryo valve is attached to the FV or BV connector, the GC
also displays a selection for your heater zone and a cryo
valve configuration. Press [Enter] to complete your selection.
9 When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC

by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.

From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
10 On the GC keypad, press [Config] [Aux Temp #] press the

number of the thermal zone 1, 2, or 3. The display now shows

your configured devices.
11 Scroll to Auxiliary type: and press the [Mode/Type] key on

this field to bring up the available Auxiliary types. Select

User Configurable Heater to create a custom thermal device
and press [Enter].
12 If a cryo valve is included in this Aux Temperature zone,

scroll to Cryo type: press the [Mode/Type] key and select the
coolant supplied to the cryo valve. Next scroll to Cryo

516

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

control model: and press the [Mode/Type] key and select a

suitable model from the list.
When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC
by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.
From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps.
On the GC keypad, press [Config] [Aux Temp #] press the
number of the thermal zone 1, 2, or 3. The display now shows
your configured devices.
13 Next scroll to and enter the initial values for Proportional

gain, Integral time, Derivative time and Mass. These values

are usually later modified based on empirical results until
stable thermal performance is achieved.
14 Scroll to Power (watts) and enter the maximum power used

to heat the device.

15 Scroll to Maximum programming rate and enter a rate of

temperature rise per minute that your device is capable of

achieving.
16 Scroll to Maximum setpoint and enter a value that is within

the safe operating temperature of the device.

17 Scroll to the Sensor: field and make sure the sensor type

agrees with your hardware. To change the sensor type, press

the [Mode/Type] key and select the RTD or TC
(thermocouple with conversion board) type.
When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC
by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.
From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps.
On the GC keypad, press [Config] [Aux Temp #] press the
number of the thermal zone 1, 2, or 3. The display now shows
your configured devices.
18 Scroll to Zone control model: and press the [Mode/Type]

key on this field to bring up the available zone control

models. Select a suitable control model and press [Enter].
When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC
by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.
From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps.

7890 Series GC IPB

517

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

On the GC keypad, press [Config] [Aux Temp #] press the

number of the thermal zone 1, 2, or 3. The display now shows
your configured devices.
19 Power cycle the GC to lock this configuration.
20 On the GC keypad press [Aux Temp #]. If other Thermal Aux

zones exist, press the keypad number (1, 2, or 3) for this

zone. This display the Thermal Zone's parameter list for
entering operating values for a method.

518

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Configuring the thermal Aux zone (Firmware A.01.08 and A.01.09)

1 With the GC disconnected from its power source, install the

device containing the heater and temperature sensor and

optionally install a cryo valve.
2 Plug the heater and sensor cable from this device into one of

the six small heated zone connections.

3 Optionally plug the cryo valve 24 volt power supply into the

FV or BV connector.
4 With all covers installed, attach the power supply to the GC

and power the GC on.

5 Unlock the GC configuration. Press the [Options] key, select

Keyboard & Display and press the [Enter] key. Scroll down to
Hard Configuration Lock and press the [off] button.
6 From the section above titled "Connections assigned to a

thermal zone" determine the Aux Zone (1, 2 or 3) that you are
using based on the heater connection.
7 On the GC keypad press [Config] [Aux Temp #] press the

number of the thermal zone 1, 2, or 3.

8 With Unconfigured: selected press the [Mode/Type] key on

the GC keypad and if necessary scroll to see all selections.

You must only make a selection that contains the GC
identifier for the heater zone that your device is attached to.
If a cryo valve is attached to the FV or BV connector, the GC
also displays a selection for your heater zone and a cryo
valve configuration. Press [Enter] to complete your selection.
9 When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC

by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.

From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
10 On the GC keypad, press [Config] [Aux Temp #] press the

number of the thermal zone 1, 2, or 3. The display now shows

your configured devices.
11 Scroll to Auxiliary type: and press the [Mode/Type] key on

this field to bring up the available Auxiliary types. Select

User Configurable Heater to create a custom thermal device
and press [Enter].
12 If a cryo valve is included in this Aux Temperature zone,

scroll to Cryo type: press the [Mode\Type] key and select the
coolant supplied to the cryo valve. Next scroll to Cryo control

7890 Series GC IPB

519

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

model: and press the [Mode/Type] key and select a suitable

model from the list.
13 To display all the configuration parameters select View

Custom Heater Conf and press [On/Yes].

14 Next scroll to and enter the initial values for Proportional

gain, Integral time, Derivative time and Mass. These values

are usually later modified based on empirical results until
stable thermal performance is achieved.
15 Scroll to Zone control model: and press the [Mode/Type] key

on this field to bring up the available zone control models.

Select a suitable control model and press [Enter].
16 Scroll to the Sensor: field and make sure the sensor type

agrees with your hardware. To change the sensor type, press

the [Mode\Type] key and select the RTD or TC
(thermocouple with conversion board) type.
17 Scroll to Power (watts) and enter the maximum power used

to heat the device.

18 Scroll to Maximum setpoint and enter a value that is within

the safe operating temperature of the device.

19 Scroll to Maximum programming rate and enter a rate of

temperature rise per minute that your device is capable of

achieving.
20 Power cycle the GC to lock this configuration.
21 On the GC keypad press [Aux Temp #]. If other Thermal Aux

zones exist, press the keypad number (1, 2, or 3) for this

zone. This display the Thermal Zone's parameter list for
entering operating values for a method.

520

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Valve Box Configuration

The GC allows for a valve box hardware configuration consisting
of one or two heaters in the valve box. An Agilent standard
configuration uses one or two 70 watt heaters in the valve box.
If you set the Custom Heater Conf. Parameter to [Off/ No] the
PID, Mass, and Power fields use values optimized for these 70
watt heaters and any custom setting is ignored.
You may also design a custom heated valve box with a need for
different heater parameters. To do this, set the Custom Heater
Conf. Parameter to [On /Yes] and enter custom values for the
PID, Mass, and Power fields.

7890 Series GC IPB

521

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Heater connection locations

Each heater connector has a 40 to 180 watt heater power supply
and a temperature sensor for the control loop. Labels on the
wiring harness near the connector identify the connection.

522

Connector label / GC display

identifier

Connector location on GC

A1

Right side electrical compartment

position A1 (far left) on valve bracket
electrical harness

A2

Right side electrical compartment

position A2 (far right) on valve bracket
electrical harness

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Custom heater parameters

Custom Heater Conf.
Set the value to [On/Yes] to enable your custom heater
parameters entered below. Setting the value to [Off/No] defaults
to the Agilent standard valve box values for these numbers.

View Custom Heater Conf.

Set the value to [On/yes] to display the custom heater field
values of PID, Mass, and Power.

The PID and Mass fields

These fields allow entry of custom constants for the
Proportional, Integral, Derivative, and Mass associated with a
thermal device's control algorithm.

The Power field

This field allows for entry of the maximum power that the
heater requires. This value must be within 10% of the actual
maximum or an error is generated.

7890 Series GC IPB

523

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Configuring the Valve Box Zone

1 With the GC disconnected from its power source, install the

custom heater(s) and temperature sensor(s). You can install

up to 2 heaters and temperatures for this zone.
2 Plug the heater and sensor cable(s) from the heater(s) into

the A1 and/or A2 small heated zone connection.

3 With all covers installed, attach the power supply to the GC

and power the GC on.

4 Unlock the GC configuration. Press the [Options] key, select

Keyboard & Display and press the [Enter] key. Scroll down
to Hard Configuration Lock and press the [off] button.
5 On the GC keypad press [Config] [Aux Temp #] and select

Valve Box.
6 With Unconfigured: selected press the [Mode/Type] key on

the GC keypad and select one of the following: Install Heater

A1; Install Heater A2; Install 2 htr A1 & A2.. Press [Enter] to
complete your selection.
7 When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC

by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.

From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
8 On the GC keypad, press [Config] [Aux Temp #] and select

valve box. The display now shows your configured heater(s).

9 To allow use of the custom heater parameters, scroll to

Custom Heater Conf. And press the [On/Yes] key.

10 To display all the configuration parameters select View

Custom Heater Conf and press [On/Yes].

11 Next scroll to and enter the initial values for Proportional

gain, Integral time, Derivative time, and Mass. These values

are usually later modified based on empirical results until
stable thermal performance is achieved.
12 Scroll to Power (watts) and enter the maximum power used

to heat the device.

13 Power cycle the GC to lock this configuration.
14 On the GC keypad press [Aux Temp #] and select Valve Box.

This displays the Valve box heating setpoint value for a

method.

524

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Inlet configuration
A custom inlet can be configured using a channel partner PTV
with or without a heater or cryo valve. Additionally a channel
partner PCM configuration allows an Agilent PCM flow control
to be used in a heated inlet control loop.
This section does not cover the configuration of the standard
Agilent inlet EPC modules. See the Agilent 7890A GC Advanced
User Guide or 7890B Operation Manual for the configuration
of Agilent standard inlets.

7890 Series GC IPB

525

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Hardware configuration
Use this table to determine the allowable hardware
configurations, where the hardware electrical connection must
be made, and the configuration to select for this hardware as
displayed by the GC. All hardware must be installed before
attempting to configure the inlet.
GC configuration
display selections

Hardware
Configuration

EPC wiring
connection

Heater wiring
connection

Cryo valve connection

Install Front Inlet

PTV + HTR

EPC1

FI

None

Install Front Inlet

(CRYO)

PTV+HTR+CRYO

EPC1

FI

FV

Install Front Inlet (NO

HTR)

PTV

EPC1

None

None

Install Front Inlet

PCM + HTR

EPC1

FI

None

Install Front Inlet

(CRYO)

PCM+HTR+CRYO

EPC1

FI

FV

Install Back Inlet

PTV + HTR

EPC2

BI

None

Install Back Inlet

(CRYO)

PTV+HTR+CRYO

EPC2

BI

BV

Install Back Inlet (NO

HTR)

PTV

EPC2

None

None

Install Back Inlet

PCM + HTR

EPC2

BI

None

Install Back Inlet

(CRYO)

PCM+HTR+CRYO

EPC2

BI

BV

Front inlet PTV

Front inlet PCM

Back inlet PTV

Back inlet PCM

526

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

EPC module installation

A PCM or PTV EPC installed in the standard EPC module
location for a front or back inlet can be custom configured as a
channel partner (CP) inlet by the GC. This requires removal of
the top EPC module cover.

7890 Series GC IPB

EPC wiring harness label

Location

EPC1

Left front EPC module slot

EPC2

Left back EPC module slot

527

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Heater and Cryo installation

Optionally install and attach your inlet device's heater and inlet
controlled cryo valve to the GC's wiring harness. This requires
the removal of the left side GC cover.

528

Wiring harness label

Location

FI

Left top side of GC frame adjacent to

front inlet

FV

Left top side of GC frame adjacent to

front inlet

BI

Left top side of GC frame adjacent to

back inlet

BV

Left top side of GC frame adjacent to

back inlet

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

The Inlet configuration display

Gas type
Pressing the [Mode/Type] key on this field brings up the choices
for carrier gases connected to an inlet. Select the carrier gas
going to this inlet and press the [Enter] key.

Cryo Parameters
These parameters are displayed when a cryo valve is included in
the hardware configuration.

Cryo type
Pressing the [Mode/Type] key on this field brings up the choices
for cryo gas connected to the inlet's cryo valve. Select the cryo
gas connected to the inlet's cryo valve and press the [Enter] key.
Changing this type requires rebooting the GC. This field
displays when a cryo valve is configured to the inlet.

Cryo
Use the [On/Yes] key to enable cryo cooling on this inlet. The
[Off/No] key disables cryo cooling. This field displays when a
cryo valve is configured to the inlet.

Use Cryo temperature

Enter a maximum temperature for cryo cooling activation. This
field displays when a cryo valve is configured to the inlet and
the cooling type is not air.

Cryo timeout
Enter a time in minutes for the cryo valve to close if no run has
started before this time elapses. This field displays when a cryo
valve is configured to the inlet and the cooling type is not air.

Cryo fault
The GC can shut down temperature control of the inlet if
setpoint is not reached in 16 minutes. Use the [On/Yes] key to
enable temperature shutdown on this inlet. The [Off/No] key
disables temperature shutdown. This field displays when a cryo
valve is configured to the inlet.

7890 Series GC IPB

529

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Custom heater parameters

The control algorithm used to maintain a stable temperature
setpoint requires several constants in order to model the
thermal response of a physical device. To access these
constants, from the inlet's configuration display select View
Custom Heater Conf and press [On/yes].

The PID and Mass fields These fields allow entry of custom
constants for the Proportional, Integral, Derivative, and Mass
associated with a thermal device's control algorithm.
The Power field This field allows for entry of the maximum
power that the heater requires. This value must be within 10%
of the actual maximum or an error is generated.
The Maximum Setpoint field Enter the maximum setpoint
allowed for the custom thermal device. The GC will not allow
the user to enter a value higher than this number.
Sensor Pressing the [Mode/Type] key on this field brings up
the sensor type for selection. Select from RTD and TC.
The Maximum Programming Rate field Enter the maximum rate
that the temperature of the device can change from one
temperature to another in a fixed period of time. If this field is
left at the default value of zero, the device cannot be
temperature controlled. An inlet with a zone control model of
PTV or COC requires a non-zero valve to allow temperature
programming.
The zone control model Pressing the [Mode/Type] key on this
field brings up the available zone control models summarized in
the table below.
Control Model

Use

SS

Isothermal zone with cryo

PTV

High power requirement with cryo and the ability to program temperature ramps during a run

COC

Low power requirement with cryo and the ability to program temperature ramps during a run

Programmable temperature inlets

The PTV and COC zone control models allow a temperature
program to be entered for the device similar to that available on
an Agilent standard PTV and COC inlet. The SS zone control

530

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

model is for isothermal control and therefore can't be

programmed.

Configured hardware
The last few lines of the inlet's configuration screen lists the
hardware controlled by the inlet. One line shows the EPC
modules slot location and type. Another line indicates the
heater used and its wattage, and the final line the cryo valve
use.

7890 Series GC IPB

531

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Configuring a custom inlet (Firmware A.01.05)

1 With the GC disconnected from its power source, install a

PCM or PTV EPC module in the front or back inlet EPC

module location. Plug the EPC module into the correct
wiring harness connector. See EPC module location above.
2 Optionally install the inlet device containing the heater and

temperature sensor.
3 Plug the heater and sensor cable from this device into one of

the inlet's heated zone connections. See the "Heater and Cryo
Installation" section above for the wiring harness connector
to use.
4 Optionally install a cryo valve and plug it into the 24 volt

power supply into the FV or BV connector.

5 With all covers installed, attach the power supply to the GC

and power the GC on.

6 Unlock the GC configuration. Press the [Options] key, select

Keyboard & Display and press the [Enter] key. Scroll down
to Hard Configuration Lock and press the [off] button.
7 On the GC keypad press [Config] [Front Inlet] for the

configuration of a front inlet device or [Config] [Back Inlet]

for the configuration of a back inlet device.
8 With Unconfigured: selected press the [Mode/Type] key on

the GC keypad and if necessary scroll to see all selections.

See the table in the Hardware Configuration section for the
correct display line to select. Press [Enter] to complete your
selection.
9 When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC

by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.

From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
10 Select the configuration display for this inlet. The display

now shows your configured hardware devices.

11 Scroll to Gas type: and press the [Mode/Type] key on this

field to bring up the available carrier gas types. Select the gas
type attached to the inlet and press [Enter].
12 If a cryo valve is included in this inlet, scroll to Cryo type:

press the [Mode\Type] key and select the coolant supplied to

the cryo valve. Set the Cryo, Cryo timeout, and Cryo fault
parameters as required. See above.

532

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

13 To display all the configuration parameters select View

Custom Heater Conf and press [On/Yes]. This displays all

the heater parameters that can be set.
14 Scroll to Zone control model: and press the [Mode/Type]

key on this field to bring up the available zone control

models. Select a suitable control model and press [Enter].
15 Next scroll to and enter the initial values for Proportional

gain, Integral time, Derivative time and Mass. These values

are usually later modified based on empirical results until
stable thermal performance is achieved.
16 Scroll to the Sensor: field and make sure the sensor type

agrees with your hardware. To change the sensor type, press

the [Mode\Type] key and select the RTD or TC
(thermocouple with conversion board) type.
17 Scroll to Power (watts) and enter the power used to heat the

device.
18 Scroll to Maximum setpoint and enter a value that is within

the safe operating temperature of the device.

19 Scroll to Maximum programming rate and enter a rate of

temperature rise per minute that your device is capable of

achieving. This setting is not used with the SS zone control
model which does not allow temperature programming.
20 Power cycle the GC to lock this configuration.
21 On the GC keypad press [Front Inlet] or [Back Inlet] to

display the inlet's parameter list for entering operating

values for a method.

7890 Series GC IPB

533

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Configuring a custom inlet (Firmware A.01.07)

1 With the GC disconnected from its power source, install a

PCM or PTV EPC module in the front or back inlet EPC

module location. Plug the EPC module into the correct
wiring harness connector. See EPC module location above.
2 Optionally install the inlet device containing the heater and

temperature sensor.
3 Plug the heater and sensor cable from this device into one of

the inlet's heated zone connections. See the "Heater and Cryo
Installation" section above for the wiring harness connector
to use.
4 Optionally install a cryo valve and plug it into the 24 volt

power supply into the FV or BV connector.

5 With all covers installed, attach the power supply to the GC

and power the GC on.

6 Unlock the GC configuration. Press the [Options] key, select

Keyboard & Display and press the [Enter] key. Scroll down
to Hard Configuration Lock and press the [off] button.
7 On the GC keypad press [Config] [Front Inlet] for the

configuration of a front inlet device or [Config] [Back Inlet]

for the configuration of a back inlet device.
8 With Unconfigured: selected press the [Mode/Type] key on

the GC keypad and if necessary scroll to see all selections.

See the table in the Hardware Configuration section for the
correct display line to select. Press [Enter] to complete your
selection.
9 When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC

by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.

From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
10 Select the configuration display for this inlet. The display

now shows your configured hardware devices.

11 Scroll to Gas type: and press the [Mode/Type] key on this

field to bring up the available carrier gas types. Select the gas
type attached to the inlet and press [Enter].
12 If a cryo valve is included in this inlet, scroll to Cryo type:

press the [Mode\Type] key and select the coolant supplied to

the cryo valve.

534

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC

by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.
From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
Select the configuration display for this inlet.
13 Set the Cryo, Cryo timeout, and Cryo fault parameters as

required. See above.

14 Scroll to Zone control model: and press the [Mode/Type]

key on this field to bring up the available zone control

models. Select a suitable control model and press [Enter].
When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC
by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.
From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
Select the configuration display for this inlet.
15 To display all the configuration parameters select View

Custom Heater Conf and press [On/Yes]. This displays all

the heater parameters that can be set.
16 Next scroll to and enter the initial values for Proportional

gain, Integral time, Derivative time and Mass. These values

are usually later modified based on empirical results until
stable thermal performance is achieved.
17 Scroll to Power (watts) and enter the power used to heat the

device.
18 Scroll to Maximum setpoint and enter a value that is within

the safe operating temperature of the device.

19 Scroll to Maximum programming rate and enter a rate of

temperature rise per minute that your device is capable of

achieving. This setting is not used with the SS zone control
model which does not allow temperature programming.
20 Scroll to the Sensor: field and make sure the sensor type

agrees with your hardware. To change the sensor type, press

the [Mode\Type] key and select the RTD or TC
(thermocouple with conversion board) type.
21 Power cycle the GC to lock this configuration.

7890 Series GC IPB

535

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

22 On the GC keypad press [Front Inlet] or [Back Inlet] to

display the inlet's parameter list for entering operating

values for a method.

536

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Configuration procedure
1 With the GC disconnected from its power source, install the

device containing the cryo focus valve.

2 Plug the 24 volt actuator cable from this device into the FV or

BV connection.
3 With all covers installed, attach the power supply to the GC

and power the GC on.

4 Unlock the GC configuration.
5 Press the [Config] key and select cryo focus valve from the

list by scrolling to this entry and pressing [enter].

6 For Firmware A.01.05: Select the Cryo Focus valve attached

to FV or BV.
For Firmware A.01.07 through A.01.09: With
Unconfigured: selected, press [Mode/Type] and select the
Cryo Focus valve attached to FV or BV.
7 After rebooting the GC, selecting the configuration for this

cryo valve will show the valve properly associated to the FV

or BV connector.
8 To display the method parameters for the cryofocus valve

press the [Valve #] key. If other valves exist, scroll down to

set the Cryo focus equib time and Cryofocus delay time.

7890 Series GC IPB

537

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Configuring a custom inlet (Firmware A.01.08 and A.01.09)

1 With the GC disconnected from its power source, install a

PCM or PTV EPC module in the front or back inlet EPC

module location. Plug the EPC module into the correct
wiring harness connector. See EPC module location above.
2 Optionally install the inlet device containing the heater and

temperature sensor.
3 Plug the heater and sensor cable from this device into one of

the inlet's heated zone connections. See the "Heater and Cryo
Installation" section above for the wiring harness connector
to use.
4 Optionally install a cryo valve and plug it into the 24 volt

power supply into the FV or BV connector.

5 With all covers installed, attach the power supply to the GC

and power the GC on.

6 Unlock the GC configuration. Press the [Options] key, select

Keyboard & Display and press the [Enter] key. Scroll down to
Hard Configuration Lock and press the [off] button.
7 On the GC keypad press [Config] [Front Inlet] for the

configuration of a front inlet device or [Config] [Back Inlet]

for the configuration of a back inlet device.
8 With Unconfigured: selected press the [Mode/Type] key on

the GC keypad and if necessary scroll to see all selections.

See the table in the Hardware Configuration section for the
correct display line to select. Press [Enter] to complete your
selection.
9 When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC

by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.

From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
10 Select the configuration display for this inlet. The display

now shows your configured hardware devices.

11 Scroll to Gas type: and press the [Mode/Type] key on this

field to bring up the available carrier gas types. Select the gas
type attached to the inlet and press [Enter].
12 If a cryo valve is included in this inlet, scroll to Cryo type:

press the [Mode\Type] key and select the coolant supplied to

the cryo valve. Set the Cryo, Cryo timeout, and Cryo fault
parameters as required. See above.

538

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

13 To display all the configuration parameters select View

Custom Heater Conf and press [On/Yes]. This displays all the
heater parameters that can be set.
14 Scroll to Zone control model: and press the [Mode/Type] key

on this field to bring up the available zone control models.

Select a suitable control model and press [Enter].
15 Next scroll to and enter the initial values for Proportional

gain, Integral time, Derivative time and Mass. These values

are usually later modified based on empirical results until
stable thermal performance is achieved.
16 Scroll to the Sensor: field and make sure the sensor type

agrees with your hardware. To change the sensor type, press

the [Mode\Type] key and select the RTD or TC
(thermocouple with conversion board) type.
17 Scroll to Power (watts) and enter the power used to heat the

device.
18 Scroll to Maximum setpoint and enter a value that is within

the safe operating temperature of the device.

19 Scroll to Maximum programming rate and enter a rate of

temperature rise per minute that your device is capable of

achieving. This setting is not used with the SS zone control
model which does not allow temperature programming.
20 Power cycle the GC to lock this configuration.
21 On the GC keypad press [Front Inlet] or [Back Inlet] to

display the inlet's parameter list for entering operating

values for a method.

7890 Series GC IPB

539

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Cryo focus valve configuration

Use the cryo focus valve when temperature control is not
required and the run must start out with a relatively low
temperature in a device which must be held for a fixed period of
time after the run begins. This valve is programmed to remain
open for a minimum time period prior to the run (equib time)
and a fixed period of time after the run begins (delay time).

Operation
The cryo focus valve control energizes the cryo valve actuator
for a minimum programmable time before a run begins and a
fixed amount of time after the run begins. These two time
setpoints are entered by the user pressing the [Valve] key and
then selecting the cryo focus valve from the valve list.
To start a run using manual injection, the user presses the [prep
run] key to actuate the valve. The run cannot start until the
equib time programmed elapses. The valve remains continually
energized from the time [prep run] is pressed until the delay
time programmed after the start run completes. The run starts
when the user presses the [Start] key. Using an automatic liquid
sampler or injection valve automates this process and it is only
necessary for the user to press the [Start] key.

Assigned connections
The cryo focus valve actuator is connected to the FV or BV 24
volt socket adjacent to the front and back inlet connections.

540

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Cryo trap configuration

This procedure applies to GCs with firmware version A.01.09.
Firmware A.01.09 or greater is required.
This procedure assumes that the cryo trap is installed such that:
the heater connects to the back inlet BI connector.
the valve actuator connects to back inlet BV connector.
To configure the cryo trap:
1 Press [Config], select Aux Temp # > Thermal Aux 1, press [Enter].
2 Press [Mode/Type], select Install BINLET with BV Cryo, press

[Enter].

3 Soft-reboot the GC. Press [Options], select Communications >

Enter > Reboot GC > [On/Yes] > [On/Yes].

4 Press [Config], select Aux Temp # > Thermal Aux 1 > [Enter].

Select Auxiliary Type: Unknown, press [Mode/Type], select User

Configurable Heater, press [Enter].

5 Soft-reboot the GC. Press [Options], select Communications >

Enter > Reboot GC > [On/Yes] > [On/Yes].

6 Press [Config], select Aux Temp # > Thermal Aux 1 > Cryo Type

(Valve BV): N2.

If Cryo Type (Valve BV) does not equal N2, then select Cryo Type
(Valve BV), press [Mode/Type], select N2 Cryo, press [Enter] then
[Clear].
7 Configure Aux 1 by scrolling to each entry listed below and

making the appropriate changes. After each step, press

[Clear] to ignore the reboot request. You will reboot later.
a Proportional Gain: 5.30, press [Enter] then [Clear].
b Integral Time: 10, press [Enter] then [Clear].
c Derivative Time: 1.00, press [Enter] then [Clear].
d Mass (Watt-sec/deg): 18, press [Enter] then [Clear].
e Power (Watts):

To find the watts to set here, scroll down approximately 6

positions to Back Inlet Status (BINLET). As an example, it
may read: BINLET (OK): 125 Watts. Use this reading (in this
example 125 Watts) as the parameter for Power (Watts).
Enter 125, press [Enter] then [Clear].

7890 Series GC IPB

541

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Cryo Control Mode > [Mode/Type]:

Cryo Control Type: PTV (ignore the first line, should already
be PTV)
Cryo Control Type: Cryo Trap, press [Enter] then [Clear].
g Zone Control Mode > [Mode/Type] > PTV, press [Enter]

then [Clear].

h Sensor > [Mode/Type] > Thermocouple, press [Enter] then

[Clear].

Maximum Setpoint: 400, press [Enter] then [Clear].

Maximum Programming Rate: 720, press [Enter] then

[Clear].

8 Soft-reboot the GC. Press [Options], select Communications >

Enter > Reboot GC > [On/Yes] > [On/Yes].

542

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Detector configuration
Use the following 3 tables to determine the component wiring
connections for the hardware configuration you are designing.
See the Agilent Advanced User guide for configuring Agilent
standard detector types.

7890 Series GC IPB

543

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

FID Signal 1 Detector Hardware Connections

The following table lists the hardware connections for an
Agilent standard FID. Additionally listed is the hardware
connections required for a channel partner primary FID signal
board with or without a secondary FID or AIB signal board.
GC configuration
display selection

EPC wire harness

connection

Heater wire harness

connection

Signal 1 Detector
Board wire harness
connection

Signal 2 Detector
Board wire harness
connection

FID

EPC3

F-DET

F-DET

None

FID + AIB

None

None

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET FID, No htr, No

EPC

None

None

F-DET

None

CPDET FID & Htr, No

EPC

None

F-DET

F-DET

None

CPDET FID & EPC, No

Htr

EPC3

None

F-DET

None

CPDET FID & EPC &

Htr

EPC3

F-DET

F-DET

None

CPDET FID & AIB &

Htr, No EPC

None

F-DET

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET FID & AIB &

EPC, No htr

EPC3

None

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET FID & AIB &

Htr & EPC

EPC3

F-DET

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET FID & FID &

Htr, No EPC

None

F-DET

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET FID & FID &

EPC, No htr

EPC3

None

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET FID & FID & Htr

& EPC

EPC3

F-DET

F-DET

AUX DET1

FID

EPC4

B-DET

B-DET

None

FID + AIB

None

None

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET FID, No htr, No

EPC

None

None

B-DET

None

Front detector

Back detector

544

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

GC configuration
display selection

EPC wire harness

connection

Heater wire harness

connection

Signal 1 Detector
Board wire harness
connection

Signal 2 Detector
Board wire harness
connection

CPDET FID & Htr, No

EPC

None

B-DET

B-DET

None

CPDET FID & EPC, No

Htr

EPC4

None

B-DET

None

CPDET FID & EPC &

Htr

EPC4

B-DET

B-DET

None

CPDET FID & AIB &

Htr, No EPC

None

B-DET

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET FID & AIB &

EPC, No htr

EPC4

None

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET FID & AIB &

Htr & EPC

EPC4

B-DET

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET FID & FID &

Htr, No EPC

None

B-DET

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET FID & FID &

EPC, No htr

EPC4

None

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET FID & FID & Htr

& EPC

EPC4

B-DET

B-DET

AUX DET2

14

In the above table, FID indicates a detector signal board with

igniter control support. CPDET FID indicates a channel partner
FID detector signal board without support for an igniter.

7890 Series GC IPB

545

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

AIB Signal 1 Detector Hardware Connections

The following table lists the hardware connections required for
a channel partner primary AIB signal board with or without a
secondary FID or AIB signal board. The first two entries under
Front Detector and Back Detector entries are for the standard
legacy Agilent AIB installations.
GC configuration
display selection

EPC wire harness

connection

Heater wire harness

connection

Signal 1 Detector
Board wire harness
connection

Signal 2 Detector
Board wire harness
connection

Install AIB with No

Heater

None

None

F-DET

None

Install AIB with

Heater

None

F-DET

F-DET

None

CPDET AIB, No htr, No None

EPC

None

F-DET

None

CPDET AIB & Htr, No

EPC

None

F-DET

F-DET

None

CPDET AIB & EPC, No

Htr

EPC3

None

F-DET

None

CPDET AIB & EPC &

Htr

EPC3

F-DET

F-DET

None

CPDET AIB & AIB &

Htr, No EPC

None

F-DET

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET AIB & AIB &

EPC, No htr

EPC3

None

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET AIB & AIB &

Htr & EPC

EPC3

F-DET

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET AIB & FID &

Htr, No EPC

None

F-DET

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET AIB & FID &

EPC, No htr

EPC3

None

F-DET

AUX DET1

CPDET AIB & FID &

Htr & EPC

EPC3

F-DET

F-DET

AUX DET1

Front detector

546

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

GC configuration
display selection

EPC wire harness

connection

Heater wire harness

connection

Signal 1 Detector
Board wire harness
connection

Signal 2 Detector
Board wire harness
connection

Install AIB with No

Heater

None

None

B-DET

None

Install AIB with

Heater

None

B-DET

B-DET

None

CPDET AIB, No htr, No None

EPC

None

B-DET

None

CPDET AIB & Htr, No

EPC

None

B-DET

B-DET

None

CPDET AIB & EPC, No

Htr

EPC4

None

B-DET

None

CPDET AIB & EPC &

Htr

EPC4

B-DET

B-DET

None

CPDET AIB & AIB &

Htr, No EPC

None

B-DET

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET AIB & AIB &

EPC, No htr

EPC4

None

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET AIB & AIB &

Htr & EPC

EPC4

B-DET

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET AIB & FID &

Htr, No EPC

None

B-DET

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET AIB & FID &

EPC, No htr

EPC4

None

B-DET

AUX DET2

CPDET AIB & FID &

Htr & EPC

EPC4

B-DET

B-DET

AUX DET2

14

Back detector

7890 Series GC IPB

547

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Aux Detector Hardware Connections

EPC wire
GC
configuration harness
connection
display
selection

Heater wire
harness
connection

Signal 1
Detector
Board wire
harness
connection

Signal 2
Detector
Board wire
harness
connection

Aux Detector
1
TCD

EPC5

A1 or A2 or
BI/BINLET

AUX DET1

None

AIB

None

None

AUX DET1

None

None

None

AUX DET2

None

Aux Detector
2
AIB

The Aux Detector 1 TCD installation requires an extension

cable to reach the EPC module and detector board located in a
side mounted enclosure. The heater and sensor for the Aux TCD
also requires an extension cable.

EPC module installation

Optionally install and attach your detector device's EPC module
to the GC's wiring harness.

548

EPC wiring harness label

Use

EPC3

Front detector EPC module

EPC4

Back detector EPC module

EPC5

3rd detector TCD EPC module

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

Detector Board Installation

Wiring harness label

Use

F-DET

Front detector board

B-DET

Back detector board

AUX DET1

3rd detector TCD board or AIB

AUX DET2

Aux detector board AIB

Heater installation
Optionally install and attach your detector device's heater to the
GC's wiring harness.

7890 Series GC IPB

Wiring harness label

Use

F-DET

Front detector heater

B-DET

Back detector heater

A1

3rd detector heater

A2

3rd detector heater

549

14 Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

Configuring a custom detector

1 With the GC disconnected from its power source, remove the

electronics side panel and install the detector boards in the

detector slots. See the section on configuration and plug the
correct communications cable into the board.
2 Install the detector optionally containing a heater and

temperature sensor. Plug the heater and sensor cable from

this device into one of the six small heated zone connections.
See the "Heater Installation" section above for the wiring
harness connector to use.
3 Optionally install an FID EPC module in the front, back, or

aux detector EPC module location. Plug the EPC module into
the correct wiring harness connector. See EPC module
location above.
4 With all covers installed, attach the power supply to the GC

and power the GC on.

5 Unlock the GC configuration. Press the [Options] key, select

Keyboard & Display and press the [Enter] key. Scroll down
to Hard Configuration Lock and press the [off] button.
6 On the GC keypad press [Config] [Front Det] for the

configuration of a front detector device or [Config] [Back

Det] for the configuration of a back detector device or
[Config] [Aux Det #] for the configuration of a Aux detector
device.
7 With Unconfigured: selected press the [Mode/Type] key on

the GC keypad and if necessary scroll to see all selections.

Select your hardware configuration from the list and press
[Enter] to complete your selection.
8 When the GC prompts to power cycle the GC, reboot the GC

by pressing the [Options] key and select Communications.

From this option scroll down and select the reboot option
and press [Enter] on the GC keypad. This soft reboot keeps
the GC configuration unlocked for subsequent steps. Power
cycling the GC forces you to unlock the GC configuration on
power-up.
9 Select the configuration display for this detector. The display

now shows your configured devices.

10 For an FID installation, scroll to Gas type: and press the

[Mode/Type] key on this field to bring up the available

makeup gas types. Select the gas type and press [Enter].
11 Power cycle the GC to lock this configuration.

550

7890 Series GC IPB

Firmware Instructions for Channel Partner Devices

14

12 On the GC keypad press [Front Det] or [Back Det] or [Aux

Det #] to display the detector's parameter list for entering

operating values for a method.

7890 Series GC IPB

551

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

15 Service Mode Diagnostics

Service mode overview 553
Detector diagnostics 554
Signal board diagnostics 555
Multiplexed ADC 556
Pneumatics 557
Power diagnostics 558

Agilent Technologies

552

Service Mode Diagnostics

15

Service mode overview

Service mode generates a series of tables that include
information that can help with diagnosing problems. For
example, the detector signal board diagnostic includes
information to verify a short in an FID ignitor. It also contains a
measurement of the Noise in the signal output.
To access the service mode diagnostics:
1 Press [Service Mode].
2 Scroll to Diagnostics and press [Enter].

The list of diagnostics that are available vary with your

configuration. Here is an example of a 7890A GC with 2 inlets, 2
detectors, an AUX module, and a PCM module.
DIAGNOSTICS
Instrument status
Front inlet
Back inlet
Front detector
Back detector
Auxiliary pressure (1,2,3)
Pcm B
Thermal PID control
Electronics

7890 Series GC IPB

553

15 Service Mode Diagnostics

Detector diagnostics
For example, the detector signal board diagnostic includes
information to verify a short in an FID ignitor. It also contains a
measurement of the Noise in the signal output.
To access the detector diagnostics:
1 Press [Service Mode].
2 Scroll to Diagnostics and press [Enter].
3 Scroll to <Front, Back, or AUX detector> and press [Enter].

The list of diagnostics that are available vary with your

configuration. Here is an example of an FID detector.
FRONT FID DIAGNOSTICS
Detector Signal
Pneumatics module
Hydrogen gas
Air gas
Makeup gas

554

7890 Series GC IPB

Service Mode Diagnostics

15

Signal board diagnostics

Service mode is a series of tables that include information that
can help with diagnosing problems. For example, the detector
signal board diagnostic includes information to verify a short in
an FID ignitor. It also contains a measurement of the Noise in
the signal output.
To access the detector signal board diagnostics:
1 Press [Service Mode].
2 Scroll to Diagnostics and press [Enter].
3 Scroll to <Front, Back, or AUX detector> and press [Enter].
4 Scroll to Detector Signal and press [Enter].

The list of diagnostics that are available vary with your detector.
Here is an example of an FID detector.
FRONT SIGNAL (FID)
Signal Value
Noise
High Voltage
Ignitor:
ADC Offset:
Input disable
Ignitor voltage
Mode:

7890 Series GC IPB

0.00V
60.1mV

0.0
0
12.9V
0.0A
Ref: 2.48V
Off
Off
Normal

555

15 Service Mode Diagnostics

Multiplexed ADC
This information is based on Service Mode | Diagnostics |
Electronics | Multiplexed ADC.
MULTIPLEXED ADC
Definition
Reading noise
Reading value
Offset
Gain counts/volt
Gain counts/ohm
Reference
Temperature
Reading value
Reading value
Reading value
Reading value
Reading value
Reading value

Oven rtd
159.8
1801821
54907
4173672
14607
95.446
1801887
-95
-180
198
64
-45

There is a multiplexed analog-to-digital circuit (ADC) for each of

the following resistance temperature detectors (rtd):
Oven rtd reading
Front detector rtd reading
Back detector rtd reading
Front inlet rtd reading
Back inlet rtd reading
Auxiliary 1 rtd reading
Auxiliary 2 rtd reading
Line Sense reading
Temperature ref reading
Atmospheric pressure reading
Minus 24V power supply rdg
Logic current reading
24 volt poser supply reading
Valve current reading
To view the diagnostics for a particular reading,
1 With the cursor on the Definition line, press [Mode/Type].
2 Scroll to the reading that you want and press [Enter].

556

7890 Series GC IPB

Service Mode Diagnostics

15

Pneumatics
This information is based on Service Mode | Diagnostics |
Electronics | Pneumatics.
PNEUMATICS
Atmospheric
pressure
24 Volt valve drive
Zero all pressure
sensors

14.715
26.71

To zero all of the pressure sensors, do the following.

1 Set all flows and pressures to zero.
2 Disconnect the supply gases.
3 Wait 30 minutes.
4 Press [Enter] and confirm.

7890 Series GC IPB

557

15 Service Mode Diagnostics

Power diagnostics
This information is based on Service Mode > Diagnostics >
Electronics > Power Info.
POWER DIAGNOSTICS
Front inlet
Front detector
Auxiliary 1
Back inlet
Back detector
Auxiliary 3
Logic current
Valve current
24 Volts
-24 Volts
Zone supply

558

166.5 watts
70.1 watts
0.9 watts
73.9 watts
63.6 watts
65.4 watts
1.370 amps
0.326 amps
26.66 volts
-27.03 volts
42.92 volts

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

16 Accessories and options

For convenience, the table below lists the accessories and

options for the 7890 Series GCs. Please refer to ELSA for the
latest and most accurate selections.
Table 37 7890 Series GC accessories and options
Accessory

Option

Description

Notes

G3451A

102

Packed inlet with EPC, septum

purge. 0100 psi operation.
Configured for 0.53-mm columns.

Incompatible with MSD software

G1701CA or later. Includes liners
and adapters/connectors for
0.53-mm, 1/8-inch, and 1/4-inch
columns.

G3452A

112

0100 psi Split/splitless with EPC.

G3460A

113

0150 psi Split/splitless with EPC.

Select for use with 0.100 id

columns. Not optimal for 0.530 id
columns.

G3454A

122

On-column capillary inlet with EPC.

0100 psi temperature-programmed,
on-column capillary inlet system
with EPC.

Order a cryo accessory kit for use

with subambient oven temperatures
or for faster cycle time to near
ambient. Order 19245-60590 for
manual injection with a fused silica
needle.

G3510A

7890A only Multimode inlet with

liquid CO2 cooling

Only one type of cryogenic source

(LN2 or LC02) is allowed per
instrument regardless of number of
cryogenic accessories.Not
compatible with PTV (or 2nd MMI
on 7890A). Incompatible with 2nd
FPD, #651, #887 or #221.

G3511A

7890A only Multimode inlet with

LN2 or air cooling.

Inlets

Agilent Technologies

559

16 Accessories and options

Table 37 7890 Series GC accessories and options

Accessory

Option

Description

Notes

G3510B

7890B only Multimode inlet with

liquid CO2 cooling

Only one type of cryogenic source

(LN2 or LC02) is allowed per
instrument regardless of number of
cryogenic accessories.Not
compatible with PTV (or 2nd MMI
on 7890A). Incompatible with 2nd
FPD, #651, #887 or #221.

G3511B

7890B only Multimode inlet with

LN2 or air cooling.

G3500A

130

Cap PTV Inlet, with EPC,

Septumless, LC02 0100 psi,
septumless head, LC02 cryo.

Temperature range 60 C to 450 C

with 3 ramps and 3 operating
modes. Split, Splitless, solvent
venting. Only one PTV inlet allowed
per GC. If using oven cooling, it
must also be LCO2 cooled. CTC and
septumless PTV requires a 23"
syringe (not included).

G3501A

131

Capillary PTV Inlet with EPC,

Septum Head, LC02 0100 psi,
w/septum head, LC02 cryo.

Temperature range 60 to 450 C

with 3 ramps and 3 operating
modes. Split, Splitless, solvent
venting.
Only one PTV inlet allowed per GC.
If using oven cooling, it must also be
LCO2 cooled.

G3502A

132

Capillary PTV Inlet with EPC,

Septumless, LN2 0100 psi,
septumless head, LN2 cryo.

Temperature range 160 C to 450 C

with 3 ramps and 3 operating
modes. Split, Splitless, solvent
venting.Only one PTV inlet allowed
per GC. If using oven cooling, it
must also be LN2 cooled. CTC and
septumless PTV requires a 23"
syringe (not included).

G3503A

133

Capillary PTV Inlet with EPC,

Septum head, LN2 0100 psi,
septum head, LN2 cryo.

Temperature range 160 C to 450 C

with 3 ramps and 3 operating
modes. Split, Splitless, solvent
venting.Only one PTV inlet allowed
per GC. If using oven cooling, it
must also be LN2 cooled.

G3504A

142

Volatiles interface with EPC. 0100

psi. Split, splitless, or direct
injection. Deactivated.

Calibrated for use with H2 or He

carrier gas only.

Solvent Vapor Exit Accessory for

use on Cool on column inlet

Includes retention gap, pre-column,

analytical column, valve and 50 uL
autosampler syringe.

G2399A

560

7890 Series GC IPB

Accessories and options

16

Table 37 7890 Series GC accessories and options

Accessory

Option

Description

Notes

G3461A

210

FID with EPC. Flame ionization

detector with EPC for packed and
capillary columns.

Includes adapters and connectors

for capillary, 1/8-inch and 1/4-inch
columns.

G3462A

211

FID with EPC, optimized for capillary

columns only.

Includes digital control of all

detector gases. Includes connectors
for capillary columns.

G3432A

220

TCD with EPC. Thermal conductivity

detector with EPC.

Includes adapters/connectors for

capillary, 1/8-inch and 1/4-inch
columns.

G3437A

221

TCD with EPC mounted on left side

of GC.

Includes adapters/connectors for

capillary, 1/8-inch and 1/4-inch
columns.Incompatible with MSD or
CTC

G3437B

221

7890B Only. Side-mounted TCD with Includes adapters/connectors for

EPC mounted on left side of GC.
capillary, 1/8-inch and 1/4-inch
columns. Incompatible with MSD.

G2397AD

231

Micro Electron Capture Detector

with EPC

Includes adapters/connectors for

1/4-in. and capillary columns.

Micro Electron Capture Detector

with EPC for Japan.

Includes adapters/connectors for

1/4-in. and capillary columns.

Detectors

G2398AD
G3435A

240

Single flame photometric detector

(FPD) with EPC.

For use with packed and capillary

columns (1/4-in. glass columns
require adapter p/n G1532-20710,
not included). Requires two heated
zones.

G3435B

240

FPD Plus with EPC. Single flame

photometric detector with EPC.

7890A+ and 7890B only. For use

with packed and capillary columns
(1/4-in. glass columns require
adapter p/n G1532-20710, not
included). Requires:

Two heated zones.

G3444A PCB enhancement kit.
A.01.05 OLCDS, B.07.00
MassHunter or higher.

7890 Series GC IPB

561

16 Accessories and options

Table 37 7890 Series GC accessories and options

Accessory

Option

Description

Notes

G3436A

241

Dual flame photometric detector

(FPD) with EPC with make-up gas.

For use with packed and capillary

columns. For use with packed and
capillary columns (1/4" glass
columns require adapter p/n
G1532-20710, not included). Not
Compatible with any heated valve
options. Requires two heated zones
and two detector circuit board slots.
Not compatible with rear ALS.

G3436B

241

Dual flame photometric detector

(FPD) with EPC with make-up gas.

7890A+ and 7890B only. Not

compatible with any heated valve
box options. For use with packed
and capillary columns (1/4-in. glass
columns require adapter p/n
G1532-20710, not included).
Requires:

Two heated zones. and two

detector board slots.

G3444A PCB enhancement kit.

A.01.05 OLCDS, B.07.00
MassHunter or higher.

G3495A

250

NPD (white ceramic bead) for

packed and capillary columns.

G3496A

251

NPD (white ceramic bead) optimized Includes connectors for capillary

for capillary columns only.
columns.

G3463A

252

NPD (Blos bead) for packed and

capillary columns.

For use with packed and capillary

columns. Includes adapters and
connectors for capillary and
1/4-inch columns.

G3464A

253

NPD (Blos bead) optimized for

capillary columns only (not for use
with packed columns).

Includes connectors for capillary

columns.

G3490A

201

MSD interface.

For use with Agilent 5975 Series

MSD or Agilent 7000A Triple Quad
GC/MS or 7200 Q-TOF GC/MS).
Uses one heated zone.

G3456A

206

Analog input board. Single-channel

analog input board to accommodate
an external detector.

Mounts in detector board position.

Cable included.

19232C

925

TCD to FID Series Adapter

Requires FID for packed columns

(#210 or G3461A).

562

For use with packed and capillary

columns. Includes adapters and
connectors for capillary and
1/4-inch columns.

7890 Series GC IPB

Accessories and options

16

Table 37 7890 Series GC accessories and options

Accessory

Option

Description

Notes

G3470A

301

Aux EPC.

Provides three channels of auxiliary

0100 psi electronic pneumatics
control.

G3471A

309

Pneumatics Control Module.

Provides two channels of EPC. One
channel is either flow or pressure,
the second is pressure only.

Occupies one of two aux slots

and/or one of two inlet slots.
Maximum of three.

G3469A

205

EPC headspace interface.

Required for the EPC-ready Agilent

7694 headspace sampler (G1289B).
Optional for the G1290B and
G1888A headspace sampler.

G2855B

888

Capillary Flow Technologies Dean

Switch Requires two detectors, two
columns and either PCM (preferred)
or aux EPC.

Enables "heartcutting". Switch

includes high temperature ferrules
and calculation SW CD.

G3180B

889

Capillary Flow Technologies Splitter

with Makeup Gas

Requires either aux epc or PCM.

Typical application is to split column
effluent to two detectors. Includes
hw and Calculator SW. Requires MS
Excel.

G3183B

890

Capillary Flow Technologies 3 way

splitter with Makeup Gas.

Typical application is to split column

effluent to three detectors. Includes
hw and Calculator SW.Requires
either aux epc or PCM. Requires MS
Excel.

G3181B

Capillary Flow Technologies Splitter,

unpurged

Enables leak free splitting of column

effluent to two detectors. Does not
include installation.

G3184B

CFT Unpurged Tee for MSD Transfer

Line.

Pneumatics

CFTs

G3486A

G3487A

7890 Series GC IPB

887

CFT Flow Modulator Accessory

requires 7890A GC w/SSL inlet, FID
, PCM, ALS injector, G2070BA SW
(Ver B.03.02).

2D Data analysis SW is neither

provided nor supported by Agilent.
Also requires G3487A Checkout Kit.

CFT Flow Modulator Checkout Kit,

Includes various parts for checkout.

Required use with 7890A CFT Flow

Modulator ( G3440A#887 or
G3486A).

563

16 Accessories and options

Table 37 7890 Series GC accessories and options

Accessory

Option

Description

Notes

G1472A

Purged Ultimate Union kit for

GC/MS system with mounting and
instructions. Installation and
Familiarization are included.
Optional installation service is not
required.

G3182-61580

CPM Union kit

High temperature, inert, leak free

column connector with oven
mounting bracket

G1580-61060

CPM-1/16" Tube Assembly Kit

This kit provides leak-free, inert

connection from GC valve to CPM
system

Cryo
G3465A

311

Cryogenic oven and inlet cooling w/

C02

Provides cooling for oven and up to

two cool-on-column inlets if
installed. Not compatible with GC
QQQ (7000 MS).

G3467A

311

Cryogenic oven cooling w/C02

Provides cooling for oven only. If

PTV inlet is present, it must also be
LCO2 cooled. Not compatible with
GC QQQ (7000 MS).

G3468A

312

Cryogenic oven and inlet cooling w/

LN2

Provides cooling for oven and up to

two cool-on-column inlets if
installed. Not compatible with GC
QQQ (7000 MS).

G3466A

312

Cryogenic oven cooling w/ LN2

Provides cooling for oven only. If

PTV inlet is present, it must also be
LN2 cooled. Not compatible with GC
QQQ (7000 MS).

G3478A

307

Adds a nickel catalyst (methanizer)

Requires availability of rear injection

port position. If two injection ports
are required, contact your sales
assist engineer for alternatives.
Compatible with PCM in rear
position. Not compatible with
capillary-only FID.

G1530-80650

306

Exhaust deflector

Miscellaneous

G3485A

564

Manual Pneumatics Carrier

7890A and 7890A+Only Fits on left

side of 7890A for housing unheated
valves. Incompatible with MSD.

7890 Series GC IPB

Accessories and options

16

Table 37 7890 Series GC accessories and options

Accessory

Option

Description

Notes

G3485B

Manual Pneumatics Carrier

7890B Only Fits on left side of

7890A for housing unheated valves.
Incompatible with MSD.

G2887BA

Simulated Distillation software for

ChemStation (included with #651).
Requires ChemStation. See G3506A
below.

7890B Only

G6586AA

Agilent LTM Control Software.

Provides software control for up to
four LTM modules on one Agilent
7890/6890 GC.

7890B Only

G2646-60500

Oven Insert Accessory for fast oven

temperature ramping. Cuts the oven
volume in half.

Only compatible when using rear

inlet/detector. If using MSD, inlet
and MSD must be in rear position.

G3444A

7890A Logic Board Enhancements

Kits.

7890A Only Makes 7890A ready for

FPD+, Integrated Intelligence
features, serial port enhancements.
Requries software upgrades for
A.01.05 OLCDS and MassHunter
B.07.00 or higher.

G3494A

Bar Code Reader with USB

Connection for 7890B

7890A requires:

G3444A enhancement kit

A.01.05 OpenLAB or later, or
B07.00 MassHunter or later

G3494B

Bar Code Reader with Serial

Connection for 7890B

7890A requires:

G3444A enhancement kit

Valves
G1580A

751

Heated, automated valve box for one

valve

G1581A

752

Heated, automated valve box for

two valves

G3480-67585

860

Kit to interface an upstream gas or

liquid sampling valve to a capillary
or Multi-Mode inlet for sample
splitting and introduction into a
capillary or megabore column.

G2739A

Liquid sampling valve plumbing kit

G2740A

Gas valve plumbing kit

G2741A

Adds an adjustable restrictor to

control gas flows.

7890 Series GC IPB

Max temp of 225 C.

565

16 Accessories and options

Table 37 7890 Series GC accessories and options

Accessory

Option

Description

G2742A

874

Kit to interface a capillary inlet or

multimode inlet to a valve located
downstream

G2743A

7890A actuator kit. Adds automation

to a 7890 valve. It consists of an
actuator and solenoid valve.

G2743B

7890 Actuator Kit. Adds automation

to 7890 valve system for 7890 with
S/N = CN10201096 or later, or for
7890 S/N = US10281001 or later.

G2744A

Adds a heated zone to a 7890 valve

box

Notes

G2748A

861

Hardware kit to mount an unheated

gas sampling or liquid sampling
valve on the left side of the oven.

Incompatible with MSD. Requires

side carrier.

G3478A

307

Adds a nickel catalyst (methanizer)

to a 7890 Gas Chromatograph

Requires availability of rear injection

port position. If two injection ports
are required, contact your sales
assist engineer for alternatives.
Compatible with PCM in rear
position.

High Pressure Injection Device

Accessory. Requires SSL inlet and
one flow source from Aux EPC or
PCM module. User must provide
appropriate hardware to interface
sample to HPID.

Only one can be installed, front

position only.

G3505A

G4338A

872

0.53 mm Column to Valve Interface

Requires mounting plate

05890-80660. Each plate can hold 5
interface adaptors.

G4339A

873

0.32 mm Column to Valve Interface

Requires mounting plate

05890-80660. Each plate can hold 5
interface adaptors.

566

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

17 Printed circuit boards

Summary of PCB Part Numbers 568
AC power board 569
Analog and power board 570
Logic and communications board (7890A) 572
Logic and communications board (7890B) 573
FID signal board 574
TCD signal board 575
uECD signal board 576
FPD signal board 577
NPD signal board 578
FID electrometer board 579
uECD electrometer board 580
NPD electrometer board 581
Analog input board 582
This section describes the following circuit boards and their
connections.
Some connectors are marked MTC, which stands for
Manufacturing Test Connector. There may or may not be a
connector loaded on the board. MTCs are used at the factory to
connect to test equipment so that the board can be exercised
without the need for a GC. These connectors are not used when
the board is installed in an instrument.

Agilent Technologies

567

17 Printed circuit boards

Summary of PCB Part Numbers

568

Description

Part number

AC power board

G3430-60050

Analog and power board

G3430-60151 (replaces G3430-60150)

Logic and communications board

G3430-60120 (replaces G3430-60101

and G3430-60100)

Keyboard/display connection board

G3430-60003

FID signal board

G3431-60020

TCD signal board

G3432-60010

uECD signal board

G3433-61020 (replaces G3433-60020)

FPD signal board

G3435-60010

NPD signal board

G3434-60021 (replaces G3434-60020)

FID electrometer board

G3431-60010

uECD electrometer board

G3433-60010

NPD electrometer board

G3434-60010

Analog input board

G3456-60010 (obsolete) shown,

G3433-61020 has similar connectors)

7890 Series GC IPB

Printed circuit boards

17

AC power board
Part number G3430-60050

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector

Function

See also

J1

Supplies power to transformer

primary windings.

Main transformer

P1 and P2

Supply line power to the AC board.

AC power board
schematic

P3 and P4

Supply power to the oven heater.

P5, P6 and P7

These three connectors take

jumpers to the oven triac. Each
jumper connects to the nearest
connector on the triac, which must
be properly oriented.

Replacing the oven

triac

P8

This takes the power configuration

plug, which must have the correct
jumpers for the voltage supplied.

Line voltage
configuration plug

P9

Oven control from logic board.

P10

MTC

569

17 Printed circuit boards

Analog and power board

Part number G3430-60150 (shown). Connectors for the
G3430-60151 are in the same location.

570

7890 Series GC IPB

Printed circuit boards

7890 Series GC IPB

17

Connector

Function

See also

J1

SIG 1. Analog output for signal 1.

Analog signal outputs

J2

SIG 2. Analog output for signal 2.

Analog signal outputs

J3

REMOTE. Synchronize start/stop

functions for up to 10 devices.

Remote Start/Stop

J4

EVENT. Control external devices,

either active (24 VDC) or passive
)contact closures).

External event

J5

96-pin data connection to analog

and power board.

J6

BCD. Accept BCD-coded input from

selection valves and other devices.

J7

Receive power from transformer

secondary.

Main transformer

J8

Ribbon cable to automatic liquid

sampler board.

RS-232 cable, ALS

controller

P1

Supply power to the Communication

harness.

Communication
harness

P2

Supply power to the oven fan.

P18

Connects to the Motor Harness and

AC Control cable.

Motor Harness & AC

Control Assembly

P21

Connects to Inlet/Detector harness.

Inlet/Detector harness

P22

Connects to the Auxiliary

Zone/Valve Box Harness.

Auxiliary zone/Valve box

harness

571

17 Printed circuit boards

Logic and communications board (7890A)

Part number G3430-60100 shown. Connectors for the
G3430-60120 and G3430-60101 boards are in the same
locations.

572

Connector

Function

See also

J1

External LAN port.

J3

MTC

P1

96-pin buss to analog and power

board.

P3+

MTC

P5

MTC

P7

Connects to Comm Buss on

Communications Harness.

Communication
harness

P8

44-pin ribbon cable to keyboard

and display.

Keyboard/Display
harness,Keyboard
interconnect board

7890 Series GC IPB

Printed circuit boards

17

Logic and communications board (7890B)

Part number G3430-61010 shown.
NEED GRAPHIC FOR 7890B

Connector

Function

J1

External LAN port.

J3

MTC

P1

96-pin buss to analog and power board.

P2

96-pin buss to analog and power board.

P3+

MTC

P4

96-pin buss to analog and power board.

See also

P6

7890 Series GC IPB

P7

Connects to Comm Buss on

Communications Harness.

Communication
harness

P8

44-pin ribbon cable to keyboard and

display.

Keyboard/Display
harness,Keyboard
interconnect board

573

17 Printed circuit boards

FID signal board

Part number G3431-60020

574

Connector

Function

J1

MTC

P1

Communications buss.

P2

Ignitor.

P3

MTC

P4

Signal from electrometer.

P5

MTC

See also

Communication
harness

7890 Series GC IPB

Printed circuit boards

17

TCD signal board

Part number G3432-60015

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector

Function

J2

Filament (upper 2) and PRT (lower 2)

connections.

P1

Communications buss.

P2

MTC

P3

Switching valve.

See also

Communication
harness

Replacing the
TCD switching
valve

575

17 Printed circuit boards

uECD signal board

Part number G3433-60020 shown below. (Replaced by
G3433-61020.)

576

Connector

Function

See also

P1

Communications buss.

Communication
harness

P2

Signal from electrometer.

P3

MTC

7890 Series GC IPB

Printed circuit boards

17

FPD signal board

Part number G3435-60010

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector

Function

See also

P1

Communications buss.

Communication
harness

P2

MTC

P3

High voltage to photomultiplier.

P4

Signal from electrometer.

P5

Ignitor.

P^

MTC

P7

MTC

577

17 Printed circuit boards

NPD signal board

Part number G3434-60021 (replaces G3434-60020)

578

Connector

Function

See also

P1

Communications buss.

Communication
harness

P2

Bead power.

NPD power cable

P3

MTC

P4

Signal from electrometer.

7890 Series GC IPB

Printed circuit boards

17

FID electrometer board

Part number G3431-60010

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector

Function

J1

Input from detector.

P1

Output to signal board.

579

17 Printed circuit boards

uECD electrometer board

Part number G3433-60010

580

Connector

Function

J1

Output to signal board.

J2

Input from detector.

7890 Series GC IPB

Printed circuit boards

17

NPD electrometer board

Part number G3434-60010

7890 Series GC IPB

Connector

Function

J1

Input from detector.

P1

Output to signal board.

581

17 Printed circuit boards

Analog input board

Part number G3456-60010

582

Connector

Function

See also

J1

External input cable.

Analog signal
outputs

P1

Communications buss.

Communication
harness

P3

MTC

P5

MTC

7890 Series GC IPB

Agilent 7890 Series Gas Chromatograph

7890 Series GC Service Manual

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Inlets 584
Detectors 627
EPC Module Parts 669
Nickel Catalyst Accessory 674
Oven 676
Valves 685
Electronics and Fans 700
Covers 720
Tools 729

This section consists of parts lists and exploded views of the

instrument modules. It is a major reference for part
identification and part numbers.
For consumables and other customer-orderable parts, see the
latest Agilent Parts Finder software version and IPB models for
the 7890 Series GC.
In any table listing parts, a part with ID NS means the part is
not shown in the accompanying graphics.
Quantities listed are the quantities required in the assembly, not
necessarily the quantity to order (the quantity to order is not
the same as the quantity used when the parts are sold in
packages of more than one).

Agilent Technologies

583

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Inlets
This section contains illustrated parts breakdowns for GC inlets
and related components.
Split/Splitless Inlet (SSL)
Multimode Inlet (MMI)
Purged Packed Inlet (PP)
Cool on-column inlet (COC)
Programmed Temperature Vaporization Inlet (PTV)
Volatiles Interface (VI)

584

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Split/Splitless Inlet (SSL)

Top level subassemblies for SSL inlet accessories:
G3452A 100 psi split/splitless with EPC, Kit
G3460A 150 psi split/splitless inlet with EPC, Kit
G3453B Inert flow path, 0100 psi

Description

Part number

SSL Inlet Accessory 0-100 PSIG without ship kit (includes

inlet weldment, EPC module, and split vent filter assy)

G3452-60500

SSL Inlet Accessory 0-150 PSIG without ship kit (includes

inlet weldment, EPC module, and split vent filter assy)

G3452-60509

SSL Weldment Assembly without EPC module (includes

inlet weldment and split vent filter assembly)

G3452-60512

SSL inlet body with heater/sensor and insulation

(includes inlet weldment only)

G3452-67000

SSL EPC module, 100 PSI

G3452-60552

SSL EPC module, 150 PSI

G3452-60510

EPC module
G3452-60512

G3452-67000
G3452-60500
SVLJ
RU
G3452-60509
SVLJ

6SOLWYHQWOWHUDVVHPEO\

7890 Series GC IPB

6SOLWVSOLWOHVVLQOHW
ZHOGPHQWDVVHPEO\

585

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Split/Splitless Inlet, Top

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Cap, Merlin Microseal, low pressure

Cap, Merlin Microseal, general purpose
Merlin Microseal
Top insert assembly, standard
Insert weldment, inert, 7890
Top SSL insert weldment assembly,
headspace
Top insert, AC gang fitting weldment
Top insert assembly, valve
Septum nut, standard
Septum, standard

See Parts Finder

See Parts Finder
See Parts Finder
G3452-60730
G3452-60586
G3452-60100

1
1

2
3
NS
NS
NS
NS
4
5
6

586

O-ring, 12/pk
(2 required for EPC module seal, 2
required for valve seal)

G3430-60011
G3480-67585
18740-60835
See Parts Finder
5180-4181

1
1
4

Screw, captive, M3

G1946-20168

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Tubing assembly

G3430-60011

Split ring

0510-1306

Turn-top

G3430-40035

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

587

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

SSL Split Vent Trap

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Vent line tube assembly

G3430-60526

Screw, captive, M4 x 20 mm, T-20

1390-1024

Trap shell, back assembly (does not

include item 9 or 10)

G3452-60506

Trap nut

G1544-20650

NS

Split vent trap

See Parts Finder

Threaded trap shell, front

G1544-20675

Proportional valve, split vent

G3430-60527

Screw, M3 x 16 mm T-10 to attach valve

0515-1141

NS

O-ring, 12/pk
(2 required for EPC module seal, 2
required for valve seal)

5180-4181

1/8-inch copper tubing with length, 50 ft.

Trim to 325 mm or 12.8 in.

5180-4196

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

10

Trap retainer (key)

G3452-00005

2
3

9
10

6
7
8

588

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Split Splitless Inlet Body

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, Torx T-20 (captive)

C-clip

1390-1023
0510-1799

3
3

Inlet weldment

G3452-80570

Cap Inlet Shell Weldment Assembly, Inert

G3452-60570

Top insulation

G1544-00010

Heater/Sensor assembly

G1530-67950

Screw, M4 x 10 mm

0515-4788

Washer, 12/pk

5061-5869

Heater block

G3452-20500

Insulation block

G3452-00002

Insulation bottom

G3432-00003

10

SSL insulation cover

G3431-00005

11

Retaining nut for heater block

G1544-20590

12

Gold seal kit, includes washer

5188-5367

Gold seal, Ultra Inert, with washer

5190-6144

Gold plated seal with cross, split only

5182-9652

13

Reducing nut

18740-20800

14

Ferrule

See Parts Finder

15

Column nut

See Parts Finder

589

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

2
3
4
5
6

10

11
12
13
14
15

590

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Split Splitless Inlet Warmer

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

SSL insulation kit, 3 pieces

5188-5241

Bottom insulation cover

19243-00070

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, Torx T-20,

chrome-plated

0515-2711

591

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Multimode Inlet (MMI)

Top level subassemblies for the 7890B:
G3510B Multimode inlet, liquid carbon dioxide (CO2), kit
G3511B Multimode inlet, liquid nitrogen (N2), kit
Top level subassemblies for the 7890A:
G3510A Multimode inlet, liquid carbon dioxide (CO2), kit
G3511A Multimode inlet, liquid nitrogen (N2), kit
See the figures below.
Item

Description

Part number

7890A and 7890B

1

Inlet chassis

G3430-40011

MMI EPC module

G3510-60500

7890A Only
3

Multimode inlet, liquid carbon dioxide (CO2), kit

G3510-64000

Multimode inlet, liquid nitrogen (N2), kit

G3511-64000

7890B only

592

MMI LCO2 Module 7890B (includes EPC module,

inlet body, cables, cryo components, and
thermocouple PCA)

G3510-65200

MMI LN2 Module 7890B (includes EPC module,

inlet body, cables, cryo components, and
thermocouple PCA)

G3510-65300

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

EPC module
2

Inlet body

Split vent valve

2

Inlet body

EPC module

Cryo valve, bracket, and insulation

7890 Series GC IPB

Split vent valve

Thermocouple
board and cryo
valve cable

593

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

EPC module

Cryo valve, bracket, and dual CO2

supply weldment
5

Inlet body

Split vent valve

Thermocouple board and

cryo valve cable

Split vent valve

Inlet body

EPC module
6

Cryo valve, bracket, and insulation

Thermocouple board and

cryo valve cable

594

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Multimode Inlet Body

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

NS

MMI EPC manifold

G3510-60500

MMI Full Weldment* (includes cryo

jacket)

G3510-64100

MMI cryo jackets

MMI LN2 jacket, 7890A only

G3510-81310

MMI LN2 jacket, 7890B only

G3510-81011

MMI CO2 jacket, 7890A and 7890B

G3510-81210

Column nut adapter

G3510-20018

Foil (LN2 only)

MMI Insulation (LN2 or LCO2)

19243-00069

MMI Metal Insulation Cup (LN2)

G3510-00001

MMI Metal Insulation Cup (LCO2)

G3510-00002

Tube, precise, 0.010-in. id x 1/16-in. od x

15 cm long

G2855-20700

NS

MMI CO2 kit, 7890A only

G3510-67520

NS

MMI LN2 kit, 7890A only

G3510-67530

NS

Brazed shell

G3510-81000

* UltraClean part

See the Agilent Parts Finder software and the Agilent chemical
analysis consumables and accessories catalog for Merlin
assemblies.

7890 Series GC IPB

595

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

596

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

MMI Top Insert Assembly

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Cap, Merlin Microseal, low pressure

Cap, Merlin Microseal, general purpose
Merlin Microseal
Top insert assembly, standard
Top SSL insert weldment assembly,
headspace
Top insert, AC gang fitting weldment
Top insert assembly, valve
Septum nut, standard
Septum, standard

See Parts Finder

See Parts Finder
See Parts Finder
G3452-60730
G3452-60100

1
1

2
3
NS
NS
NS
4
5
6

G3430-60011
G3480-67585
18740-60835
See Parts Finder
5180-4181

1
1
4

Screw, captive, M3

G1946-20168

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Tubing assembly (top insert AC gang

fitting weldment)
Retainer ring
Turn-top (helix plate with molded handle)

G3430-60011

0510-1306
G3430-40035

1
1

2
3

7890 Series GC IPB

O-ring, 12/pk
(2 required for EPC module seal, 2
required for valve seal)

597

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

598

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

MMI Split Vent Trap

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Vent line tube assembly

G3430-60526

Screw, captive, M4 x 20 mm, T-20

1390-1024

Trap shell, back assembly (does not

include item 9 or 10)

G3452-60506

Trap nut

G1544-20650

NS

Split vent trap

See Parts Finder

Threaded trap shell, front

G1544-20675

Proportional valve, split vent

G3430-60527

Screw, M3 x 16 mm T-10 to attach valve

0515-1141

NS

O-ring, 12/pk
(2 required for EPC module seal, 2
required for valve seal)

5180-4181

1/8-inch copper tubing with length, 50 ft.

Trim to 325 mm or 12.8 in.

5180-4196

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

10

Trap retainer (key)

G3452-00005

2
3

9
10

6
7
8

7890 Series GC IPB

599

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890A MMI Temperature controller

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Wiring harness cable

G3510-60110

Thermocouple board

G3430-60095

Screw, M4 x 6 mm, T-20 (attach board to

bracket)

0515-2832

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (attach bracket

to carrier)

0515-2496

Bracket, PTV thermocouple board and

LCO2 valve (single CO2 bracket)

G3430-00058

Kit, containing thermocouple board and

wiring harness cable

G3510-67000

Figure 15 7890A Thermocouple board, bracket, and cables

600

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

7890B MMI Temperature controller

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Thermocouple board

G3430-60095

Bracket, cryo

Figure 16

Bracket, PTV thermocouple board, LCO2

cryo

G3430-00092

Bracket, PTV thermocouple board, LN2

cryo (Single CO2 bracket)

G3430-00058

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (attach board to

bracket)

0515-2496

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (attach bracket

to GC carrier)

1390-1023

Wiring harness cable

G3510-60110

Kit, containing thermocouple board and

wiring harness cable

G3510-67000

7890B Thermocouple board, bracket, and cable

7890 Series GC IPB

601

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890A MMI Cryo assemblies

602

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

NS

7890 MMI LCO2 kit (includes CO2 cryo

valve assembly, cryo bracket, insulation
cup)

G3510-67520

NS

7890 MMI LN2 kit (includes insulation

cover, cryo bracket, insulation cup, and
LN2 cryo valve assemblies)

G3510-67530

CO2 brazement (valve to IP tube)

G2617-80510

NS

Cap, protective without flange

1401-0044

NS

1/8-inch male connector without O-ring

G1543-80025

NS

Gland seal CO2

G1565-20590

NS

PTFE seal

G1565-20840

LN2 Noise reduction Restrictor

G3510-27000

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

7890B MMI Cryo assemblies

Item

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part number

MMI LCO2 Module (includes MMI Full

Weldment - CO2, EPC module, grommet,
TC board, and cable)

G3510-65200

MMI Full Weldment - CO2 (includes CO2

cryo assembly, MMI body and split vent
valve, insulation and insulation cup)

G3510-60520

MMI LN2 Module 7890B (includes EPC

module, grommet, cryo valve bracket, TC
board, cable, and MMI Full Weldment LN2
assembly)

G3510-67300

MMI Full Weldment LN2 7890B (includes

LN2 cryo assembly, MMI body and split
vent valve, insulation and insulation cup)

G3510-60535

Qty

603

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Purged Packed Inlet (PP)

Top level subassemblies for Purged Packed inlet accessories:
G3451A Purged-packed with EPC, Kit

604

Description

Part number

Purged-packed Inlet Accessory without ship kit

G3451-65520

Purged packed inlet weldment assembly without EPC

module

G3451-80506

Purged packed inlet EPC module

G3451-60551

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Purged Packed Inlet Upper Body

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Screw, Torx T-20, M4 x 12 mm

1390-1023

Top cover plate

G1543-00085

Top insulation

G1543-00100

Nut, Merlin Microseal

See Parts Finder

Septum, Merlin Microseal

See Parts Finder

Top insert weldment

19243-80570

Viton O-ring (12/pk)

5080-8898

Screw, Torx T-10, M3 x 16 mm

G1946-20168

Inlet weldment

G3451-80501

10

Thermal block

G1543-20765

11

Bottom nut

G1543-20580

12

Septum nut

18740-60835

13

Septum, 11 mm, low bleed (50/pk)

See Parts Finder

14

Heater/Sensor assembly

G1543-61540

NS

Top gasket insulation

G1543-00155

605

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

606

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Purged Packed Inlet Lower Parts

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

15

PP insulation

G3432-00004

16

PP bottom insulation

G3432-00003

17

PP insulation cup

G3431-00005

18

C-clip

0510-1799

19

Glass liner (25/pk)

See Parts Finder

20

Vespel ferrule (10/pk)

5080-8774

21

Tubing nut (1/4-inch brass), 10/pk

5180-4105

22

Column adapter

See Parts Finder

23

Bottom plate for oven

G1543-00060

24

Screw, T-20, M4 x 12mm

0515-2711

25

Adapter insulation, 1/pk

19234-60715

26

Insulating cup

19234-60700

27

Ferrules

See Parts Finder

28

Column nut (capillary, universal, 2/pk)

See Parts Finder

607

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

608

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Cool on-column inlet (COC)

Top level subassemblies for Cool on-column inlet accessories:
G3454A Cool on-column inlet with EPC, Kit
For cryoblast parts for G3467A and G3468A see CO2
cryogenic cooling on page 682 or Liquid nitrogen (LN2)
cryogenic cooling on page 684.
19245-60590 for manual injection with a fused silica needle

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part number

Cool On-column Inlet Accessory without ship kit

G3454-60501

Cool On-column Inlet weldment assembly without EPC

module

G3454-60502

Cool On-column Inlet EPC module

G3454-60554

609

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Cool on-column inlet body

610

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Septum nut base assembly, for

.250/.320-mm columns

19245-80521

Septum nut base, for .530 mm columns

G1545-80520

Manual cooling tower assembly

(optional), for .200 mm columns

19320-80625

Duckbill for use with cooling tower, 10/pk 19245-40050

Screw, M4 12 mm long

0515-2711

Heatsink fin

G1545-00010

Heater/Sensor assembly

G1545-60520

Screw, M3 x 16 mm, T-10

1390-1022

10

Septa

See Parts Finder

11

Insert spring

19245-60760

12

Inserts (identify by number of rings on

insert)

See Parts Finder

13

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

14

Inlet weldment

G3454-80500

15

Inlet weldment insulation

G1545-20630

16

Cavity sleeve

19245-00060

17

Ferrules (identify by internal diameter)

See Parts Finder

18

Column nut

See Parts Finder

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

611

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Programmed Temperature Vaporization Inlet (PTV)

Top level subassemblies for PTV inlet accessories:
G3500A Septumless head PTV, LCO2 Accessory with EPC,
Kit
G3501A Septum head PTV, LCO2 Accessory with EPC, Kit
G3502A Septumless head PTV, LN2 Accessory with EPC, Kit,
for 7890A only
G3502B Septumless head PTV, LN2 Accessory with EPC, Kit,
for 7890B only
G3503A Septum head PTV, LN2 Accessory with EPC, Kit, for
7890A only
G3503B Septum head PTV, LN2 Accessory with EPC, Kit, for
7890B only
Description

Part number

Septumless head PTV inlet, LCO2 accessory without ship

kit

G3500-65500

Septum head PTV inlet, LCO2 accessory without ship kit

G3501-65500

Septumless head PTV inlet, LN2 accessory without ship kit G3502-65500
Septum head PTV inlet, LN2 accessory without ship kit

G3503-60500

PTV EPC assembly, 100 PSI

G3500-60500

PTV Inlet chassis

G3430-40011

Septumless head

612

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Septum head

7890 Series GC IPB

613

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

PTV Inlet Body

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Septumless head assembly

G2617-60507

Septumless head weldment

G3500-80000

Septum nut (see also Parts Finder.)

18740-60835

Septum head (see also Parts Finder.)

G3500-80001

PTV inlet assembly

G2617-60506

Cooling jacket
PTV, CO2 cooling jacket

G2617-60508

PTV N2 cooling jacket

G2619-60501

NS

PTV inlet assembly with cooling jacket

PTV inlet with CO2 cooling jacket

G2617-60518

PTV inlet with LN2 cooling jacket

G2617-60517

Silver seal (5/pk)

5182-9763

Graphpak inlet adapter (includes silver

seal and ferrule)

See Parts Finder

Ferrules for graphpak inlet

See Parts Finder

10

Split nut for inlet adapters

5062-3525

11

PTV liner

See Parts Finder

12

PTV insulation block

G2617-20510

NS

PTV cryo insulator

G2617-60510

NS

PTV ferrule assembly tool

G2617-80540

* See the Parts Finder and the Agilent chemical analysis consumables and
accessories catalog for Merlin assemblies and other consumables, such as the
Graphpak adapter and ferrules.

614

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

1
2

6
7
8
9
10
11

12

7890 Series GC IPB

615

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

PTV Septumless head

Description

Part number

Qty

Septumless head

G2617-60507

PTFE ferrule (needle seal)

5182-9748

Service kit for SLH (Septumless head

repair kit: includes Kalrez seal, spring, and
Viton seal)

5182-9747

(3)

Kalrez seal (normally order item 2 instead) 5182-9759

(4)

Pressure spring (normally order item 2

instead)

5182-9758

(5)

Viton seal (normally order item 2 instead)

5182-9775

Valve body

5182-9757

Sealing element

5182-9760

Ferrule, 1/16-inch PTFE, for septumless

head carrier gas tube

0100-1375

PTV column adapter tube (includes

1/6-inch nut)

G2617-80550

10

PTV septumless head weldment (includes

jumper tube to septum purge channel)

G3500-80000

1
8
9
2
10

(3)
6
7

(4)
(5)

616

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

PTV Split vent

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part number

Qty

NS

Replacement filter kit

G1544-80530

Proportional valve, split vent

G3430-60527

Screw, M3 x 16 mm, T-10

0515-1141

NS

O-ring, 12/pk (2 for EPC module seal, 2 for

valve seal)

5180-4181

Flow block, split vent trap

G3452-60506

Trap nut

G1544-20650

PTV front trap tubing assembly

G2617-80520

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

Nut, 1/16-inch SS

0100-0053

Ferrule, 1/16-inch SS

0100-1490

NS

Split vent trap

See Parts Finder

NS

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20 (for trap

retainer)

0515-2496

NS

Trap retainer

G3452-00005

617

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

PTV Temperature controller

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Cable, thermocouple

G2617-60505

Thermocouple interface board

G2617-60010

Screw, M4 x 12 mm long, T-20 (attach

board to bracket)*

0515-2496

Screw, M4 x 12 mm long, T-20 (attach

bracket to carrier)

0515-2496

Bracket, PTV thermocouple board and

LCO2 valve

G3430-00058

*. Some 7890A assemblies use Screw, M4 x 6 mm long, T-20 (attach board to bracket), p/n
0515-2832.

618

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

PTV CO2 cryo assembly

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

7890 PTV LCO2 Cyro Assembly

(recommended repair level)

G3500-60515

Screw, #8-32 x .375 inch long (to attach

valve to bracket)

2510-0102

Bracket, PTV thermocouple board and

LCO2 valve

G3430-00058

Valve, PTV LCO2 cryo (included in

G3500-60515)

Cap, protective without flange

1401-0044

PTV CO2 brazement (valve to IP tube)

G2617-80510

NS

1/8-inch male connector without O-ring

G1543-80025

NS

Gland seal CO2

G1565-20590

NS

PTFE seal

G1565-20840

4
1

2
3

7890 Series GC IPB

619

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

PTV LN2 cryo assembly, 7890A

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

PTV LN2 nut plate

G2619-00040

PTV LN2 supply tube (included in 8)

G2619-20520

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (attach nut plate)

0515-2496

PTV LN2 insulation cover

G2619-00030

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (attach cover)

1390-1024

PTV LN2 cell inlet tube, for front inlet

PTV LN2 cell inlet tube, for back inlet

G2619-20510
G3500-20006

Screw, 8-32 x .312-inch, pan head, pozi (included

in 8)

2510-0043

7890 PTV LN2 Cryo Assembly (recommended

valve repair level). Includes cryo valve, mounting
bracket, PTV jumper cable, LN2 supply tube, and
mounting screws.

G3502-60510

PTV inlet tube insulation (included in 8)

G2619-00010

10

Mounting bracket, LN2 cryo valve (included in 8)

G3502-00001

11

Screw, M4 x 12 mm long, T-20

0515-2496

NS

PTV jumper cable (included in 8)

G2619-60502

NS

Connector, male (included in 8)

0100-0208

6
7
8
1

9
10

2
3
4

11

620

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

PTV LN2 cryo assembly, 7890B

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

PTV LN2 supply tube assembly, back

G3510-60008

PTV supply tube insulation

G3510-00021

PTV LN2 cell inlet tube, for front inlet

PTV LN2 cell inlet tube, for back inlet

G3502-20001
G3502-20002

Screw, 8-32 x .312-inch pan head, pozi (included

in 5)

2510-0043

7890 PTV LN2 Cryo Assembly

(Recommended valve repair level. Includes: cryo
valve mounted on cryo bracket, with LN2 supply
tubes and connector between the LN2 supply
tube and the cryo valve.)

G3502-60515

Mounting bracket, LN2 cryo valve (included in 5)

G3430-00021

PTV jumper cable (included in 5)

G2619-60502

Connector, male, 1/4-in. brass

0100-0208

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

621

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

5
1
6
2

622

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Volatiles Interface (VI)

Top level subassemblies for VI inlet accessories:
G3504A 100 psi Volatiles Interface with EPC, Kit

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part no.

VI Inlet Accessory 0-100 PSIG without ship kit

G3504-65500

VI Weldment Assembly without EPC module

G3504-60506

VI EPC module, 100 PSI

G3504-60501

623

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Volatiles Interface (VI)

624

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

VI top cover

G2319-00020

Top insulation

G2319-20580

Screw, M4 x 12 mm

1390-1023

Clamping plate

G2319-20540

Volatiles interface

G2319-60505

VI heater/sensor assembly

G2319-60503

Heater block assembly

G2319-60507

VI insulation, heater block

G2319-20530

Pneumatic fitting assembly

G3504-60500

10

Nut, 1/16-inch

19258-20830

11

SilTite Metal Ferrules, 1/16-in. x 0.5 mm

ID (10/pk)

5184-3570

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

625

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Volatiles Interface Trap

626

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

T08PC Valve Chemraz 0.01

G3430-60527

Screw, M3 x 16 mm, T-10, to attach valve

0515-1141

NS

O-ring, 12/pk for valve seal

5180-4181

Flow block, split vent trap

G3452-60506

NS

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

NS

Trap retainer

G3452-00005

Trap nut

G1544-20650

VI front trap assembly

G2319-80530

NS

Split Vent Trap

See Parts Finder

Screw, captive, M4 x 20 mm, T-20

1390-1024

Nut, 1/16-inch

19258-20830

SilTite Metal Ferrules, 1/16" x 0.5mm ID

(10/pk)

5184-3570

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

627

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Detectors
This section contains an illustrated parts breakdown for each of
the following 7890 GC detectors and related components.
Flame Ionization Detector (FID)
Flame Photometric Detector (FPD)
FPD+ (High Temperature FPD)
Microcell Electron Capture Detector (uECD)
Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD)
Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD)

628

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Flame Ionization Detector (FID)

Top level subassemblies for FID detector accessories:
G3461A FID with EPC, Kit adaptable to either packed or
capillary columns.
G3462A Capillary FID with EPC

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part number

FID Detector Module, adaptable without ship kit

G3431-60506

FID Detector Module, capillary without ship kit

G3431-60500

FID Packed Weldment Assembly with pallet, electrometer,

and base

G3431-80508

FID Capillary Weldment Assembly with pallet,

electrometer, and base

G3431-80506

FID EPC Module

G3431-60531

FID Signal Board

G3431-60020

629

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

FID detector

630

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Screw, M4 25 mm, Torx T-20

0515-2712

FID interconnect cover

G1531-00220

PTFE chimney (optional)

19231-21050

Collector assembly
For individual collector parts see Parts
Finder.

G1531-60690

Screw, M4 10 mm, Torx T-20

0515-2495

Interconnect J-clamp

19231-00040

Mounting pallet, FID

G1531-40020

FID Base Assembly

Cylindrical EMI suppressor, ferrite

9170-1730

10

Spring, electrometer interconnect

1460-2142

11

FID interconnect assembly

G1531-60715

12

FID electrometer

G3431-60015

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

631

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

FID Base Assembly

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Base spanner nut

19231-20990

Thermal strap

G1531-00105

Screw, captive, M3, T-10

G1946-20168

O-ring, size 2-006, fluorocarbon, 12/pk

5180-4181

Jets

See Parts Finder

Adaptable FID, base weldment with jet

G3431-80509

Capillary column FID, base weldment with

jet

G3431-80507

Screw, M4 25 mm, Torx T-20

0515-2712

FID block insulation

G1531-60700

Adaptable FID column adapters:

FID/NPD capillary column

19244-80610

FID/NPD 1/8-inch packed column

19231-80520

FID/NPD 1/4-inch packed column

19231-80530

Nut warmer insulation and cup assembly.

19234-60700

10

Heater/sensor assembly

G1530-67950

NS

Insulation, nutwarmer (1/pk)

19234-60715

G3431-80509 includes jet 19244-80560, capillary adaptable,

61.5 mm
G3431-80507 includes jet G1531-80560, capillary optimized,
43 mm, .29 mm id

632

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

633

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

PM kits for the FID

See Parts Finder and the Agilent catalog for consumables and
supplies for consumable parts, or visit the Agilent Web site for
the latest information (www.agilent.com/chem/supplies).
FID PM kits

634

Description

Part no.

Maintenance kit, FID rebuilding

G1531-67001

Maintenance kit, FID cleaning

G1531-67000

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Flame Photometric Detector (FPD)

Top level subassemblies for FPD detector accessories:
G3435A Single FPD with EPC, Kit
G3436A Dual FPD with EPC, Kit
Description

Part number

FPD Detector Module, Single, without ship kit

G3435-60500

FPD Detector Module, Dual, without ship kit

G3436-60500

FPD Body Assembly (without EPC, signal board, or PMT)

G3435-60575

Dual FPD Body Assembly (without EPC, signal board, or

PMT)

G3435-60585

FPD EPC module

G3435-60535

FPD Signal board (1 for single FPD, 2 for dual FPD)

G3435-60010

Single FPD

EPC module

7890 Series GC IPB

635

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

636

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

FPD inert transfer line parts

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty.

O-ring, FPD jet seal, white

0905-1608

Screw, M3 x 12 mm, T-10

0515-1084

Retaining clip

19256-00340

Inert transfer line

G3435-60555

Heater/Sensor assembly

G1535-60620

Capillary adapter seat

19256-21140

Capillary adapter nut

19256-21150

1/8-inch ferrule (10/pk)

0100-1332

1/8-inch nut (10/pk)

5180-4103

10

1/4-inch packed adapter

G1532-20710

637

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

638

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

FPD ignitor and heat shield assembly

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

FPD tube assembly:

Aluminum
Stainless Steel

19256-60700
19256-20705

Vespel ferrule, 1/4-inch id, 20/pk

5080-8774

Front ferrule, 1/4-inch id, brass, 10/pk

5180-4111

Back ferrule, 1/4-inch id, brass, 10/pk

5180-4117

Emissions block assembly

FPD, single
FPD, dual (not shown)

Ignitor replacement kit

A. O-ring
B. Spacer
C. Glow plug

19256-60800

13

Screw, M3 x 66 mm, T-10

0515-0680

12

Collet, ignitor

19256-20690

Ignitor cable assembly

G3435-60600

Heat shield gasket, white

19256-80045

First heat shield window

19256-80030

Heat shield disk

19256-20580

Stainless steel coupling

19256-20550

10

Lock washer (4 required)

2190-0584

11

Screw, M3 12, T-10 (4 required)

0515-1084

19256-80560
19256-80600

Qty.
1

639

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

640

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

PMT and bracket assemblies

Single FPD

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty.

Chimney back cover

G1535-80520

Heater/Sensor assembly

G1535-60610

Transfer line support bracket, single

19256-00320

Bracket/Support

G1535-00010

Emissions block assembly, single

19256-60650

Filters:
Sulfur
Phosphorus

1000-1437
19256-80010

Filter spacer (used only with sulfur filter)

19256-20910

Sping, PMT

1460-1160

PMT housing assembly

19256-60510

641

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

5
6
2

7
8
9

642

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Dual FPD

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty.

11

Dual cover assembly

G1535-80530

12

Emissions block assembly, dual

19256-60690

13

Dual FPD chimney back

19256-00330

14

Dual main bracket

G1535-00040

15

Dual FPD chimney front

G1535-00030

643

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

FPD lens assembly

644

Item

Description

Part number

Qty.

Clamp

19256-00090

Screw, M3 25 (4 required)

0515-0683

Silicone O-ring, 0.926-inch id (orange)

0905-1099

Convex lens

1000-1438

Lens housing

19256-20900

Flange ring

19256-00200

O-ring 12/pk, Fluoroelastomer, 1.239-in.

ID

5061-5890

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

FPD Covers
Item

Description

Part number

Single FPD top cover

G3435-80500

Dual FPD top cover

G3435-80501

Electronics top cover, with ground strap

Ground strap

G3435-60503
19256-60730

Auxiliary heater and valve control assembly

Aux zone/valve box harness

7890 Series GC IPB

G1530-60660

645

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

646

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

FPD+ (High Temperature FPD)

Top level subassemblies for FPD+ detector accessories:
G3435B Single FPD+ with EPC, Kit
G3436B Dual FPD+ with EPC, Kit
Description

Part number

FPD High Temp, Single

G3435-60300

FPD High Temp, Dual

G3436-60300

FPD+ EPC module

G3435-60335

FPD Signal board (1 for single FPD, 2 for dual FPD)

G3435-60010

FPD+, Single

EPC module

Figure 17

FPD+, Single

7890 Series GC IPB

647

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

FPD+, Dual

EPC module

Figure 18

FPD+, Dual

FPD+ signal board

648

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

FPD+ Assemblies
Table 38 Coupling, ignitor, and exit tube
ID

Description

Part number

Qty

O-Ring, 2-010, Fluorocarbon, brown (exit

tube)

0905-1014

Exit tube assembly, FPD+

G3435-60330

Screw, M3 X 6 mm long, pan head

0515-0680

FPD Ignitor cable assembly

G3435-60600

Collet, glow plug

19256-20690

Ignitor, cleaned w/copper gasket (for

FPD+, discard copper gasket)

19256-60750

Heat shield gasket, perfuoroelastomer

19256-80045

Window, first

19256-80030

Shield, heat

19256-20580

10

Lens housing coupling

G3435-20345

11

Screw, machine, M3 X 12 mm long, pan

head

0515-1084

12

Washer, lock, HLCL 3.0 3.1 MM-ID

6.2 MM-OD

2190-0584

NS

Washer-Flat metallic 3.2 mm-ID 9 mm-OD

1mm

3050-2326

NS

Spacer-Round 3.2 mm-ID 6 mm-OD

6mm-LG Br Z

0380-4876

7
1
2

8
9
10

3
4
11
5

12

7890 Series GC IPB

649

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Table 39 Lens housing

ID

Description

Part number

Qty

BK7 Convex glass lens, 31.2mm f.l.

1000-1438

O-Ring 2-021 Silicone Rust Color

0905-0955

Clamp

19256-00090

Lens housing

G3435-20391

RING, FLANGE

19256-00200

SCREW, 3.0 25 PN TX

0515-0683

O-Ring, Size 2-123, Silicone, Rust Color

0905-1159

1
2

4
5
6

Table 40 Brazements and heaters

650

ID

Description

Part number

Qty

WS2 Coated M3x12 Screw

G3435-20357

Retaining Clip, FPD Heater-Sensor

19256-00340

FPD UP HEAT/SENS ASSY

G1535-60610

FPD Cell Brazement - Inert

G3435-60558

FPD Emission Block Heater Assembly

G3435-60610

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

1
2
3

Table 41 Brackets, insulation, PMT, and filters

7890 Series GC IPB

ID

Description

Part number

Qty

Front detector cover assembly

G3435-81330

Chimney insulation

G3435-00340

Nut, hex, with lockwasher, M4

0535-0043

Chimney Insulation, Middle

G3435-00342

Screw, machine, M4 x 10-mm long

0515-2495

FPD Chimney back

19256-00320

WHC-375 Wire Clip

1400-3196

Filters

FPD Sulphur filter 394nm

1000-1437

Filter, P 5890 FPD

19256-80010

FPD Filter spacer (for sulfur filter only)

19256-20910

10

Spring, compression

1460-1160

11

PMT Assembly (single FPD+ and dual

FPD+ right side)

G3435-60360

12

FPD Main bracket

G3435-00370

651

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

1
5

8
9
2
10
11

4
5
12
6
7
5

Table 42 Covers (external)

ID

652

Description

Part number

Qty

M3 X 8mm Captive WS2 coated screw

G3430-20028

Single FPD+ top cover

G3435-81350

Ground strap

19256-60730

Electronics top cover, with ground strap

G3435-60503

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

4
3

See Table 43 below for additional parts used only on the dual
FPD+.
Table 43 Dual FPD+ parts

7890 Series GC IPB

ID

Description

Part number

Qty

Dual FPD cover assembly

G3435-81360

FPD Cell brazement, dual - inert

G3435-60559

Dual wavelength main bracket

G3435-00375

PMT Assembly (Dual FPD+ only, left PMT,

short)

G3435-60370

DW FPD Chimney front

G1535-00030

PMT Assembly (right PMT, long)

G3435-60360

WHC-375 Wire Clip

1400-3196

Screw, machine, M4 x 10-mm long

0515-2495

653

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7
8

7
8
5

654

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Microcell Electron Capture Detector (uECD)

Top level subassemblies for ECD detector accessories:
G2397AD ECD with EPC Accessory
G2398AD ECD with EPC Accessory for Japan

Description

Part number

ECD EPC module

G3433-60533

ECD Signal board

G3433-61020*

* Replaces ECD Signal board G3433-60020.

7890 Series GC IPB

655

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Microcell Electron Capture Detector (uECD) parts

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

1
2
3

uECD top cover

uECD signal wire assembly
Anode/Ferrule/Nut assembly (specific
license required)
uECD thermal cover
Thermal cover clip
uECD top insulation
Screw, M4 10 mm, Torx T-20
Clamp, interconnect
Captive screw, detector pallet, M4 20
mm
FID pallet
Tubing, Tygon, 30 inch
Screw, M4 45 mm, Torx T-20
Screw, M4 12 mm, Torx T-20
ECD Insulation cup kit
Screw, M4 x 40mm T-20

G2397-00011
19233-60635

1
1
1

G1533-00030
19233-00095
G1533-00020
0515-2495
19231-00040
1390-1024

1
1
1
1
1
4

G1531-40020
0890-0934
0515-2484
0515-2496
G3433-00004
0515-4793

1
1
2

uECD make-up gas adapter weldment

assembly, includes:
Fused silica indented mixing liner
End cap

G3433-63000
G2397-20540
19233-20755

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21

22
NS
23
24
25
26
27
28

29
30

656

Ferrules, capillary columns

Capillary column nut
Replacement ECD Cell (general license)
Replacement ECD Cell (JP Labelled)
Replacement ECD Cell (JP General)
uECD interconnect assembly
Screw, M4 10 mm, Torx T-20 to attach
electrometer
uECD electrometer without interconnect
Upper heated block
Heater/Sensor assembly
Lower heated block
uECD mounting plate

See Parts Finder

See Parts Finder
G2397-60610
G2397-60615
G2398-60615
G1533-60510
0515-2495
G3433-60010
G1533-20525
G1533-60625
19233-20515
G3433-60501

Nut warmer insulation and cup assembly.

Includes:
Nutwarmer insulation
Nutwarmer cup assembly

19234-60720

Ferrule, 1/4 in. Vespel (10/pkg)

1/4 in. nut, brass (10/pkg)

5080-8774
5180-4105

1
1
1

1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1

19234-60715
19234-60700
1
1

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

657

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

uECD Side Mount (3rd Detector) Parts

This section lists parts specific to the ECD mounted in the side
carrier as a third detector. For other service parts, see
Microcell Electron Capture Detector (uECD) parts.
G2397AD Micro ECD wit EPC
G2398AD Micro ECD with EPC (Japan only)
G3485B Manual Pneumatics Carrier for 7890B
G3440-68011 Mounting bracket kit

658

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Third Detector Heated Zone Cable

G3432-60506

Third Detector EPC Communication Cable

G3432-60505

1/8-inch Bulkhead union, 316 SST

0100-0133

aT-Manifold Assy

G1176-60569

Screw, machine, M4 x 12 mm long

0515-2496

Screw, machine, M4 x 25 mm long

0515-2712

Bulkhead fitting retainer, 316 SST

0100-0137

Nutwarmer cup assembly

19234-60700

Label, ECD Caution

19233-90730

NS

Nut Warmer Insulation

19234-60715

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

1
2
6

4
5

7890 Series GC IPB

659

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD)

Top level subassemblies for NPD detector accessories:
G3495A NPD (white ceramic bead) for packed and capillary
columns
G3496A NPD (white ceramic bead) optimized for capillary
columns only
G3463A NPD (Blos bead) for packed and capillary columns
G3464A NPD (Blos bead) optimized for capillary columns
only

660

Description

Part number

NPD Detector Module, adaptable, without ship kit,

includes bead G1534-60670 (white)

G3434-60506

NPD Detector Module, capillary, without ship kit

G3434-60501

NPD Adaptable Weldment Assembly with pallet,

electrometer, and base

G3434-80508

NPD Capillary Weldment Assembly with pallet,

electrometer, and base

G3434-80507

NPD EPC Module

G3434-60502

NPD Signal Board

G3434-60021

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) parts

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Screw, M4 10 mm, Torx T-20

Hinged cover assembly
Screw, M3 8 mm, Torx T-10
NPD bead assembly
Screw, M4, Torx T-20, 10 mm long
Power cable assembly
Lid weldment
Collector funnel, standard

0515-2495
G1534-80521
0515-0655
See Parts Finder
0515-2495
G3434-60600
G1534-80510
G1534-20530
5182-9722

1
1
3
1
3
1
1
1

Screw, M4 10 mm long
J-clamp
Screw, M4 10 mm long
NPD interconnect assembly
Spring, interconnect
NPD electrometer
Pallet captive screws, M4 x 20 mm long
O-ring, size 2-006, fluorocarbon, 12/pk
Screw, captive, M3, T-10
Mounting pallet
Jets

0515-2495
1400-0015
0515-2495
G1534-60610
1460-2142
G3434-60010
1390-1024
5180-4181
G1946-20168
G1531-40020
See Parts Finder

Base weldment with jet

- Capillary column NPD
- Packed column NPD

1
1
2
1
1
1
4
3
1
1
1
1

G3434-80505
G3434-80506

21
NS
22

Lid stop/standoff
Insulation cap

G1534-20590
G1531-00130

NPD Insulation cup kit.

Includes:

G3434-00004
G3434-00001
G3434-00002

23
24
25

Heater/sensor assembly
Column adapters for packed NPD

G1530-67950
See Parts Finder

Cup insulation kit. Includes:

Insulation
Nutwarmer cup assembly

19234-60720
19234-60715
19234-60700

Flow measurement adapter

G1534-60640

10
11
12
13
NS
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

NS

7890 Series GC IPB

NPD ceramic replacement kit

Includes top and bottom C-rings and
upper and lower insulators.

3
1
1

661

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

662

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD)

Top level subassemblies for TCD detector accessories:
G3432A TCD Accessory with EPC, Kit
G3437A TCD mounted on left-hand side of GC, Kit, for 7890A
GC
G3437B TCD with EPC mounted on left side of 7890B GC
19232C TCD to FID adapter kit
Description

Part no.

TCD Detector Module without ship kit (includes TCD cell,

heater and sensors, EPC module without switching valve,
signal board PCA, insulation cup assembly, and mounting
pallet)

G3432-60500

TCD base assembly, tested (includes filament block

assembly, delta PRT, heater/sensor, TCD switching valve,
detector baseline noise results)

G3432-60220

Acid tested TCD (includes filament block assembly and TCD

switching valve). Use only for specific applications, such as
fatty acid analysis.

G3432-60509

TCD EPC Module (without switching valve)

G3432-60532

TCD Signal Board

G3432-60015 *

*. Replaces G3432-60010, see service note G3440A-40.

Selecting a replacement TCD cell assembly

When replacing a TCD cell, normally order the TCD base
assembly (G3432-60220). This is the standard replacement part
for most users.
Customers performing analyses of certain acidic compounds,
for example, fatty acid analysis, may need the Acid Tested TCD
(G3432-60509). The Acid Tested TCD costs about twice as much
as a standard cell, and should only be ordered for the specific
applications that require it.

7890 Series GC IPB

663

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Figure 19

TCD major component identification (top-mounted TCD, G3437B, shown)

Figure 20 G3432-60220, TCD base assembly

664

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Figure 21 G3432-60500, Acid tested TCD

7890 Series GC IPB

665

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) parts

666

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

Thermal cover and insulation assembly

G1532-00027

O-ring, 12/pk (2 for EPC module seal, 4 for

valve seals)

5180-4181

Screw, captive, M3, T-10

G1946-20168

Screw, M4 10 mm, Torx T-20

0515-2711

TCD mounting pallet (top mount)

G3432-00002

TCD Insulation Cup Kit

G3432-00004

Screw, M4 x 40 mm, T-20

0515-4793

TCD seal insulation

G1532-00080

10

Column adapters, ferrules, and nut

See Parts Finder

11

TCD cell assembly

See Thermal
Conductivity
Detector (TCD)
on page 662.

12

PRT Sensor, TCD (Delta PRT)

G1532-60660

13

Heater/Sensor assembly

G1530-67950

14

Cylindrical EMI suppressor, ferrite

9170-1730

15

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20 (attach detector

to oven top)

0515-2496

NS

TCD vent restrictor kit (See Table 44 and

service note G1530-25.)

G1532-60700

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

1
2

4
5

11
12
13
14

15

7
8
9

10

7890 Series GC IPB

667

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Reference gas switching valve

module.

668

This valve is located on the EPC

Item

Description

Part number

Qty.

Clamp, switching valve

G3432-20523

Valve, TCD Switching

G1532-60620

Screw, M3 x 12 mm T-10

0515-1084

Cable, switching valve

G1532-60550

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

TCD vent restrictor kit Use this kit to eliminate baseline signal
spikes due to changes in laboratory air pressure due to doors
closing and similar events.
Table 44 TCD outlet restrictor kit G1532-60700 parts

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty.

Swagelok reducer

0100-0121

Restrictor

19232-60555

1/8-inch Graphite/Vespel ferrule (10/pk)

0100-1107

669

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

EPC Module Parts

Lookup table 669
Inlet modules 670
Detector modules 671
PCM modules 672
Aux EPCs 673
This section provides a quick reference to the EPC-related part
numbers.
Each proportional valve requires 2 O-rings (5180-4181, 12/pk).
The valve part numbers are for kits, which contain the valve,
screws, and a package of O-rings.

Lookup table
Each proportional valve has a part number on the valve. This
table lists the reorder part number for each proportional valve.

670

Part number on valve

Reorder

G3431-60508

G3430-67013

G3431-60509

G3430-67014

G3430-60527

G3430-67015

G3430-60528

G3430-67016

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Inlet modules
EPC modules
Description

Part number

O-rings

Slot

COC

G3454-60554

1 or 2

MMI

G3452-60552

1 or 2

PP

G3451-60551

1 or 2

PTV

G3500-60500

1 or 2

S/SL 100 PSI

G3452-60552

1 or 2

S/SL 150 PSI

G3452-60510

1 or 2

VI

G3504-60501

1 or 2

Split vent

Proportional valves

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Carrier

Septum purge

COC

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

MMI

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

PP

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

PTV

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

S/SL 100 PSI

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

S/SL 150 PSI

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

VI

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67015

G3430-67015

671

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Detector modules
EPC modules
Description

Part number

O-rings

Slot

uECD

G3433-60533

3 or 4

FID

G3431-60531

3 or 4

FPD

G3435-60535

3 or 4

FPD+

G3435-60335

3 or 4

NPD

G3434-60502

3 or 4

TCD

G3432-60532

3 or 4 or AUX Det
2

Proportional valves
Description

Air

uECD

Hydrogen

Reference

G3430-67013

FID

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67014

FPD

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

FPD+

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

NPD

G3430-67013

G3430-67014

G3430-67014

TCD

672

Makeup

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

PCM modules
EPC module
Description

Part number

O-rings

Slot

PCM

G3476-60501

1, 2, 5, or 6

Proportional valves

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Carrier

AUX

PCM

G3430-67013

G3430-67016

673

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Aux EPCs
EPC module
Description

Part number

Slot

AUX

G3470-60501

5 or 6 or AUX

Tubing weldment
Description

Part number

Pneumatic tubing with block connector and captive screw

G3430-60550

Figure 22 Tubing weldment

Proportional valves

674

Description

Channel

Channel

Channel

AUX

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

G3430-67013

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Nickel Catalyst Accessory

Top level subassemblies for FID detector accessories:
G3478A Nickel Catalyst Kit
G3440-60510 Nickel Catalyst Kit without ship kit

Item

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part number

Qty

Nickel catalyst assembly (items 2 through

8)

G3440-63002

Nickel catalyst hydrogen mix weldment

G3440-81000

NS

Screw,

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, captive

0515-2711

Top cover plate

G1543-00085

Heater/sensor assembly

G1580-61160

Top insulation

G1543-00100

Nut, hex, with lockwasher

0535-0043

Heater block

18900-20835

Screw, socket M4 20 mm

0515-0038

PP base insulation

G1543-00030

10

PP bottom insulation

G1543-00070

11

Adapter insulation

19234-60715

12

Insulating cup

19234-60700

675

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

676

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Oven
This section contains illustrated parts breakdowns for the
following 7890A GC components:
Oven assembly
Oven flapper assembly
CO2 cryogenic cooling
Liquid nitrogen (LN2) cryogenic cooling

7890 Series GC IPB

677

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Oven assembly

678

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Door hinge rod

G3430-20518

Oven door (non-removable)

G3430-60502

Oven heater shroud assemblies:

120V USA power

G1530-61610

200V Japan power

G1530-61620

220V Single phase power, Europe, and

208V USA power, single phase

G1530-61630

220V Single phase power, Hong Kong

G1530-61630

220V Single phase power, China

G1530-61630

220V China power, slow ramp

G1530-61230

220V Israel power

G1530-61630

230V Single phase power, Switzerland,

10 amp

G1530-61670

230V Denmark power, 10 amp

G1530-61670

230V Denmark/Switzerland power, 16

amp

G1530-61650

230V Continental Europe power

G1530-61650

240V Australia power

G1530-61640

240V South Africa/India power

G1530-61640

240V Great Britain/Ireland power

G1530-61640

240V USA power

G1530-61640

240V Australia power, slow ramp

G1530-61640

Screw, M4, Torx T-20, chrome plated

0515-2711

On/Off switch rod

G3430-40023

Hex nut, M4 x .7 3.2 mm

0535-0043

Motor, oven fan

G3430-60504

Washer

2190-0712

Door sensor assembly

G1530-80670

10

Oven door button

G3430-80513

11

Column clip kit (includes 4 spring clips

and screws)

G1530-61580

12

Oven sensor assembly

G1530-61030

13

Column hanger

1460-1914

14

Fan blade, stainless steel, and set screw

05890-80270

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

6
1

7
2
8
3

4
9
5

10

13
3
14
11
4

12

7890 Series GC IPB

679

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Removable oven door kit parts

680

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

NS

Removable oven door kit (includes screw,

door pin, hook plate, base plate, door, and
support spacer)

G3430-68640

Rod

G3430-20643

Screw: Mach M4 x 0.7, 20 mm, LG T-20

Pan HD SST

0515-0686

Lower Oven Flange Support Spacer

G3430-20645

Hook Plate

G3430-00647

Base Plate

G3430-00646

NS

Door, removable

G3430-60640

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Oven flapper assembly

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

NS

Oven exhaust duct and flapper assembly

(includes 3 captured screws 1390-1023)

G3430-60008

Dual duct assembly

G3430-81001

Screw, Torx T-10, M3 12 mm (to attach

duct to oven)

1390-1023

Screw, Torx T-20, M4 x 12 mm (to attach

motor to shaft)

0515-2496

Screw, Torx T-10, M3 8 mm (to attach

motor to duct)

0515-0655

Flapper bushing

G1530-20550

Flapper shaft assembly

G3430--81002

Stepper motor assembly

G1530-60945

681

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

682

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

CO2 cryogenic cooling

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Tee, brass, 1/8-inch

0100-0090

CO2 blast brazement (Cryoblast)

G1565-80550

Cryo bracket

G1565-00010

CO2cryo valve assembly (recommended

level for valve)

G1565-65510

1/8-inch male connector without O-ring

G1543-80025

CO2 inlet tube

G1565-20600

CO2 cryo inline filter

3150-0602

Cryoblast restrictor weldment

G1565-80590

CO2 weldment (oven cryo)

G1565-80505

10

Clamp screw

G1565-20560

11

Gland seal, CO2

G1565-20590

12

Screw, 8-32, .312-inch

2510-0043

NS

Screw Torx T-20, M4 12 mm

0515-2496

NS

PTFE seal

G1565-20840

683

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

684

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Liquid nitrogen (LN2) cryogenic cooling

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

N2 blast brazement

G1566-80535

Tee, 1/8-inch brass union, 2/pk

5180-4160

Connector, male, 1/4-inch

0100-0208

Screw, 8-32, .312-inch

2510-0043

Cryo bracket

G1565-00010

N2 restrictor tube

G1566-20575

N2 cryo valve

G3430-60018

Liquid N2 nozzle

19310-20500

NS

Screw Torx T-20, M4 12 mm

0515-2496

NS

Pipe thread sealant tape, 1/4-inch wide

0460-1266

NS

N2 cryo valve/dual blast assembly

G1566-65508

NS

N2 cryogenic kit

G1566-65517

685

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Valves
Top level subassemblies for Valve accessories:
G1580A Valve box for one valve
G1581A Valve box for two valves
This section contains illustrated parts breakdowns for the
following 7890 Series GC valves and related components. In
general, the valve parts are the same for both 7890 Series and
6890 Series GCs. The solenoid valve stacks have changed,
however. Be sure to order the correct version of parts or
upgrade the GC to the newer version if needed.
Valve box assembly
Valve driver assembly
Valve actuator assembly (1 of 2)
Valve actuator assembly (2 of 2)
Valco W-Series minivalve (See Parts Finder.)
Miscellaneous Valve Parts

686

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Valve box assembly

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Screw, M4 12 mm, Torx T-20,

chromeplated

0515-2711

Valve box cover

G1580-00030

Valve box insulation, top

G1580-00050

Insulation retainer plate

G1580-00040

Hex nut, insulation plate

Screw, M3 30 mm, Torx T-10,

chromeplated

0515-2525

Heater block

G1580-20520

1 or
2

Standoff, valve box

G1580-20500

Valve box bottom plate

G1580-00010

10

Screw, M3 8 mm, Torx T-10,

chromeplated

0515-2726

11

Heater/Sensor harness cable clamp

1400-0015

12

Heater/Sensor assembly

G1580-61140

NS

Cable-tie strap

1400-0249

NS

Aluminum tube (split/splitless inlet only)

18900-20320

NS

In-line filter (sample in line)

0101-0532

687

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

688

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Valve driver assembly

For 7890A: If your GC has serial number CN10201096 or
greater, or serial number US10281011 or greater, use the
new-style valve driver assembly parts.
If your GC has a serial number less than listed above, use the
old-style valve driver assembly parts (if available).
For 7890B: All 7890B GCs use the new style valve driver
assembly parts.

7890 Series GC IPB

689

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Valve driver assembly (original style)

690

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Valve driver bracket

G1580-00070

Captured screw, M4 12 mm, Torx T-20

1390-1023

Valve driver wiring harness

G1530-60660

PTFE tubing, 5 m, 1.5 id, 3 mm od

5062-2483

Adapter fitting

5185-8386

Standoff (included with valves)

4-way Solenoid valves

O-ring (with valves and end plate kit)

Solenoid valve end plate kit

05890-61097

10

Screw, socket head, M5 x 16 mm long

0515-1214

11

Elbow fitting, 1/4-inch, male

0100-1632

12

Exhaust tubing, 1/4-inch od, 120 inch

0890-1489

NS

Heater cable assembly

G1530-60790

8
G1580-61095

4
10

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

691

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Valve driver assembly (new style)

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Valve driver bracket

G1580-00071

Captured screw, M4 12 mm, Torx T-20

Valve driver wiring harness

G1530-60660

PTFE tubing, 5 m, 1.5 mm id, 3 mm od

5062-2483

Exhaust tubing, 1/4-inch od, 120 inch

0890-1489

NS

Heater cable assembly

G1530-60790

Adapter fitting

5185-8386

Airtec Solenoid Valve w screws

G1580-68000

NS

Screws for One Valve Stack (M4 x 30)

5185-8381

Screws for Two Valve Stack (M4 x 50)

5185-8382

Screws for Three Valve Stack (M4 x 70)

5185-8383

10

Screws for Four Valve Stack (M4 x 85)

5185-8384

NS

One Valve Stack*

G1580-65111

NS

Two Valve Stack*

G1580-65112

NS

Three Valve Stack*

G1580-65113

11

Four Valve Stack*

G1580-65114

12

PT 1/8-inch male elbow fitting for tube

1/4-inch

5185-8385

13

Solenoid Valve End Plate Kit

G1580-61097

Includes bracket, solenoid(s), fittings, end plates, and

harness cable.

692

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

693

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

694

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Valve actuator assembly (1 of 2)

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Valve actuator assembly

19325-60660

Modified screw

19325-80030

Quick-release pin

Hose fitting

0100-1707

PTFE tubing 5m, 1.5mm ID, 3mm OD

5062-2483

36 Actuator limiter

18900-21000

End cap

Elbow fitting

Coupler/Shaft assembly

NS

Hex key, 3 mm

1
0100-2264

1
1

8710-0911

695

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

696

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Valve actuator assembly (2 of 2)

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Cylinder end cap

O-ring, 1.176-inch id

0905-1405

O-ring, 1.046-inch id

0905-0463

Piston

19325-20640

Actuator cylinder

Hose fitting

0100-1707

PTFE tubing 5m, 1.5mm ID, 3mm OD

5062-2483

Piston rod

Dowel pin

1480-0017

10

Link

19325-80010

11

Screw, socket head, M4 x 8 mm

12

Elbow fitting

3
0100-1707

697

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

698

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Miscellaneous Valve Parts

The table below lists several valve accessory kits and parts that
are useful when installing valves, valve boxes, and related parts.
Description

Comment

Part number

G1580A

Heated valve box for one valve

G1580A

G1581A

Heated valve box for two valves.

G1581A

Nut plate assembly

05890-80660

Capillary (SSL or MMI) inlet to

upstream sampling valve kit

Kit to interface an upstream gas or liquid sampling valve to a

capillary or Multi-Mode inlet for sample splitting and
introduction into a capillary or megabore column.

G3480-67585

G2739A Liquid valve plumbing kit

This kit contains the hardware needed to install a liquid

sample valve into a GC. It does not contain the valve or any
automation.

G2739A

G2740A Gas valve plumbing kit

This kit contains the hardware needed to install any 6 port or

10 port valve into a GC and build any of the standard
configurations. It does not contain the valve, automation,
loops or needle valves.

G2740A

G2741A Needle valve kit

Adds an adjustable restrictor to control gas flows. Max temp

of 225 C.This kit is needed when the customer requires to
have a column isolation configuration built into a GC.

G2741A

G2742A Downstream capillary port Kit to interface a split/splitless inlet or multi-mode inlet to a
to valve kit
valve located downstream.

G2742A

G2743B 7890 Actuator kit

G2743B

7890 Actuator Kit. Adds automation to 7890A/B valve system

7890Awith S/N = CN10201096 or later and 7890A S/N =

US10281001 or later

7890B (all S/Ns)

G2744A Heated zone kit

This kit is needed when adding a third heated valve to a GC

that already has two heated valves installed. The heated zone
will allow a 4th valve to be added if required.

G2744A

G2748A

Hardware kit to mount an unheated gas sampling or liquid

sampling valve on the left side of the oven. Requires side
carrier accessory (7890A: G3485A or 7890B: G3485B).
Incompatible with MSD.

G2748A

G3478A Nickel Catalyst

Adds a nickel catalyst (methanizer) to a 7890 Gas

Chromatograph. Requires back inlet position. Compatible with
PCM in rear position.

G3478A

G3505A high pressure injection

device accessory

Requires an SSL inlet and one flow source from an Aux EPC or
PCM module. User must provide appropriate hardware to
interface sample to HPID. One only. Front inlet only.

G3505A

7890 Series GC IPB

699

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Description

Comment

Part number

G4338A Inert 0.530 mm id capillary

column to valve interface kit

Requires mounting plate 05890-80660. Each plate can hold 5

interface adaptors.

G4338A

G4339A Inert 0.320 mm id capillary

column to valve interface kit

Requires mounting plate 05890-80660. Each plate can hold 5

interface adaptors.

G4339A

G2855-60200 Swaging wrench

Swaging Nut or Swaging Wrench is required to swage SilTite

ferrule to column.

G2855-60200

G2855-20555 Swaging nut

Swaging Nut or Swaging Wrench is required to swage SilTite

ferrule to column.

G2855-20555

700

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Electronics and Fans

This section contains illustrated parts breakdowns for the
following 7890 GC electrical components.
Electronics carrier (logic, A&P, and LAN boards)
Keyboard Assemblies
AC circuit board components
AC power
Power cords
Main transformer
Analog input board (G1556A accessory)
Chassis fans

7890 Series GC IPB

701

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Electronics carrier
The table below lists the 7890 Series GC electronics carrier
parts. To identify the parts, see Figure 23 for 7890B and
Figure 24 for 7890A.

702

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

NS

Fuse, ALS controller PCA, 7A 125V (ALS

control PCA)

2110-0961

Analog & Power board

see Table 45

Logic board

see Table 46

Harness, 4-wire communication buss

(LVDS communications harness)

G3430-60513

Harness, keyboard and display

G3430-60514

Backplane for Analog and power board

G3430-00114

Backplane for Detector signal boards

G3430-00085

Grounding screw, M4 25 mm, T-20 (for

#1)

0515-2712

Screw, M4 x 6 mm

0515-2832

10

Screw, self-tapping

0515-4897

10

Nut, hex, with lock washer M4 x 3.2 mm

thick

0535-0043

11

Grounding screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (for

#6)

0515-2496

12

ALS Controller Assembly

G3430-60529

13

Cable, RS-232,7683 ALS controller

G2612-60510

14

Backplane right logic board

G3430-00114

15

Screw, T-20, M4 12 mm (attach ALS

board to carrier)

0515-2496

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

The tables below list the logic and A&P board changes for the
7890 series GCs. Entries in italics are obsolete.
Table 45 Analog & Power board changes
Part number

Model

G3430-60150
(Obsolete)

7890A

G3430-60151
(Obsolete)

7890A

G3430-61050

7890B, 7890A

Min. firmware

Service Note

Features
Original board. Power supply LEDs
inside GC. LVDS FETs not overcurrent
protected.

A.01.09

G3440A-025A

Power supply LEDs viewable on the

back of the GC. LVDS FETs overcurrent
protected.
Modifications to improve the power line
hold up time. If the lights blink in the lab
(due to a few missed line cycles), the
new board will continue to supply
power to the system whereas the older
board would have caused the GC to
reboot.

Table 46 Logic board changes

Part number

Model

G3430-60100
(Obsolete)

7890A

G3430-60101

7890A

G3430-61020

7890A

A.01.11

G3430-61110

7890B, 7890A+

B.02.00

7890 Series GC IPB

Min. firmware

Service Note

Features
Original board. LAN LEDs inside GC.
Two battery switches.

G3440A-025A

LAN LEDs on back of GC. One battery

switch. Used by OEMs that require old
firmware.

G3440A-058A

LAN LEDs on back of GC. One battery

switch.
Real Time Clock module can be
replaced. Extra LVDS channels.

703

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

1
11

6
12
5
8
3

13
9
4

7
2

10
15

14

10

Figure 23

704

7890B Electronics carrier parts

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Figure 24

18

7890A Electronics carrier parts

7890 Series GC IPB

705

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Keyboard Assemblies
7890A Keyboard and Display (original style)
Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Keyboard/display assembly with display

and harness

G3430-60555

Replacement keyboard assembly without

display

G3430-67500

Display

G3430-80003

Self-tapping screws

0624-1076

Keyboard/display harness

G3430-60514

Bracket

G3430-00098

Interconnect board

G3430-60003

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20

1390-1023

NS

Screw, self-tapping, 1/4-inch (connect left 0515-4897

and bottom sides of assembly to
electronics carrier)

NS

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (connects top

right corner of assembly to electronics
carrier)

0515-2496

Much of the keyboard/display is concealed by its plastic shell, so

that a conventional exploded view is not very helpful. Use the
schematic diagram below to identify parts.

706

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

707

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890A Keyboard and Display (new style)

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Keyboard/display assembly with display

and harness (includes G3430-67500,
G3430-60554, and G3430-80003
assemblies)

G3430-60555

Replacement keypad assembly without

display, without keys

G3430-61080

NS

Replacement key and bezel assembly (no

cable harness, no board, no display)

G3430-67500

Display

G3430-80003

Self-tapping screws

0624-1076

Keyboard/display harness

G3430-60554*

Door sensor interconnect cable

G3430-60561

Grounding nut, for display harness

0535-0043

Keypad support spacer

G3430-60022

Keypad support screw

G3430-20034

NS

Screw, self-tapping, 1/4-inch (connect left 0515-4897

and bottom sides of assembly to
electronics carrier)

NS

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (connects top

right corner of assembly to electronics
carrier)

0515-2496

*. Use for G3430-67500 and G3430-61080 keyboard assemblies.

708

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

709

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890B Keyboard and Display

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Keyboard Assembly 7890B

G3440-60555

Display

G3430-80003

Screw, M4 x 12 mm, T-20 (connects top

right corner of assembly to electronics
carrier)

0515-2496

Screw, self-tapping, 1/4-inch (connect left 0515-4897

and bottom sides of assembly to
electronics carrier)

Keyboard/display harness

G3430-60554*

Replacement key and bezel assembly (no

cable harness, no board, no display)

G3430-67500

Self-tapping screws

0624-1076

Replacement keypad assembly without

display, without keys

G3430-61080

Keypad support spacer

G3430-60022

Keypad support screw

G3430-20034

10

Door sensor interconnect cable

G3430-60561

NS

Grounding nut, for display harness

0535-0043

*. Use for G3430-67500 and G3430-61080 keyboard assemblies.

710

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

1
3
2
4
2
6

8
9

7890 Series GC IPB

10

711

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

AC circuit board components

712

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Triac jumper (part of 5)

Screw, M4 x 20 mm long

Washer

AC configuration plug

3
1390-1024

USA and Canada 120V

G1530-60690

Japan 200V

G1530-60700

Continental Europe, 220V single phase

power

G1530-60710

Hong Kong, 220V, single phase

G1530-60710

China 220V

G1530-60710

China 220V, 10 amp slow ramp

G1530-60710

Israel 220V

G1530-60710

Switzerland/Denmark, 230V, 16A

G1530-60720

Switzerland power cable, 230V, 10A

G1530-60720

Denmark, 230V, 10A

G1530-60720

Continental Europe, 230V

G1530-60720

Australia, 240V

G1530-60730

South Africa/India, 240V

G1530-60730

United Kingdom/Ireland, 240V

G1530-60730

USA and Canada, 240V

G1530-60730

Australia 240V, slow ramp

G1530-60730

AC board (without triac kit)

G3430-60050

Ceramic fuse, type x, 20A/250V

2110-0098

Glass fuse, type F, 8A/250V

2110-0036

Triac kit, includes triac (item 9) and

thermal link pad (item 10)

G1530-61340

Triac

Order item 8

10

Pad (under triac)

1205-0934

11

Hex nut

0535-0031

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

2
3
4

5
6

9
10

7890 Series GC IPB

11

713

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

AC power
Item

Description

Part number

Qty

EPC pneumatics carrier assembly with fan G3430-80503

NS

Screw, T-20, M4 12 mm (attach carrier

to oven)

0515-2496

Fan, pneumatics carrier

G3430-60006

NS

Screw, M4 X 30 mm, T-20

0515-0669

Washer, steel to attach motor

2190-0712

Nut with lock washer, M4 to attach motor 0535-0043

Oven flapper assembly

G3430-60008

Motor, oven fan, DC

G3430-60504

Nut with lock washer, M4 X 3.2 mm for

grounding straps (7 mm nut driver)

0535-0043

Transformer kit with large washers

G3430-60975

AC power board

G3430-60050

NS

Screw, M4, T-20

1390-1024

AC power inlet assembly (includes power

receptacle)

Regular oven
120 VAC (requires a C19 power cord)

G1530-61550

220, 230, 240 VAC (requires a C13 power

cord)

G1530-61560

Fast oven
All (200/208/220/230/240 VAC) (requires G1530-61550
a C19 power cord)

714

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890 Series GC IPB

18

715

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Power cords
The 7890 Series GC uses detachable power cords.
Countries

VAC

Description

Part number

C13, 10 amp

8120-1369

10 amp

8120-1378

Europe

C13, 10 amp

8120-1689

US / Canada / Taiwan /
Thailand

C13, 13 amp

8120-1992

Switzerland

C13, 10 amp

8120-2104

Denmark, Greenland

C13, 10 amp

8120-3997

India / South Africa

C13, 10 amp

8120-4211

Japan

10 amp

8120-4753

Israel

C13, 10 amp

8120-5182

Taiwan / South America

C19, 20A

8120-6360

Australia, New Zealand

Americas

120

Argentina
US

C19, 20 amp

8120-6894

Japan

C19, 20 amp

8120-6903

Chile

C13, 10 amp

8120-6978

Australia

C19, 16 amp

8120-8619

Great Britain /Hong Kong

/ Singapore/ Myanmar

C19, 13 amp

8120-8620

Europe

C19, 16 amp

8120-8621

Switzerland, Denmark

C19, 16 amp

8120-8622

Great Britain / Hong

Kong / Singapore /
Myanmar

C13, 10 amp

8120-8705

China

C19, 15 amp, Fast

8121-0070

C19, 15 amp

8121-0075

Israel

C19, 16 amp

8121-0161

Argentina

C19, 20 amp

8121-0675

India / South Africa

C19, 15 Amp

8121-0710

China

C13, 10 amp

8121-0723

Korea

C19, 16 amp

8121-1222

Korea

C13, 10 amp

8121-1226

15 A, 1.8M, C19

8121-1301

US

Thailand

716

8120-6869
120, 208, 240

240

220

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Main transformer
Part number G3430-60975

7890 Series GC IPB

717

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Note: Some transformers will have solid color wires as given;

others may have black wires with color markers.

718

Connector (pin)

Wire color

Primary (1)

NC

Primary (2)

Orange

Primary (3)

Yellow

Primary (4)

Black

Primary (5)

NC

Primary (6)

Green

Primary (7)

Blue

Primary (8)

White

Primary (9)

Red

Secondary 1 (1)

Violet

Secondary 1 (2)

NC

Secondary 1 (3)

Orange

Secondary 1 (4)

NC

Secondary 1 (5)

Gray

Secondary 1 (6)

NC

Secondary 1 (7)

Red

Secondary 1 (8)

White

Secondary 1 (9)

Red

Secondary 1 (10)

Yellow

Secondary 1 (11)

Blue

Secondary 1 (12)

Yellow

Secondary 2 (1)

Red

Secondary 2 (2)

Red

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Analog input board (G1556A accessory)

7890 Series GC IPB

tem

Description

Part number

Qty

Analog input board

G3456-60010

General purpose analog output cable

assembly

G1530-60560

719

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Chassis fans

720

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Inlet fan assembly

G3430-60590

Pneumatics area fan

G3430-60006

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Covers
Plastic covers 721
Back covers 723
Auto-injector mounting and parking posts
7890A Side Carrier 726
7890B Side Carrier 727
Mainframe 728

7890 Series GC IPB

724

721

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Plastic covers
NOTE

722

7890A GC shown. Plastic covers listed are the same for 7890A and 7890B
unless otherwise noted.

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Pneumatics cover

G3430-60546

Detector cover

G3430-40007

NS

Detector cover for HS

G3430-60017

NS

Removable detector top cover for CTC

G3440-60013

Inlet cover (7 screws to attach to inlet

carrier)

G3430-60540

Cover, left side with plugs

G3430-60541

Rotating insert

G3430-40024

1 1/2-inch hole plug

5040-4643

1-inch hole plug

5040-4642

Bezel, oven, black plastic, with 2 retained

screws

G3430-60545

Electronics top cover (1 screw to attach)

G3430-60543

10

Cover, right side (1 screw to attach)

G3430-60542

NS

Screw, Captive M4 12 mm, T-20

1390-1023

NS

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

NS

Screw, M4, T-20

1390-1024

NS

Detector top cover repair kit

G3430-67648

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

3
4
5
6
7

10

7890 Series GC IPB

723

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Back covers
Covers

724

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Cover, back upper

G3440-01090

Oven exhaust deflector (optional)

G1530-80650

Cover, back lower

G3430-00023

Screw, M4 12 mm, T-20

0515-2496

Lock washer, No. 8, 0.168 in.

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Auto-injector mounting and parking posts

7683B ALS

7890 Series GC IPB

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Injector mounting post

G2613-20500

Parking post, dual purpose

05890-61525

725

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7893A ALS, 7650 ALS

Item

Description

Part number

Qty

Injector mounting post

G4513-20561

Parking post, dual purpose

05890-61525

ALS Post Repair Kit

If the threaded portion of the ALS post is broken off in the inlet
chassis, order ALS Post repair Kit G3440-67001. The kit
contains:
Table 47 ALS Post Repair Kit contents
Description

Part number

Qty

Unique 7683 ALS mounting post

G2613-20505

Unique 7693 ALS mounting post

G4513-20574

Unique injection port cover

G3430-60022

The ALS posts in this kit are not compatible with the standard
injection port cover. The unique injection port cover in this kit
requires the unique ALS mounting posts.

726

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

7890A Side Carrier

Description

Part number

Qty

Screw, M4 25 mm, Torx T-20

0515-2712

Pneumatic carrier assembly

G1530-60950

Screw, M4 12 mm, Torx T-20

0515-2496

Flow side cover

G1530-01240

Screw, M4 10 mm, Torx T-20, flathead

0515-2725

7890 Series GC IPB

727

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

7890B Side Carrier

Description

Part number

1/8-inch Bulkhead union, 316 SST

0100-0133

aT-Manifold assembly

G1176-60569

Screw, machine, M4 x 12 mm long

0515-2496

Screw, machine, M4 x 25 mm long

0515-2712

Bulkhead fitting retainer, 316 SST

0100-0137

3rd Detector box cover assembly

G3432-60001

Screw, machine, M4 x 10 mm long

0515-1269

NS

Blank label plate

G1530-91705

Qty

6
4

2
3

3
7
3

728

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Mainframe
Description

Part number

Qty

Inlet chassis, for SSL, PP, COC, and VI

inlets

G1530-40020

PTV Inlet chassis, required for MMI and

PTV. (Accepts all inlet types.)

G3430-40011

Standard inlet chassis

MMI and PTV inlet chassis

7890 Series GC IPB

729

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Tools
This section contains parts not applicable to other sections.

Shipping Crates
Description

Part number

Where used

MS shipping crate

G2589-63001

for 5973 MSD

MS shipping crate

G3170-80000

for 5975 MSD

MS shipping crate

G3870-80100

for 5977 MSD

GC shipping container, 7890

G3430-98000

for 7890 series GC

7683 A/B Tray package

G2614-60500

for 7683A/B Tray, G2614A

7683 A/B Injector package

G2913-60480

for 7683B injector

Note: MS shipping crates include the wooden pallet, cardboard

carton, polyethylene bag, and protective foam. They do not
include transfer line packing, straps, or packing for a rough
pump.

730

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Hand tools
We assume you have a well-equipped toolbox, but some of the
special tools listed here will be helpful.
Table 48 7890 Series GC tool bag, 5182-3456

7890 Series GC IPB

Description

Part no.

Wrench, 1/4-inch to 5/16-inch

8710-0510

Wrench, open-end, 7/16-inch and 9/16-inch

8710-0803

Wrench, open-end, 1/2-inch and 7/16-inch

8710-0806

Wrench, open-end, 7/16-inch and 3/8-inch

8710-0972

Driver, nut, 7-mm

8710-1217

Cutter, tube

8710-1709

Screwdriver, Torx T-20

8710-1615

Screwdriver, Torx T-10

8710-1623

Tool bag

9222-3253

Tool, ferrule, .25.32 mm, 2 x 3 x 3/4-inch

RFT-2500

Tool, ferrule, .53 mm

RFT-5300

Lens, magnifying

G2855-40001

Septum tool, knurled handle

450-1000

731

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Drivers
T-20 Torx Driver 5182-3465
T-20 Torx Key (for close-quarters work) 8710-1807
T-10 Torx Driver 5182-3466

732

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

T-10 Torx Key (for close-quarters work) 8710-2140

#1 Pozidriv screwdriver 8710-0899
#2 Pozidriv screwdriver 8710-0900
Flat-blade screwdriver 8730-0008
1/4-inch Nut Driver 8710-1561 (FID Jets)
7-mm Nut Driver 8710-1217
Wrenches
Wrench, 1/4-inch to 5/16-inch 8710-0510
Wrench, open-end, 7/16-inch and 9/16-inch 8710-0803
Wrench, open-end, 1/2-inch and 7/16-inch 8710-0806
Wrench, open-end, 7/16-inch and 3/8-inch 8710-0972
Wrench, adjustable, 12-inch 8710-1712
Wrench, open-end, 3/16-inch x 1/4-inch 8710-2618
Wrench, open-end, 9/16-inch x 5/8-inch 8720-0010
Wrench, 7-mm x 8-mm 1340407010
Wrench, 6-mm x 7-mm 1340407011
Wrench, 8-mm x 10-mm 1340407012
Wrench, 6-mm x 6-mm 8710-2156
Wrench, 5-mm x 5-mm 8710-2157
Cutters/Crimpers/Strippers
Diagonal Cutters
Crimper/Wire Strippers
Tubing Cutters
Restek #20193 http://www.restekcorp.com
Agilent 8710-1709
Agilent precision tubing cutter for 1/16-in. SS tubing
5190-1442
Alternate for Europe:
HICHROM Ltd - Part No: HI-196
Description: Tubing Cutters - Price: 17.00
1 The Markham Centre Station Road Theale, Berkshire
RG7 4PE, UK Telephone: +44 (0) 118 930 3660
mailto: [email protected]

7890 Series GC IPB

733

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Pliers
Channel lock pliers
Slip-joint pliers
Needle nose pliers
Agilent needle nose pliers 8710-0004
Agilent Truarc pliers 8710-0018

734

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Specialized tools for GC support

FID Flow Tool 19301-60660

FID Cleaning Kit 9301-0985, (.010-inch Guitar String)
Injection Port Cleaning Kit 480-0003
12 Piece File Kit RSF-1200
7890 Series GC IPB

735

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

(Ferrule Removal tool, not shown 440-1000)

Fiberglass Tape 0460-0186
PTFE Tape 0460-0016
White Gloves 8650-0030

NPT Adapter 0100-0118

5/16-inch by #20 Thread Chaser (Die), to clean 1/8-inch
Swagelok threads Other Supplier
On/Off Valve, 1/8-inch Ball Valve 0100-2144
Exacto Knife
Metric (8710-0641) and English Allen Wrench Hex Keys
Pin Vise and small drill bit
Tweezers 8710-0007
Micro Probes (Sharp Object) RMP-5005 Qty 5
Inspection Mirror 707-0027
1.25-inch socket and ratchet for removing FID brass
retaining nut
Column cutter wafer, 4/pk 5181-8836
6890 inlet wrench 19251-00100
7890 inlet wrench (for SSL and MMI) G3452-20512

736

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Electronic tools for GC support

Digital Multimeter (Agilent U1231A True RMS shown)

Power Outlet Test Tool (Radio Shack/Sears/Electrical
Supply)
Static Strap 9300-0969 (small) or 9300-0970 (large), 5 ft
cord/clip 9300-0980
Wrist strap, disposable, 4-LG 1-W 9300-1408
Various jumpers and clip leads electronic supply
ESD mat 9300-1484
Useful Cables not shown:
Crossover LAN Cable 5183-4649
9 Pin RS-232 Null Modem Cable G1530-60600
USB/RS-232 adapter cable 8121-1013
Sensor pin extractor 8710-1542

7890 Series GC IPB

737

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

738

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Pneumatic tools for GC support

7890 Series GC IPB

739

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

Electronic Leak Detector

G3388B (or G3388A)
5182-9646, 120 VAC
5182-9648, 220 VAC (Agilent)
Rotameter, Porter Model 65
Tube 1: 10-70 cc/min He, Tube 2: 85850 cc/min Air
http://www.porterinstrument.com/indust_21.php
Electronic Flow Meter
Preferred flow meter: Precision gas flow meter, flow range
5500 mL/min 5067-0223

ADM 1000 220-1170

ADM 2000 220-1171-U (Mass Flow Version)
Electronic "Mass" Flow Meter Flow Tracker
Model 1000 Flow Only 5183-4779
Model 2000 with Leak Detector 5183-4780
Universal Power Adapter 5183-4781
White Silicone Tubing:
4 meters 701-0016
7 cm 220-1179
PTFE tubing, 1/8-inch, 1 m long G1290-80050
740

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

For Checking Inlet Pressure

Quality Analog Pressure Gauge (0-100 or 0-60 PSIG) adapted
with a Headspace Probe (301-013-HSP) need NPT adapter
0100-0118 and TCD Ferrules Set 5180-4103, 5182-9673,
5182-3477
Digital Pressure Gauge (0-100 PSIG) Omega Model
HHP-201 Adapted with 1/8-inch NPT adapter 0100-0111, SS
Capillary 5021-1831, Reducing Ferrule 0100-1342 and 530
uM Column Ferrule 5080-8773

NPD Flow adapter - G1534-60640

G1530-20610 - FID/NPD Jet Plug

"No-Hole" Column Ferrules 5181-7458

7890 Series GC IPB

741

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

FID Flow adapter - 19301-60660

5060-9055 uECD/TCD Detector Plug

Plastic 1/8-inch Swagelok Cap P/N 0100-2414 Qty 3

Replacement Septum Purge Fitting for EPC Module P/N
G2630-61720 (Not included in kit)

742

7890 Series GC IPB

Illustrated Parts Breakdown

18

Blanking plug, finger tight, 5020-8294. (Can be used with any

ferrule to duplicate using a no-hole ferrule.)

7890 Series GC IPB

743

18 Illustrated Parts Breakdown

744

7890 Series GC IPB